METHOD GASPEY-OTTO-SAUER.

ARABIC GRAMMAROF THE WRITTEN LANGUAGE

REV. G. W. THATCHER, M. A., A. D.WARDEN OF CAMDEN COLLEGE. SYDNEY, NEW SOUTH WALES, AUSTRALIA.

FORMERLY SENIOR TUTOR, MANSFIELD COLLEGE, OXFORD.

SECOND EDITION.

LONDON.OAVI NUTT (A. O. Berry), 818 Shaftcebury Avenue, W. C. 2.

DULAU & CO., U4 36 Margaret Street, Cavendish Square Wl.5EW YOBK: BRENTANO'S, Fifth Avenue and 27th Street.

THE INTERNATIONAL NEWS COMPANY, 83 and 85 Duane Street.

G E. 8TECHERT & CO., 161166 West 26th Street.

E. 6TEIGER & CO., 49 Murray Street.

BOSTON: G. REUSCHEL, 110 Tremont Street

8CHOENHOF BOOK COMPANY, 128 Tremont Street,

HEIDELBERG.JULIUS GROOS.

1922.

The Gasper- Otto -Saner Method has become my sole property byright of purchase. These books are continually revised. All rights,

especially those of adaptation and translation into any language, arereserved. Imitations and copies are forbidden by law. Suitablecommunications always thankfully received

Heidelberg. Juliu

B ..

--

j]

Ill

Preface.

During the last ten years of my teaching of Arabic

I have often found that my pupils had received much

help from Harder's Arabic Grammar 1,and have been

asked whether there was a similar work in English.

When I was asked by the firm of Julius Groos to write

such a work using Harder to any extent, I gladly

consented, and trust this Grammar may be useful to

many students of Arabic, who cannot read German.

The present work is a grammar of Arabic as it

has been and is written. The spoken language varies

in Arabia, Egypt, Syria, Morocco etc. but the written

language is the same for all; the chief difference

between the modern and ancient literature consisting

in the introduction of new words to meet the require-

ments of advanced knowledge. ,

Each lesson should be thoroughly mastered before

the next is studied. Each exercise should be carefully

worked and compared with the key.

In the supplement only a few extracts from older

books are given, as the Koran and other works of this

class can easily be obtained. Special attention is givenon the other hand to selection from modern novels,

journals and correspondence.

To those who wish to study the grammar of the

classical Arabic further I would recommend the last

1 Arabische Konversations-Grammatik mit beeonderer Be-

rQcksichtigung der Schriftaprache von Ernst Harder. Heidelberg,Julius GrooB, 1898.

2G11C

IV Preface.

edition of Wright's Arabic Grammar published by the

Cambridge University Press.

The various styles of Arabic handwriting niaj" be

studied in the Specimens d'ecritures Arabes (with key)

published at the Imprimerie Catholique in Beyrouth.A handy guide to Arabic literature is M. C. Stuart's

"Arabic Literature" London 1903.

Sydney (New South Wales), September 1910.

G. W. Thatcher.

Table of Contents.

Pages

Preface mIntroduction *

Alphabet 1. Pronunciation 4. Classification of Letters 4.

Vowels 5. Nunation 7. Sukfln 8. Tashdld 8. Hamza 9.

Madda 13. Syllable 14. Accent 15. Numerals 15.

Abbreviations 16.

Exercises in reading 17

First Part.

Lesson 1. Article 23

2. Feminine. Collectives 25

3. Number 29

4. Broken Plural . 33

6. Broken Plural 36

6. Declension. Genitive 40

7. Genitive (continued) 44

8. Pronominal Suffixes 49

* 9. Demonstrative Pronouns 53

10. Adjectives 57

> 11. Verb 61

12. Verb with suffixes 67

13. Imperfect 71

14. Moods of Imperfect 76

15. Jussive 80

16. Imperative. Present Participle. Verbal Noun . 84

=. G 2 s c

17. Passive. Particles ,..t , ,..t and ,.,i - 89

VI Table of Contents.

Pages

Lesson 18. Derived Forms of Verb 94

19. II. III. and IV. Forms .10020. V. and VI. Forms 107

21. VII. and Vm. Forms Ill

22. IX. and X. Forms 116

28. Classification of Verbs. Doubled Verbs ... 121

24. Hamzated Verbs 129

25. Hamzated Verbs 136

26. Weak Verbs. A. Assimilated verbs .... 143

27. Weak Verbs. B. Hollow verbs 151

28. Weak Verbs. C. Defective verbs 167

29. Doubly Weak Verbs 184

80. Quadriliteral Verbs. Verbs of wonder. Optative.

The verbs

o, plo , Ji ,

jJo , yX and its sisters . . 193

81. Relative sentences 202

32. Numerals. Dates. Age 210

33. Numerals (Ordinals) 225

Second Part.

Lesson 34. Noun 233

35. Nouns of Place and Time, Instrument, Dimi-

nutive . . . , . . 240

36. Relative Adjective. Adjectives 244

37. Proper names 249

38. Feminine 251

39. Number. Broken Plurals 256

40. Broken Plurals (continued) 268

41. Declension of Noun 274

42. Use of Cases. Emphasis. Permutative . . 278

43. Pronouns 287

44. Prepositions . 290

45. Adverbs . . 305

Table of Contents. VII

Pages

Lesson 46. Conjunctions 313

47. Conditional sentences 321

48. Interjections . . 327

48. Arabic Verse 332

Supplement 345

Arabic-Engllsh Vocabulary 381

English-Arablc Vocabulary 437

Arabic Index 449

English Index . 460

Introduction

Arabic characters are written from right to left.

The alphabet (sLs^ hija) consists of 28 characters

(op- harf, plur. O3js> huruf), which all represent con-

sonants. Most of these letters are written in slightlydifferent forms according to whether they 1. stand

alone or 2. are joined to a preceding letter or 3. are

joined to a preceding and a following letter or 4. are

joined to a following letter only.

Arabic Grammar.

Introduction.

Note 1. The letter' I (altf) has no sound of its own but

is used merely a)- as a support for hamza under certain con-ditions (see 10). or b) to lengthen a preceding a vowel (see 6)

Introduction.

or c) at the end Of 8^ plur. of verbs (see 6, Note 4). The

first real consonant of the Arabic alphabet if * (see 3 and 10).

Note 2. When the letter tft is used as the feminine ending

of nouns or adjectives it i written as ha () with two dots (s) and

, JO- -

is called K&*j 5J tft marbuta, the ordinary tft being called

v'j tft tawlla. This tft of the feminine ending is not pro-

nounced in modern Arabic except when followed by a word

beginning with a vowel sound. The modern usage is observed9-0-.

in the technical terms of this book e.g. hamza forOJT;

hamzat

al-wasl for

Note 8. In NW. Africa f is written ^ and q v_j.

Note 4. The following letters are sometimes used in

foreign words: y = p; T ch (as in church), <J? = v.

2.

The six letters \ <* ^ j j 3 can on^y ^e joined

to preceding not to following letters. These are called

yJLafcu u^jO-,hnruf munfasila i.e. separate letters; .the

O, s , O j t

others are called AJLai* ^y^ huraf muttasila i.e.

united letters.

Among ordinary combinations of letters iajgritingrare the following:

f. bft-h& g^ ha-jim-jim ^ or K (joined to preceding

letter ^L) lam-alif

^ ba-y& s^ sln-ha ^ lam-h&

SF ta-h& ^ sad-hft I lam-mim

^ ta-ya -^ 'ain-jim ^? mlm-r>a

5? jim-h& ^ fa-h& t mim-mim

j^ ha-jim ^ fa-y& JP nun-ha

^ nun-yft a? ya-h&

S> ha-mim ^ ya-mto.

4 Introduction.

3.

Pronunciation of the Consonants.

The following letters are pronounced like their

English equivalents:

v_ ba = b. o ta = t. & tha = th as in think.

_ jirn=

j. j dal d. o dhal = dh = th as in

this, j ra = r.j

zai = z. ^ sin = s as in so.

(jfcshin = sh as in shot, o fa = f. & kaf = k.

<$ lam = 1. * rnlm = 01.^ nun = n. ha = h.

3 waw = w.(jr ya = y. (3

and ^5 are also used

to lengthen a preceding u or i vowel see 6).

The following represent sounds foreign to English:

s. hamza is a click produced by a quick com-

pression of the upper part of the throat.

ha is an h pronounced with a strong expulsionof air from the chest.

^ kha is a guttural ch as in the Scotch "loch"

but. more from the throat.

(Jo sad, (jo dad, >b ta and J& ga form a group of

emphatic sounds corresponding with ^ s, ^ d, o t

and - z distinguished from them by the tongue being

placed against the palate instead of against the teeth.

^'ain ig a very strong guttural produced by com-

pression of the throat and expulsion of the breath.

ghain has a hard sound between a snarling

pronunciation of gh and r.

qaf is a k sound produced in the throat, (like

the cawing of a crow).

4.

Classification of the Letters.

1. Arabian grammarians divide the letters of the

alphabet (z-&^l\ oJ=> huruf alhija') into a) those

Introduction.

* - ) j.>

which are dotted (iU^- ^j> hurnf rau'jauaa) and.

b) those which are not dotted (VdUg* o^y> huraf

muhmala).

2. More practical is the division into a) Sun

letters (iu,*Ajf cA>j3|alhuruf ashsharaslya) namely

, ^> , ^ j, > L>"> vA uf, o*, A A v5,which

assimilate the 1 of the Article, and b) Moon letters

fciytJuT o^2 5 alhuruf alqamariya), comprising the other

letters of the alphabet, which do not assimilate the 1

(see Lesson I).

3. The letters, I aljf, ^ wa\ and'^ jj are called Weak

letters (LJ? v-4js>hurQf al'illa) because they arc often

interchanged or dropped under the influence of other

letters. Contrasted with these, the other letters of the

alphabet are called Sound letters (s^Waj 3 alhuruf

assahlha). ..

5.

Vowels.

Every consonant in a vocalised Arabic text is

providedr^ith a vowel sign or with a sign indicating

the absence of a vowel.

The vowel signs (jXfe shaki, Plur. 3lXa! ashkal or

i shukttl) are three in number:

1. iLste fatha, a small diagonal stroke over a con-

sonant = a as in o da.

0,0,2. *f*S kasra a scroll diagonal stroke under a con-

sonant = i as in o di.

?. &*/> damma, a small 3 above a consonant =u as in o du.

6 Introduction.

The sign indicating the absence of a vowel is -^

written above^a consonant. It is called ayL* sukan6-- > i

oriJojs. jazma e.g. ^ kun.

Note L The three vowel signs above do not 'actnally

represent ail the vowel sounds used in pronunciation for while

fatha preserves the & sound after ., -i, g, ,it inclines to

the sound of au in "taught" after the Emphatic letters yo, (_p,

_b? ^0, *, and is usually thinned down to the sound of S after

G <"

the other letters as in u-J$ kelbun.

o.-..

Note 2. In Arabic. a vowel is called a "movement" (MJ>>

haraka) and ao a consonant is either "moved"(t^Sj^C* mutaharrik)

i.e. provided with a vowel, or. "resting" (^Tu sakin) i.e. without

vowel.

6-

Long Vowels and Diphthongs.

Jhe_long_vowels a, I,' a are^ expressed in Arabic

b^the signs _L_ followed by I, ^5, ^ (written

without sukun), thus Ju malun "wealth", ^S klsuno >

"a purse", j^b tulun "length".

The diphthongs ai and au (now generally pronounced

as English a and o) are written ^5 and .

'

as ^^1

)>aitunua house

', ji- khaufun "fear".

Note 1. In a few words a is expressed by a short vertical

' '

!

stroke over a consonant as in \0& hadha "this", Mi dbalika

"that",^ lakin "bot", i'i allshu "God" etc.

Note 2. At the end of a word & is often expressed by

_1_ followed by ^5 (without dot* or sukun), thus rams "he

Introduction.

threw", Q ila "unto". As soon as this ^5 ceases to be final

* * *

it returns to the form I e.g. sic, raraShu "he threw him".

-o- , > OThe Arabian grammarians call this

<j? the &LJ!

alif bisorat alyft' "alif in the form of ya". The sign for a at

3, , o. G *the end of a word (whether I or ^) is called

alif maqsflra "alif that can be shortened" because it is short-ened when followed by a word beginning with hamzat alwasl

(see 11).

Note 3. In a few words ending in at an older form ofii 9 ' -

writing them with 8j or xj occurs. These are aj-o- or

hayfttun "life", 8jLe or s!^Lo salStun "prayer", S^j or

O . . 9 lo- - o-

al^Dj zakatun "alms", *Jj>i orS^_^> tauratun "Torah" (the

Mosaic Law).

Note 4. An I is written bat not pronounced after the $> * *

with which some verbal forms end e.g. \^J==> katabu "theyo . -

wrote"\^>j

ramau "they threw". The\

Is also not pronouncede

in the word iuU mi'atun "hundred".

7.

Nunation.

At the end of nouns and adjectives, when indefinite,the three vowel signs are sometimes written double,

,thus JL, _ ,_L and are then ronounced tw, in, an,

This is the so-called Nunation,(cw tanwln). The

sign fot an has i as well, except after B e.g. LL

baban, aLif khaltfatan.

When however an is a contraction for oyu we

find it written ^JL as ^jsi hudan (for hudayun); *&.

8 Introduction

n contraction for awun it is written ^5 or !_L as

J^tf. or uae^asan (forc

asa\vun).

8.

Sukun or Jazma.

The absence of a vowel after a consonant isjndi-O 9-o ,

cated by the sign __ called oyC* sukun or Xxp. jazma

e.g. JJ3 qatlun "a killing", \&lzS katabat "she wrote".

The letters ^ and ^5 take sukun when they form

diphthongs, but not when they only lengthen__vowels

(see 6).

For the omission of sukun with the lain of the

article see 9.

oA vowelless consonant is said to be

^jfl**sakin

"resting" ( 5, note 2).

9.

Tashdld.

When a consonant occurs twice without a vowelsound between, it is written once only qnd the sign

(called vXisX-iJ tashdld) is placed over it e.g. JS-

marra "he passed by", ^U marrun "passing by". Theconsonantal sound however must be distinctly pro-nounced twice.

Tashdld often indicates assimilation. Thus the ^

of the Article 3! al is assimilated when the word to

which it is prefixed begins with a Sun letter (see 4).

The (3 is retained in writing but without sukun; ajgtd^Go*

tashdld is written over the following letter e.g. J-^KJ o 5

shamsun "sun" becomes with the Article ^^J-iJ! ash-

shamsu "the sun"; Jo^ rajulun "a man" becomea.

arrajulu "the man".

Introduction. 9

Again the o of the words*

}\ *an "that", ^ min

and ^ c

an "from" is assimilated to the J and^

of ^

la "not", U ma "what" and ^ man "who, whom" in

^1 alia = an-la, "that not", U* minima and L*i 'aramfi

"from what", ^I^mimman and{

.

y4f.

eamman "from him

who": so also ttt 'ilia = 'in-la "if not".

Sometimes the letters o, cy, o, o, <j>, JP,"J& are

assimilated to a following o.Here also the letter assimilated is left in the writing

but without sukun, while a tashdld is written over the

o e.g. co'.t aratta = arad-tA, d^ labittu = labith-tu.^ :,

10.

Hamza.

Hamza _JL.(jl cf. 1, Note 1 and 3) -is of

o .,0,0 >- o

two kinds 1. ,h>^t SJ^Phamzat alqat", which cannot

be dropped and 2. Juo^J! aJ.P hamzat alwasl, which

is omitted under some circumstances (see 11).

It is generally written above (with JL- and _L) or

under (with _)one of the letters

I, ^ ^ but sometimes

independently. The following are the rules for writing it:

I. At the beginning of a word it is always written9o O,o Oo

with i e.g. jA\ amrun, a.^? ibratun, ..o5 'udhnun.

II. In the middle of a word:

a) Preceded by _1_ a and i. followed by _I_ a or* O ^

sukun it is written above I e.g. JL. sa'ala, uw?jra'sun;

2. followed by _ it is written above ^ e.g.

ya'isa; 3. followed by _i_ u it is written above 3 e.g.

ba'usa.

10 Introduction.

b) Preceded by _ i it is written above ^ e.g.Go

^ biruu.

c) Preceded by _i_ u it is written above ^ when

followed by a or u, above ^ when followed by i, e.g.

JL yu'allifu, ^L su'ila.

d) Preceded by sukun it is written above I when

followed by _!., over 3 when followed by u, over ^when followed by e.g., ilLl yas'alu, J^ yab'usu.

e) If hamza is preceded by t or 3 of the long

vowel, it is written a little above the line without any

bearer e.g. i3U4 tasa'ala, fr^yu maqru'atun; if preceded

by the ^ of long I, it is written above the stroke that

joins the ^ to the following letter e.g. x ;k.L khatl'atun.

III. At the end of a word:

a) It is not affected by the vowel that follows it,

but is written over \ afler _L over after,over ^5

after _ e.g. \j* qara'a, tjfij yaqra'u, ^jo danu'a,

b) After sukun it has no bearer e.g. 3^> dau'un,

9^yishai'un. With the ending an the hamza is written

over the stroke connecting the previous letter with

the t e.g. CLi shai'an; if however the preceding letter

cannot be connected the I is omitted and the hamza

written without bearer e.g. g> juz'an.

Hamzat alwaal.

1. fo some cay* the hamza at the beginning of,

a word is no essential part of its form t but seems to

Introduction. 11

b^written only to prevent a syllable from beginningwith a vowel., In such cases, when it follows another

word, the hamzals dropped with its vowel, a sign called*

0- o -

wasja (iJLoj)is put in place of the hamza and the

two words are read as one. If the preceding worddoes not end in a vowel, jhen one is given to it in

accordaoce with the rules below (4). TheHainza in these

cases is called Joo^I aj+3>hamzat alwagl The t, though

reserved in_tbe writing, is noljjronoanced. neither

on Ihe'pron^anciatioiL

Examples: ^Jlilloo^

e

abdu 'Iqadiri; ^yajlj wa'n-

sarafa (from vJ^oj^), ^31 ^ 4otJ ra'aitu 'bna 'lamiri.

2. The hamza is harnzat alwagl:

a) In the Article 3l al e.g. ^oUJI Jvxcf

abdu 'Iqadiri.

b) In the Imperative of the I form of the^Verb^

(Lesson 16) e.g. vlutf? viis qultu 'ktub "I said: write".

c) IiX-ibe Perfect, Imperative and Verbal noun of

HLlYinnX and X foimsoflhTYerb, (Less. 1 8)

e.g. ^i\a fa'nhazama.

d) In the following eight words:

GO 9,0

iyi\ibnun "son". '^- t-

Jimraunor 3J*l im-

6<0**** \ ru'un "man".

idil ibnatun "daughter". Cjg^si lot imra'atun "woman".

.- Jitbnairi "two"^ ( (Masc.). -, igmun narae,,

fithanatani "two" 9 /I (Fern.). ^^^ istun "buttock".

3. If Jhe word preceding a hamzat alwasl d(6. It the wora precedmg a namzat alwagl does

not_end in a vowel, then the final congogant generally

12 Introduction.

receives akasra __, e.g. Jyaj! J>i qadi?

nsarafauhe

has already gone away". The ruination also takes_after it.

Exceptions. The Preposition Q, rnin "from" takes.

_ before the Article as jJ^Jl ^ mina 'Iwaladi "from

the boy"; In other cases it takes the usual _ e.g.

iuli ^ mini 'biiihi "from his son".

The Personal proDouns "f hum, ^ kum and ^antum, the ending ^ turn of the 2nd Pers. Plur. Perf.

of the verb and the Preposition vX* mudh (= jcu

mundhu) "since" take _1_ u before the hamzat alwasl

e.g. alJl ^IiJla'anahumu 'llahu "May God curse them";

jJ^H ,*AJ^ra'aitumu 'Iwalada "You have seen the boy".

If the word preceding the hamza ends with1, ^

or ^ which lengthen the vowels before them, then

although the writing is not altered, the vowel must be

pronounced short (see 13, 3) e.g. jjjlt *Il abu^lwaladi,

^UJJ j fi Mdcari.

If however the word ends in ^5-' or ^-1., then

the ^5 takes __ and the ^ takes _i_ in place of the

sukfm e.g. y^ J. j ft ainayi 'Imaliki "in the eyes

of the king" *)JJ jaL&> mustafawu 'llahi "the chosen

ones of God".

The conjunctions ^ lau "if and^1 au "or" follow

the general rule and take __ after the .

4. The hamzat alwagl falls out of the writing agwell as the pronunciation:

Introduction. 13

a) In the expression Kf f*o bismfllahi (for -Mb)In the name of God".

b) In the word f ibnun "son" when it cornea

between the name of the "" and that nf the

{and not at the beginning of a line) e.g.

'umaru 'bnu 'Ikhatt&b "Omar the son of Alkhattab".9o o. > *- So."

If thecr

j is predicative the { is preserved e.g.^^ ^\ j^zaiduni'bnu 'amrin "Zaid is the son of Amr".

c) In the Article Jl al, if preceded by the Pre-

position ,3 ji_ "to, for") or the strengthening Particle S

l& "verily" e.g. Jo.yj lirrajuli "to the man" jJJIf

lilwaladi "to .the boy",(j^ lalhaqqu "verily the truth".

If the noun befflns^with .3, then the^of the Article

falls out also e.g.-iXjJ (for xLJUJ)-lillailati "for the night".

Similarly from 2jf allah "God" is formed Jl lillahi

"to God".

d) The t of the bamzat alwagl may drop out, when

preceded by the Interrogative particle ! e.g. 5^Lt abnuka

(for 5Uln) "thy son"?

12.

Madda.

If_a_ bamza with fatha (a) is followed by a^ vowelless

tEJBn"the hamza and vowel are dropped and one

is written, while above this is written a sign

madda (really the second alif written

horizontally above) which is pronounced a, e.g. cr,T

14 Introduction,

aminun (for cr!!), !^ (for allj) ra'ahu, olyj qur'anun

(for *,

Note. In many books the usual t which lengthens the"

vowel, is provided with this sign, when it precedes hamza

e.g. t\jP sahrfi'u "desert".

13.

The Syllable.

1. There are two kinds of syllable.:

a) Open, consisting of a consonant and a short

vowel e.g. JJtf ka-ta-ba..

b) Closed, consisting of a consonant, short voweland vowelless consonant e.g. the 2nd and 3rd syllables

ka-tab-tum.

Syllables consisting of a consonant and a longvowel aje considered closed since the letters ~t\' Vs

are considered vowelless consonants e.g. ^b da-ri.

A consonant followed Jjythe nunation is also

considered as closed (as if the n were written) e.g.

;!o da-run.

2. No syllable can begin with a vowelless consonant.If suclTa case arises from inflection in Arabic words,

a hamzat alwa?l with { is prefixed e.g. Cof I 'uktub

"write" (for >^jS ktub). . In writing foreign words an

unchangeable hamza(jJaiSf S}!P)

is prefixed e.g. J,>bii!

aflatQnu "Plato", or the first consonant is provided with

a vowel e.g. lljji faransa (for fraiisa) "France".

Introduction. 15

3. No syllable can close with two vowelless con-

sonants. If such a case arises from inflection, then

one letter falls out e.g. j^S qnl becomes Jjj qfll "say",

(cf. also 6, Note 12 and 11, 3).

The only exception to this rule is in the case of

words in which these lettersI,

-

3 , ^ lengthening a

vowel are followed by a doubled consonant e.g. Jli

farrun, for from farirun.

14.

Accent.

1. In words of more than one syllable the accent

is never on the last.

2. If the last syllable but one i3_closed, it receives.

the accent e.g. jls q&la, Syb.yaqulu, ^Jo^> khayyatuna,

x-M ijtamd'na, 1/6 *6*\ akhbarn&kum.

3. In words of three syllables, if the last but one

is open, the accent falls on the last but two e.g.

kataba. In words of four or more syllables the acce.nl

is__carried back until it meets with a closed sllabi- - o .

e.g. V.J&A inashwaratun, uUx^1

'

tajannabata,

mukatabatun.

15.

Numerals.

1. In former times (and occasionally still in someartificial forms of literature) the letters of the alphabetareused to indicate numerals. In this case the order

of the 1 Dtters is that of the old Semitic alphabet, followed

by the letters peculiar to the Arabic alphabet. This

alphabet is called JsJ^T o^Js> huruf al'abjad.

16 Introduction.

1.1 20. d 200.

2. o 30. J 300.

3.s

40.r

400.

4. o 50. 500.

5. 60. L . 600.

6.5

70.^ 700.

7. 80. o 800.

9. Js 100. ^ 1000.

10. ^This order is given in the following h'ne:

o - c ^

uX^?1\>j^*iii'W ,

but that used in NW. Africa differs slightly from this.

2. The numerals in general use now are:

t i* r f o i v A 1 .

12 34567890These are read from left to right e.g. uiv 1897.

16.

Abbreviations.

A stroke resembling a madda is generally (though

not always) put above abbreviations e g. ^Jl for s->7 J.I

ila akbirihi "and so forth" (literally "to its end").

The following abbreviations are in common use after

the names of certain persons : ,**o = JLLj ^IIr & ! jjo

salla!

llahuf

alaihi wasallama "God bless him and givehim peace" used after the name of Mohammed.

Jtcc

alaihi 'ssalamu "Upon him be

peace" used after the names of other prophets.

Introduction.

radiya 'llahu 'anlrn "May God

be pleased with him" used after the names of the

Companions of Mohammed.> -e i .

j= dJ! *s>j

rahimahu 'llahu "May God have

compassion on him" used after the names of the dead.

Exercises in reading.

I.

vlj* J? JLi ^ JJ jj vLi* j J o o

tib kul qum harnun qul bal abun wa l! ta bi

yadun kai dum ft uam dhu khudh 'an lam ma la sir

g, a.

kullun dalla tibbun madda lubbun wai

II.

farahun qatlun shariba hasuna fariha qatala kataba

O Oo, 06- -. -- Go, G,,

ibilun habluu 4ar un khafa t^la husnun hasanun

O H, . o , t,i Go- G - G o, G G >

ra'sun khifti qumta mautun jarun baitun fllun uurun

jara akala bikrin nahrin baLirin bukblun zahrin

Arabic Grammar, 2

18 Introduction.

m.6 s o.. -o. 6- Q

VJ,^ w~AJ LjJS WOK

haribun nafsan qulna katibun kitabun katabtu katabat

katabtum asasun fattish fattasha aqtulu tadribu jaktubu

uj^Xo f&it<w^T

^j^1

'

!>**) Uoo

maktubun sbu^hlukum kitabuhu takhruju ba'atha farihna

> .o, o->, J(

-o- O -.- - G-ou-aXxir' f^Jj^ C)^*"

1

'

0^-7*"l-^^ ^^^

takhtalifu tarlqukum ta'banu saratanun jalisan miftahun

^,l5J ^^>1 li3^iJ.[ Lulx.>^ <jixi-[

tadanika ihmarrat ittakhadhtuaa ijtamac

na ikhtilafun

'ala ila akhidun akilun mu'oimun tatadhakkaru idtarabat.- j~j O- - j o-o O ,o o ^ >

mu'allifuna mu'akhadatun istahlifinl isti'nasun mOsa

IV. ta'lifan

J^' aijj viL>

OS S ,

Introduction. 19

CT Jt>

, ) > ,o i .6- S -

8>uM

JOLc

S- 0,0.0, t , y > .

JUc

O.O .,<

UiiJ I

J -o;; < t= >, .',

Introduction.

Xljl fc*US W

Transcription and Translation.

alqutru 'Imigriyu yukauwinu 'zzawiyataThe land the Egyptian forms the angle

'shshamallyata 'shsharqlyata min afrlqiyatin wayuqaluthe northern the eastern of Africa and it is

lahu aidan wadi'nnlli li'anna qismahucalled also the valley of the Nile because its part

'IjanUblya waqi'un baina silsilaiai jibalinthe southern lies between two chains of mountains,

wayakhtariquhu nahni'nnlli Tazlmuand cuts through it the river of Nile the mighty.

masahatuhu jighraftyan arba'umi'ati alfi mllin

Its area (is) geographically 400000 squaremurabba'in wa amroa masahatuhu 'Imuqasatu

miles and as for its area the measured,

fahiya 65 alfa mllin murabba'in minha 5736000it

(is) 65000 square miles, of which 5736000faddanin ardan zara

c

lyatan.faddans (are) seed ground

wayahuddu hadha 'Iqutra mina 'shshamali 'Ibahru

And bounds this land on the North the sea

'Imutawassitu wamina 'shsharqi khattun yamtadduthe Mediterranean and on the East a line which extends

min khaui yunusac

ala 'Ibahri 'Imutawassiti ila

from Khan Yunus on the sea the Mediterranean to

'ssuwaisi 'ala 'Ibahri 'rahmari wa 'Ibahru TahraaruSuez on the sea the Red, and the sea the Rod;

wamina 'Ijanubi biladu 'nnubati waminaand on the South the district of Nubia; and on

'Igharbi biladu barqata.the West the district of Barqa.

Introduction. 21

wa ;

nnllu nahrun yakhtariquAnd the Nile (is)

a river (which) cuts through'Imisriya mina 'Jjanubi ila 'shshamali

the land the Egyptian from the South to the Northfa 'idha wasla ila qurbi 'Iqahiratiand when it comes to the neighbourhood of Cairo,

'nqasama ila far'aini yaslru ahaduhuma ma'ilan

it divides into two branches, goes one of them tendingila 'shsharqi hatta yasubba ila 'Ibahri 'Jmutawassitito the East until it flows into the sea the Mediterranean'inda madmati dimyata wa Takharu yasiru ma'ilan

at the city of Damietta and the other goes tendingila 'Igharbi hatta yasubba ila dhaiika 'Ibahri 'inda

to the West until it flows into that sea at

thaghri rashlda.

the frontier of Rosetta.

wayanqasimu 'Iqutru 'Imisrlyu bihadhaAnd is divided the land the Egyptian in this

'li'tibari ila qismaini janublyin washamallyin au

way into two parts, a southern and a northern, or

qibllyi.n . wabahrryin fa'lqismu 'Iqibllyua southern and a sea-coast, and the part the southern,

wayuqalu lahu 'ssa'idu au misru Tulya yamtadduand it is called the Sa'ld or Egypt the upper, extendsmin akhiri hududi misra janftban ila

from the end of the limits of Egypt (on the) South to

nuqtati tafarru'i?

nnlli wa'lbahrtyuthe point of the branching of the Nile; and the sea-coast,

wayuqalu lahu misru 'ssufla yamtaddu min nuqtatiand it is called Egypt the lower, extends from the point

tafarru'i 'nnlli ila 'Ibahri 'Imutawassiti.of the branching of the Nile to the sea the Mediterranean.

wayuqsamu 'Iwajhu Ibahrlyu ila

And is divided the portion the sea-coast into

thalftthati aqsamin mutawassitin wahuwa 'Iwaqi'u bainathree divisions, a middle, and it lies between

farc

ayi 'nulli waqad summiyathe two branches of the Nile, and it has been named

lidhalika raudatu 'Ibahraini

on account of that the garden of the two rivers

wayuqalu lahu aidani 'dhdhalta limushabahatihiand it is called also the Delta on account of its

22 Introduction.

biharfi 'dhdhali 'inda 'lyunaulylnaresemblance to the letter dhal among the Greeks,

washarqiyin wahuwa 'Iwaqi'u ila sharqlyi 'dhdhalta

and an eastern, arid it lies to the East of the Delta

wayuqalu lahu "Ihaufu 'shsharqlyu wagharblyinand is called the border the Eastern, and a western

wahuwa 'Iwaqi'u ila gharblyiha wayuqalu lahu

and it . lies to the West of it, and is called

'lhaufu 'Igharbiyu hadhihi hiya 'aqsamuthe border the Western. These are the divisions

Iqutri 'Imisrlyi "ttabic

lyatu 'amma 'aqsauiuhuof the laud the Egyptian the natural. As for its divisions

Tidariyatu'

t'atakhtalifu bi'khtilafi

ihe administrative, they differ with the differingTazmani.

of the times.

23

First Part,

First Lesson.

($7 JJjLrf'addarsa 1'awwalu.)

1. There is no indefinite article in Arabic.

2. The definite article for all genders and numbers

is <35 ^alwhich is prefixed to the noun which it defines,

at the same time depriving it of the nunation (Intro. 7),

e.g. vi^yo baitun "a house"; y^jf 'albaitu "the house".

The hamza of the article is hamzat alwasl (Intro.

11) and so when it follows another word is droppedwith its vowel and in pronunciation the 3 follows

immediately the vowel of the preceding word e.g.

jb babulbaiti "the door of the house"; vi>Jjf vjb

babilbaiti "of the door of the house"; vti**J! ou bab-

albaiti "the door (accus.) of the house".'

3. In pronunciation the J of the article is assimilated

to the Sun-letters (Intro. 4, 2) o o o 3} j ^ ji

(jo ijo Jo Ji? j o when the word to which it is

attached begins with one of these e.g. ,j4-ls1 'arrajulu> o s

'the man" ^.^-Ji ashshamsu "the sun". In such

words the j is written without vowel-sign and tashdid

is placed over the Sun-letter.

4. .Adjectives as attributes are placed after the

nouns they qualify. If the noun has the article th^

adjective must have it also e.g. ^jojjt jfSnahrun

c

arldun ua wide river"; t

oj T*jI lull 'annahruraridu"the wide river".

24 First Part.

5. The_CQpula "is" or "are" is not expressed inO * Joss

Arabic^ e.g. \ja&f. jju]'annahru 'artdun "the river

is wide".

6. The personal pronouns of the singular are:

Gf3

ana I.

ooi 'anta Thou (masc.).

saJt 'anti Thou (fern.).

'^s>huwa He.

g hiya She.

Vocabulary.

O bustiinun a garden. bahrun a sea.

insanun a man.j /qablhun bad, dis-

:{ graceful.

Second Lesson. 25

Exercise 1.

j .. o >o G - J ^ojoSbUJ I ^-^ LX**J 1

G.,j ,s G - - 8--

^^s- J^-Ji

G - JG-:, O

G - G > - -oS O j , - O - > t, >*t.

^- v^I, J^ UU5 J^>, lit v^ j^l. > y , * t.

' - - -tf

a E

Transcription.

albustanu kablrun. albustanu 'Ikablru. al-

baitu '^saghlru. mahallun hasanun. arrajulu ha-

sanun. insanun qablhun. armllu nahruu. mali-

kun 'adilun. albahru kablrun. qasrunkuwaiyisun.khubzun taiyibun. alkhubzu taiyibun ani rajulun.-

alqadl rajulun taiyibun. auta ta'banu. huwahablbun taiyibun. arrajulu huwa 'lhablbu 'ssadiqu.shshri'u 'ari^un.

Exercise 2.

The house is large. The garden is a beautiful

place. Thou art a good man. - - I am tired.

The beautiful castle and(^ wa) the wide river. The

judge is upright. I am an upright friend. Thouart a bad man. The wide street.

Second Lesson.

The Feminine.

1. Most feminine words take theending

_!_ atun

(for this form of t see Intro. 1, Note 2), e.g. ^t

26 First Part.

O-o

'ibrum "a son", xut 'ibnatun "a daughter";

kablran "great", feminine a-y^ kablratun.

2. The adjective agrees with the noun which it

qualifiesor is predicate to. e.g. 'LJ3\ iSif 'alibnatu

'Ikablratu "the big girl", {^ 2ll .'alibnatu kablratun

"the girl is big (or old)".

3. Some words are feminine without having_afemimne"'ending.;

a) Nouns denoting females e.g. ^5'urnmun "a

O i, o

mother", u^f. 'arusun "a bride", JUP Hindun (nameof a woman).

b) Proper names of lands and cities e.g. yax misru

(without nunation) "Egypt, Cairo", ^UJ! 'ashshamu

(always with article), "Syria, Damascus".

c) Names of those parts of the body which occur, O o

in pairs e.g. Jvj yadun "hand", Jo^ rijlun "foot",

(

._vc 'ainun "eye" etc.

d) Many single words, among the commonest

being:

O o O o -

(joi 'ardun, earth. *M-& shamsun, sun.

..

khamrun, wine. .'j namn, fire.

, O o,

tjarun, house.^V-AJ nafsun, self, soul.

[ > >^G -*

nh\ln, wind. v^. siiqun, market.

Note 1. Some words are used both as masculine and

feminine, (see Less. 38).

Note 2. Other feminine endings are ^5-- a and *!

a'cr (see Leas. 38).

Second Lesson. 27

Note 3. Nouns ending in denoting males are mas-

culine e.g. K.JL> khallfatun "a caliph", ^syb Tarafatu (the nameof a poet).

Collectives,

4. Many words singular in form have a collective

G-- 6 JO-

meaning e.g. ^ hajarun "rock", o>jj zaitunun

"olives". To indicate a single object the feminineO

*""

Q ___

ending JL _atun is appended to such words e.g. s^5^ j O->

hajaratun "a piece of rock, a stone", J^u; zaitunatun

"a (single) olive".

5. Tnterrogat^yft apntyncea are introduced by the

particles $J> or f. The latter is prefixed to. the first

word of the sentence.

Vocabulary.

- Maddun a grand-"

\father.

(jaddatuna grand- 9

f mother

salihun honest.

Ihadirun present,

('ready.

jshadidun strong,violent.

.-jLuLs>- junainatun a garden.

^*i na am es.

aklmun ft

f*^ ( man, physician.

J&JL> tairuu a bird.

UM sa'atun an hour. 2

fqadlmun old, ancient

\ (of things). 9

.

* jadldun new.

, waladun a boy.

muzillun shady.

Jkhadimun a man,i servant.

(khadimatunamaid-Iservant.

28 First Part.

rauti'un obedient

qahirun conquering.

nazifun clean.

jiwazzun goose( (collective).

maiyitun dead.

malikatun a queen.

(gharibun setting (ofthe sun).

(tuffahun apple( (collective).

Jshajarun tree

j (collective).

Exercise 3.

(a name of Cairo)

j-Bj3jii

Transcription.

aljaddu kablrun. aljaddatu kablratun. alib-

natu 'aghlratu. ibnun salifrun. hali 'ijuuaiuatu

kuwaij'isatun. nac

atni 'ljunainatu kuwaiyisatun.sa

c

atun hasanatun. albaitu qadltnun. addaru jadl-datun. 'arummu hasanatun. alwaladu hadirun.

rlhun shadldatun. arrihu shadldatun. - - a'anta

ta'banu. na'ara aoa tac

banu: hal anta 'Iqadi.

Third Lesson. 20

la ana 'lhaklmu. hal hiya alihatun. la hiya

qablhatun. ashshamsu t&li'atuu. ashshajaratu'Imuzillatu. alkhadimatu mutfatun. mi?ru 'Iqa-

hiratu. alyadu nazlfatun. al'iwazzu t^irun.

aFiwazzatu 'Iraaiyitatu.

Exercise 4.

The mother is present. A great fire. Is the

garden lerge? No, the garden is small. The newhouse is small. The wind is violent. Art thou

(fern.) the grandmother? Yes, I am the grandmother.- The beautiful daughter. The king is just and

the queen is beautiful. The setting sun.

Third Lesson. ,-*+ <>

*

9"Number.

1. There are three numbers in Arabic: Singular

(Oji* rnufrad), Dua| ()j&* muthauna or &AJ&J tathniya)9.o *

and Plural (** jam*).

2. The Dual is formed by adding to the wor4

^eithermasc. or fern.) the tennination ot ani for the

aini for the othercases,,, e.g.

malikun a king; glb>malikani two kings

(noni.); ^IXL* raalikaini two kings (other cases).o ^ / "

, , ,

3JX* malikatun a queen ,-,oXU malikatani two

queens (noni.) ^IHJU malikataini two queens (other

Note. In the fern, the a is changed to o whenever a

suffix is added.

30 First Part.

3. The Plural is of two kinds:

a) The Sound plural (jJl^Jl 5^! 'aljainc

assalim)

formed by the addition of endings to the singular.

b) The Broken plural (^u j-l?

aljamr

almu-

word and in some cases with au ending as well.

Lessons 4 and 5).

4. The Sound plural masc. of nouns and adjectives.

js_formed by adding ^3- jana for the nominative

and ^j_ ma for the other cases^ after the case-ending

pf the nominative singular has been dropped, e.g.

Singular. Plural Nona. Plural, other cases.

malikuna. r*^8 nialiklna:

kathlrun.'

kathlruna.>.

kathlrln'a.

The .Soundjglural of feminines is formed by chang-~,

~-~~

JBg _ atun into ot_L jitun for the nominative and

ot J.tin for the other cases, e.g.

Singular. Plural Norn.,G , '-' ^

khadimatun a maid-servant. OU^'L> khadimatun.

Plural, other cases.

khadimatin.

Note. Some feminine nouns take a masculine sound plural,6, - t

eg. ioLw sanatun a year Plur. ...^-Lw sinlina; some masculine

nouns also take a feminine sound plural, e.g. ,;,!_***- hayawanuno , -- -

animal, Plur. Ou!_j-o> hayawanatun.

5. Adjectives agreewith their nouns not only in

gender "'(see LTess. 2, 2) but^alsojn niugoer^excepT

Third Lesson. ,- 31

^ when the noun is injhe* Sound fern, plur.tbe.

ttdjective la usually in the femT singular, though Tt'ig

ocrflgionftllyin thjB fern, plur. when persons are indicatedT

5) Broken 'plurals being originally^Collectives, take, the.

jjdjectjreJn_JJie_fem. sinft. (see Lessons 4 and 5).

Examples of the regular agreement:

Ikhadimun hasanun a good (beauti-

| fui) servant,

-. :

- fkhadimatun hasanatun a good maid-

^L>\ servant.

- - Ikhadimani hasanani two good ser-

Ikhadimatani hasanatani two goodI maid-servants.

^is>- ^^-olA-khfidimuna hasanuua good servants.

Example of exception a):

: (khadimatuu hasanatun good maid-8ervauts>

or as the noun indicates persons

l>L*M^> o'wcJL> khadimatun hasanatun.

G. The personal pronouns are:

,- > Ihuma they > (hum theyhuwa he. ^ two ^ masc..

hiya she.

junta thou ? (

antuma-.^f fantum you

(masc.). 7. y,(masc. and rn.. 5 ,

|antunna vou

em^ ^ jnahnu we

.:* (ana I (masc. a^' ! (masc. andand fern. I fern..

First Part.

Exercise 5.

6,

Fourth Lesson. 33

Transcription,

alrnu'alliinu 'sgalihu. almu'allimnua salihflna.

alc

ainam 'llami'atani. almu'allimetu hadiratun.

hal antum mabsutuna. la nahnu za'lanuna.

lailatani wanaharani. hali 'Iqadl inashghfllun. na'ani

huwa mashghulun. alkhabbazuna mujtahidtina.alibnatani gha'ibatani. alkhaiyatu wa'lkbaiyatatu inash-

ghulani. alkhaiyatttna wa'lkhaijatatu muytahidana.almuslimtlna 'salihuna. waladani la'ibSni. alharatu

nazifatun.Exercise 6.

The quarter (of the town) is clean. The teachers

are present. A flashing eye. Are you (two) in-

dustrious? Yes, we are busy. Are you vexed?

No, I am contented. The Moslem is pious. They(raasc.) are absent. The beautiful tailoresses are

present.- The boy is industrious. The night is

dark. The servants and maid servants are tired.

The physician is busy. Two busy physicians.Two clean hands. Are the bakers idle? Yea,and the carpenters are idle, they are tired.

Fourth Lesson.

The Broken Plural.

Explanation. Arabic words with few exceptions

(see Note) consist of three consonants called Radicals

together with certain vowels and sometimes prefixes or

suffix^.To indicate patterns or type-forms of words

Arabian grammarians use the three consonants Jja

the o representing the first radical, the^

the second

and the ^ the third e.g. olf kalbun "a dog" is said

S o* O .> 9,2to be of the form Juts; .^S of the form Juoe; Ji> (for

Go G o } , c'f

of the form Jjii; T*y\ 'ahmaru "red" of the form

; ^Ji:of the form

^^Ufc J?^1U of the form ,

Arabic Grammar. 8

34 First Part.

Note. A few Arabic words have four radicals; The pattern

JJUs is used for them.

There are 31 patterns oftbe^Brokeg,PJiiral (Less. 3,

3). A complete list of theslTTs given in Lessons 39and 40. Among the most frequently used are?

. a) 3lJf e.g. i1 'auladun plur. of jjj waladunt I ffr\ Q ^5,5 o , .

'

"a boy1

;

(j*5js!'afrasun plur. of ^j farasun "a horse";

'* -

J-af 'ashrafun plur. of UujZ sharffun "noble". In

> .... the same way are formed the plurals of J*ib tfflun "aGo,

baby"; ^lax matarun "rain"; .^i^ waqtun "time".

b) 3ji e.g. ;_^ buhurun plur. of^ bahrun "sea";

'usuduu plur. of jJJ 'asadun "a lion";o .* o

shuhndun plur. of j^Ui shahidun "a witness";o ^*

fyuqtlqun plur. of/j^>haqqun "a right". In the same

way are formed the plurals of JJbs qalbun "a heart";G t,, 6 -

j^i> jundun "an army"; 5JU malikun "a king".G . G , G c-

^ c) JLS e.g. vjtki' kilabun plur. of ^JLT kaibun "a

4 dog"; JL^, rijalun plur. of J^>, rajulun "a man"; so

O also are formed the plurals of UU> jabahm "a mountain";

<p*A.rumhun "a spear"; j^ kablrun "great".

d) .Us e.g. waf kutubun plur. of \J&3 kitabun

>,'

o, '.'

"a book"; ..j^ mudunun plur. of *JuJw madlnaftun

,

"a city"; ^^ sufunun plur. of y_'.^o w saftnatun "a ship".

e)-jJts! e.g. ^J5 'anhurun plur. of ^i nahrun "a

river"; ^\ 'ashhurun plur. of ^& shahrun "a month";

J 'arjulun plur. of J^L. rijlun "a foot".' '

Fourth Lesson. 36

Vocabulary.

The small letters after a word indicate that the Plural is

of the form given under that letter in this lesson.

o G

wasikhun dirty. Ju tawllun long.

a'bun hard, diffi- > ->Jalfuratu

the

cult.oi^ji

i Euphrates.

(d) tarlquu a way. u^ mukhlisun honest.

sahilun easy. &?? sarfun swift-

j(b)'ilmun know- $ almadl the past

\ ledge, science.

nafic

un useful. ^ ale

att the high.

-l(c) galihun pious, JU* (b) saifun a sword.

honest.

jb'o qatiun cutting.

harisun watchful. e"

,oS 9 ^ O

First Part.

a > * C.2&S

Transcription.

huwa kitabun sa'bun. kutubun sac

batuu.

raisru wa'shshamu madlnatani hasanatani. almudunu

kuwaiyisatun. turuqun eahilatun. arulumu nafi-

'atuD. ashshurutu sa'batun. huququn thabitatun.

huwa shahidun salihun. shuhfldun silahun.

alkalbu harisun. alkilabu 'lharisatu. alqulubu'linukhli^atu. sufunun sarfatun. al'afrasu hasa-

natun. arauladu mutl'ftna. al'amtaru 'shshadldatu.

al'auqatu 'Imadiyatu. aljibalu 'aliyatun. al-

hurufu "rarabiyatu. assuyofu qati'atun. al'anhuru

'ikablratu. hum nasun kibaruu.

Exercise 8.

The dogs are swift and watchful. It is a diffi-

cult way. Difficult ways. The industrious boys.

- The Arabic letters are difficult. They are (^) per-

manent rights. An honest heart. The highmountains are beautiful. Are you great people?No, .we are honest people.

-- Useful books. TheArabian cities are dirty. The Arabian sciences are

difficult. The swords are long. The Nile and

Euphrates are two great rivers. The past month.The little babies.

Fifth Lesson.

1. Further forms of the Brpken Plural are:

' -.. 9 .

,f) ^las e.g. *!^jwuzara u plur. of^ wazlrun a

Vezir, minister"; *fy>!'umara'u plur. of -y*! 'amlrun

Fifth Lesson. 87

"a prince"; *Jysufara'u plur. of

^A^, saftrun "an-- t> "O 3

ambassador"; t\f*\'usara'u plur. of ^! 'asiruri "a

captiv".

This is a very common plural for words of the

form ^fjta when they denote persons.-

g) iSUsi e.g. *SX*I 'asdiqa'u plur. of

dlqun "a friend"; *llol 'anbiya'u plur. of *j

"a prophet"; iL^J 'aqriba'u plur. of ^oy qarlbun "a

relative"; *U*e! 'aghniya'u plur. of Js ghanlyun "rich".

S ^oi G -o > ^ ,

h) o^*5 e.g. ou-/ fursanun plur. of ^.b farisun a-X* - o> G ,, AL^

**a rider"; ot^b buldanun plur. of jjb baladun "a a 1

O , o O

district"; oUxos qudbanuu plur. of <>.yC3i qadlbun "a

rod, sceptre".

2. Nouns with four radicals (JJbe) have the follow.-

ing Broken Plurals:

i) JJL e.g. ^^=\^=> kawakibu plur. of ._*-*j^-~

kaukabun "a star"; y^' tajaribu plur. ofiL?^' tajri- Cl-a

batun "an attempt". In the same way are formed theO_ti., .O-ci^

plurals of j^> jauharun "a jewel"; ~_~-^-+ maktabun

"a school, office"; x*xL maktabatun "a library".

k) ijUS e.g.

J*** O*o ^i fanajlnu from Q^* finjanun "a cup".

~ ,

.oU^> sanadlqu from vjOx5 suudut^m "a coffer".

- . O o

U*. khanazlru from J-> khinzlrun "a pig".

38 First Part.

In the same way are formed the plurals fromO Jo-

sultanun "a sultan"; oyjCo maktubun "a letter":

qindilun "a lamp"

This form .is used for tbe_ plural of all words^ of^four radicals which have a long voweMjetween Ihethird arid fourth radicals.

1) AJJLs a rare form used specially for living beings6 r 9

e.g. jo^Ljtalamidhatunpl.of js^Jij tilmldhun "a scholar"

3. The following words deserve special notice:

5o, - '-,

-os

^[ ibnun "a son I^ur- QJ^J banflna or 2Luf

'abua'un.

'ibnatun or o^iJ bintun "daughter, girl", plur.

'akhun "brother", plur. _jj>! 'ikhwatun or

'ikhwanun.* O o {> & , ~ $

c^>t 'ukbtun "sister", plur. o!^>t 'akbawatujQ.

'Note 1. Some nouns have two or more forms of Broken6.0. O G ,

Plural e.g. ^, bahrun "sea" has j^^1- buhurun, j^^- biharan,

SK- O -&Z

j3R? abhuran and ^j^t abhSrun.

Note 2. Some words have different forms of the Brokeno,

Plural with different meanings e.g. c>uO baitun means "a bouse"o ,1

or "a verse of poetry". In the former sense the Plural is o.*

buydtun, in the latter oLoi abyatun.

Vocabulary.9 -

c,li farighun empty. u*^ naftsun precions.O *

f*^=> karlmun noble.

(Other words in the lesson.)

Fifth Lesson. 39

Exercise 9.

Transcriptioii.

assufara'u hadirftua walwuzara'u gha'ibUna.aslran. agdiqa'u mukhli^una. annasu

aghniya'u. albuyutu- Taliyatu kuwaiyisatun. ma-kfitibu nafi'atun. assalatinu kibaruu. arrimalju

tawllatun. basatmii hasanatun. almu'allimana

mabsfttttna wa'ttalacaidhatu mujtahidHna. a^undt?.qu

farighun. buldanim ghanlyatun. albi^aru (albuhttru)'Ikabiratu. al'aqriba'u humu Ta^diqa'u. aljauharu'nnaftsu. annafsu 'Ikarlmatu. albanQna mujta-bidQna wa'lbanatu muti'atun.

Exercise 10.

The cups are empty. The pigs are animals.

The Sultan is just. The princes and ministers are

present. The letter is long. Long letters.

Noble souls. The scholars are busy. The boysare contented, they are playing. The horsemen are

tired. Are the ambassadors present? No, theyare absent. Are you relatives? Yes, and we are

friends. The big coffers. The jewels are precious.Beautiful verses. The brothers and sisters are

present and the sons and daughters are absent.

40 First Vart.

Sixth Lesson.

Declension.

1. There are three cases in Arabic: the -Nominative

(js. raf), Genitive, oblique or prepositional Qi. jarr)6 _

" * *'

and .Accusative (v_^aj nasb).

2. These cases are expressed:

a) When the word originally has junation

-M#~ whether it be a inasc. sitig. or fern. sing, or broken,* plural by the endings un,in, an, (written

*

I }.

~

,(X/IV ^^W>^-^^D) When the word has originally nojaunatinn hy_

M for the nom., and a foi the other caees^-

When the word is defined by the article or a

following word in the genitive whether it baanunation or not originally by_u, i, a.

Examples.

a) Nora L* sariqun4<a thief". Jol3- khadimatun

"a maid-servant". o^Jj auladun "children".

Gen. ^ ;u- sariqin. */o,j> khadimatin. o^l5 ! auladin.

Ace.i^'u* sariqan. ^ioLi. khadimatan. |j^J auladan.

b) Nom. i^imakkatu "Mecca",/^jjLLoanadlqu

"coffers".

Gen. and Ace. ixi makkata.(^oU*> ?anfidlqa.

c) Nom. ^UJ! assfiriqu. vi^Jjf v^bi sahibu-'lbaiti

"the master of the house"

Gen.^jUJl assariqi. v**3\ ^s>\^> sahibi-'lbaiti.

Ace. jUJ! assariqa. ^2\ vlo-L sahiba-'lbaiti.

Sixth Lesson. 41

Note 1. A word without original tan\vjn is called by the

+ O > td *

Arabian grammarians <-3.*aJu j*c ghair munsarif i.e. not (per-

fectly.) declined, (see Less. 41).

Note 2. Words which end in ^5 preceded by kasra contract

e >

^5- iynn and ^5 iyin into in : ^5 iyu and ^5-^ iyi

into t. In the Sound plural they drop the ^ altogether

G .

e.g. (jtolS qsdin "a judge" for ^ ]S qsdiyitn (nom.) or^Sflfe

.OS J -o^ '

<jS<Jiyin (gen.) ^yto'JUl alqfidl; "the judge" for^^toLaJl alqadiyn

^oz* .'

i *

(nom.) or^toli^t alqadiyi (gen.) Plural, nom. Q>^^ qadana:

gen. -yutoS qSdfna. Other forms are nncontracted e.g.

(ace.).

Note 3. The forms of the dual and plural have alreadybeen given in Lesson 3 so that the declension of the noun is

now complete.

3. All prepositions govern the genitive, thus;

ft "in" as olilj ft bustanin "in a garden";

ixi ft makkata "in Mecca".

ji 'ala "on" as jll j^ 'ala 'Ijibali "on the

ruountaius".

J li "to, for" as jJJJJ lilwaladi "for the boy"

(see Intro. 11, 4 c).

c,, min "from" as o^ljl ^ mina 'Ibuyuti "from

the houses".

4. The relation of a word and its following genitiveo- -

is called &U?t idafa; the governing word is called

O > o* G . >

raufjaf and the genitive &Jt oLL* inudaf ilaihi.

42 First Part,

The word that governs a genitive is itself definite

but never takes the article, thus Jo*, c^xl baitu rajulin

means "tlie house of a man".

Jw>pl ^& baitu 'rrajuli means "the house of

the man".

Wuhen the governing word is^indefiiiite the prepo-

sitiQn"Timusi_be puT beSre_the followingjgenitim eg.i - "GO,

Jc^LS oyo baitun lirrajuli "a house of the man"; or

i & -s }> (i O o,

one may say JoJl o_^o Q^ oyo baitun rain buyuti

'rrajuli (literally) "a house from the houses of the man".

Vocabulary.'

Sixth Lesson. 43

*x

Transcription,

?ahibu 'Ibaiti gha'ibuni 'lyauma. alfarisu 'ala

zahri 'Ifarasi. al'amlru gha'ibun khadimu Tamtrift'ddari. miftahu babi'lbaiti. abwabu 'Imadlnati

maftuhatun.c

urnaru sahibun lizaidin. basatinu

'shshami masbhttratun. kalbu 'Iwaladi harisun.

kutubu 'ttalamidhati nazlfatun. nahnu a?diqa'u

'rrajuli. qasru Tamlri fi'lraadlnati. buyQtu 'ima-

dinati 'aliyatun. arrijalu badirOna ft'lmajlisi.

zaujatu 'Iqadl hasanatun. ra'su 'Ibikmati makbafatu'llahi. baitun min buyUti Taralri ft'ssUqi. antumhadirQna ft bustani 'Ijari. aljrau qabla 'ddari 'rraftqu

qabla

Exercise 12.

Is the master of the servant in the house? No,he is in the garden of the neighbour. You are the

friends of the man. The merchant is present in the

44 First Part.

market of the city. The door of the house is open.- The man's dogs (dogs of the man) are watchful.

The king's ministers are present in the council. Is

the physician present? The physician is absent andthe wife of the physician is present to-day, -r Ahmedis a friend of the judge. The gardens of the cityare spacious. The relatives of the physician are rich.

Seventh Lesson.

The Genitive (continued).

1. The Dual and Sound plural masc. lose their

final o with its vowel when they are followed by a

genifiye;thus the ending ot ani becomes !_L_ a,

^j'

aini becomes ^5 ai, o& atani becomes ifJL

ata, ^-jAjataini becomes^~ atai, O3 una be-

comes ^ u, ^j Ina becomes ^ I, e g.

I baita 'rrajuli the two houses of the

Iman.

jbaba baitayi 'rrajuli the two doors

( -of the two houses of the man.

-o- ,.0I ibnata 'Iwazlri the two daughters of

jjj^jjj Uij^ j^e minister.

c ,.0- , o,(baitu 'bnatayi 'Iwazlri the house of

'

</**'^^

\the two daughters of the minister.

}muc

allima 'Iwaladi the teachers of

Ithe boy.

I kutubu mu c

alliml 'Iwaladi the books

( of the teachers of the boy.

2. The words \J\ abun "father", ~J akhuno

9 , >

"brother", .*>. hamun "father-in-law", ^o dhu "master,

Seventh Lesson. 45

possessor" (only used with a genitive), pifamun "mouth"

take the following forms before a genitive:

Norn._,j|

aba Ace. Cl.aba Gen. \ abi

jL\ akhtt li-J. akha ^s>\akhl

_^+=> hamu ,, Us- ham 3, ,, ^- haml

33 dhu .{o dha ^j dhi

^ fd 13 fa ft.

Thus:

abu rauhammadin Mohammed's father.

- -fdarabtu aba zaidin I struck Zaid's

\ father.

u dhi husnin the face of the

beautiful man (literally "of- the pos-sessor of beauty").

3. A word cannot be separated from a genitive

jjelongring to it, therefore if it is qualified by an

adjective" the adjective must be put after the gemtive

(and have the article), e.g.

baitu "Ivrazlri 'Iwasi'u "the

spacious house of the Vezir".

An alternative form would be:

albaitu 'iwasic

u lilwazlri.

4. If the genitive refers to two nounsT

it mustfollow the first 'while the second takes the suffix "of

the personaL pronoun (see Lesson 8) e.g-.-

baitu 'Iwazlri wabustanuhu

'the Vezir's house and garden".

J^b^,. o^J? ijJ yada Ubinti warijlaha "the girl's

hands (dual) and feet (dual)".

46 First Part.

5. The genitive is oftenused_partitivel^__andjfco

denote material e.g. ^2 x,k3 qifatu Jahmin "a piece

of flesh"; 8^|S J^-S finjanu qahwatin "a cup of coffee";

T_'..fi.;V ijHyf kurslyu khashabin "a seat of wood".

6. The genitive often occurs after an adjective to

define or limit its application, e.g. Jjl*J! J^is qalllu

Taqli "little of understanding" (i.e. as regards under-

standing) i.e. "stupid"; ^Ul .^ kathlru 'Imali "abundant

of wealth" i.e. "rich"; je>^J! && hasanu 'Iwajhi"beautiful of face".

Note. This genitive is improper and elands in place of a

defining accusative, hence the rule in Lesson 6, 4 does not

apply to the word before it, which can take the article when it

is definite e.g.

O, , O ,0.0 }* , ,P<, ,(MI t ,0

'Iwazlri 'lhasanatu

'Iwajhi ha^iratun "the beautiful daughter (lit. "the daughter the

beautiful of face") of the Vezir is present".

7. Some nouns are used in Arabic with a following

genitive denoting a quality, where in English an ad-Cj

jective is used. These nouns are such as ^oU?6 ,0

'>

sahibun, plur. oL^I ashabun "master, possessor"; ^dhQ, dual, |jO dhawa (with omission of the final ^ be-

fore the genitive), plur. ^ dhawu and the feminine

sing. o!J dBatu, dual b'l>3 dhata, plur. o!^>3 dhawatu

"possessor"; _^| abtt "father";jt

unimu "mother";

ibnu "son", e.g.

sahibu 'ilmin "master of learningi e learned".

> -jdhatu husnin "possessor of beauty

'"

i.e. beautiful

Seventh Lesson. 47

* f abu lisanaini "father of two tonguesjj\ | j e dissembling".

' *Iibnu khamslna sanatan "son of

OT 1 50 years i.e. 50 years old".

Vocabulary.

)abubakrin Abu e

I

Bekr, (name of j*

I a man).

qabilatun a tribe.

j

banQ asadin (sons

jof a lion), nameof an Arabiantribe.

jamalun beauty.

f bukhlun mieer-

{ liness.

zillun shadow.

O o >

j^j zuhdun abstinence.

s-' (luqmatun a bit (of o*~^

\ bread, ineat&c.). >?

Exercise 13.

<

J

khubzun bread,

hadldun iron.

Ishaikhun

an old

man, head of a

tribe, Sheikh.

|ma'rifatun know-

1 ledge.

kidhbun a lie.

tujratun a room.

I matbakhun a

( kitchen.

nisfi'un women,

tajirun a merchant.

48 First Part.

Transcription.

mu'allirnQ "Iwaladi a^habuf

ilmin. arrajulu

'Iqablhu huwa abu lisanaini. ibnu abl bakria ka-

tblru'lmali. ibuata 'Iwazlri hasanata 'Iwajhi. bSbu'Ibaiti 'Iwasi'u mafttthun. tial huwa dhn Mlinin? La,huwa qalllu Taqli. kutubu dhawl 'ilmin nafi'atun.-

qabllatu ban! asadin hiya qabilatun rnina Tarabi.

zaujatu 'lhakimi hiya dhatu husnin wa jamalin.hali Tamlru karlmu 'nnafsi. la huwa kathlru 'Ibukhli.-

aslishajaratu dhatu zillin. zuhdu abl bakrin mash-hurun. 'aina 'bnati 'Jqadl lauii'atani. qit'atu lahrain

kablratun. luqinatu kliubzin saghiratun. finjanu

'Jqahwati hadirun. kurslyu hadidiu ft?

lbustani.

shaikhu 'Iqabilati "Ikathiru 'ImUli salil.iun.

Exercise 14.

The boys are stupid.- - The stupid boys are

present. The physicians (Broken plur. f) are learned.

The girls (Less. 5, 3) are beautiful. The menpresent are learned and the women present are beauti-

ful. The tailor is bad, he is a liar (father of lying).Abu Bekr's servant is present and the two maid-

servants of Abu Bekr's brother are absent. The cups

are in the room. No, they are () in the kitchen.

One of the sons (a son of the sons) of the sheikh is

50 years old. Is the merchant rich? Yes, he is

rich and miserly (much of miserliness). The learned

are the friends of kings (Plur. b).

Eighth Lesson. 49

Eighth Lesson.

Pronominal Suffixes.

1. The Personal Pronouns (^A^? damlr) jxist in two9 o>

forms: a) Independent i.e. standing alone

damir munfasil) or b) attached as Snffires to nouns,O a> O

verbs or prepositions (J*aX/> .^ damn* muttasil). The

Independent forms have already been given in Less. 3, 6).

2. The forms used when attached to words are:

Sing. Dual Plur.

3rd Masc. hu

3rd Fern. l ha

-, +& hum.

U* humai hunna.

2nd Masc. 2 ka .-> . I/ kum.|

U kuma^ ^

2nd Fern. ^ ki ^ kunna.

1st Masc. and Fern. ^5 I li na.

(with a verb J, nl).

*

3. These Suffixes attached jp^ a noun correspond to

pur Possessive Pronoun e.g. wb^ kitabuhu "his book":

attached to a verb or preposition they answer to our^

Personal Pronoun in the objective case e.g. &j^t>darabahu

"be struck him"; &ix minhu "from him".

Note 1. Nouns to which these suffixes are attached employthe forms which they have before a genitive i.e. they drop thenunation and in the dual and plur. the ,; while the wordsOS Os O,vj!

j,\ f> have the forms given in Lesson 7 (except that with% s

the 1st pers. pron. sing, they become ^1 abl, ^=>\ akhi, ^J?hami).

Ambic Grammar. 4

50 First Part.

Note 2. The suffixes s hu, UP hums ancf *# hum are

a

changed to hi, UP hima andp$>

him when attached to a word

ending in i, ^ 1 or (j ai e.g. XJuJ' kitabihi "of his

book", f froi*> kitabaihim "of their two books".

Note 8. The suffixes +5 kum and <*P hum become *-*

kumu and p& humu when they are followed by a word beginning

with hamzat alwasl.

Note 4. The pronominal suffix of the 1 st person sing.

is always ^c ya after a vowelless I_ ^5 .

4. The prepositions jur. 'inda "with, in, in the

possession of", cr min "from" ji 'ala "on", t ila

"to, unto" are attached to the pronominal suffixes

without change (e.g. 5.xic 'indahu "in his possession",

\Iic 'alaihi "on him") except in the case of the 1 stperson

which is as follows: ^.x^f

indl "with me", ^ix minnl

"from me", ^U 'alaiya "upon me", \\ ilaiya "unto me".

j li "to, for" assumes the form '\ la before the suffixes

except with the 1stperson which is ^ li "to me".

5. The English verb "to have" is usually expressedin Arabic not by a verb but by the prepositions it

^.

jUc or ^> ma' "with"; thus "Zaid has a book" may be

expressed by oji^a JsjJ or i_ilv^^ jo: Jw<c or

6. The particle 0! or Oh! in forms^ofaddress

may be expressedin Arabic by j ya with the following

Eighth Lesson. 51

word in the nominative without pupation e.g. j^ C

ya zaidu "oh Zaid", but with the followipg word iu

the accusative if that is followed by a gepitive e.g.

\> ya saiyida?

nnasi "oh Lord of (the) men"-

For further details see Lesson 16.

Vocabulary.<-

jbaina between,-

{ among.

--Jwaraqun paper

;3 \ (collective).

qalamun a reed,

pen.

,j> hibrun ink.

--j zainabu Zainab

}' (name of woman).

| saiyidun master,

1lord.

saiyidatun mistress,

lady.

f mahmudun Mah-mud, (name of

I man).

|hasanun Hasan,

j (name of man).

fiddatun silver.

J fatimatun Fatima,

1 (name of woman).

Exercise 15.

I

e

a ishatu Ayesha,\ (name of woman).

khaifan thread.

ismun name,

sa'atun hour, watch.

dhahabun gold.

'abdu 'rrahmani

Abdurrahman,(name of man,literally "the

servant of the

Merciful").

? -x |

himfirun

an ass.

r

abdun a slave,

servant.

>{ au or.

Ihindun Hind,

? j (name of woman).

(*J

52 First Part.

Exercise 16.

Abdurrahman has two sons, the name of the

older (great) is Mahmud, the (name) of the younger(small) is Hasan. O servant, is the physician pre-sent? No, (0) my master, the physician is absent;the wife and son of the physician (Less. 7, 4) are pre-sent. Hast thou a gold watch (watch of gold) or a

silver one (watch of silver)? I have a silver watch,

(0) my master 1 Have you horses (plur. a)? Yes,we have horses and asses. Are my servants in the

market? No, your servants are in the garden.

My brother's wife is beautiful (beautiful of face).

my mistress, art' thou content with (Q,) thy slave?

Yes, I am content. He is content with his

servant.

Ninth Lesson. 53

Ninth Lesson.

Demonstrative Pronouns.

1. The Demonstrative Pronoun

al-'ishara) in its simplest form is: Masculine Sing, lo

dha for all cases; Dual nom. O!J>' dhani, gen. and ace.

^jj dhaini; Feminine, Sing. ^3 dbl, 8o dhihi, j tl, ao

tihi, if ta for all cases; Dual nom.CJ

ls tani, gen. and

ace. ^AJ taini.

Plural for both genders and all cases j^t ula or

*^t ula'i.

These forms are however rarely used.

2. The words for ^tbis, these" are formed by pre-

fixing IP (written 9 see Intro. 6, note 1), to some of the^

simple forms above. They are:

Sing. masc. IJ^P hadha for all cases. Fern. j^>

hadhihi (rarely ^j^>) for all cases.

Dual masc. nom. atOJ> hadhani. Fern. olip hatani.

Gen. and ace. ^j^ hadhaini. Fern. Joii hataini.

Plural ^p ha'ula'i for both genders and all cases.

3. The words for "that, those" are formed by

adding & ka (in some cases with interpolated ^) Jto

the simple forms. They are:

Sing. masc. M dhaka or 5Uo dhalika; fern. &s

taka or >^Lu tika or usually w^l> tilka for all

54 First Part.

Dual masc. noin. y5o!J dhanika or ^5o!6 dhannika;

gen. and ace. ^ijJ dhainika or L,3 dhainnika.

Fern. nom. ^j tanika or ^fJs tannika; gen. and

ace. y&Lu tainika or Lu tainnika.

Plural u&ftjt ula'ika (more rarely ^! tilaka or

i ulalika) for both genders and all cases.

4. If the__demonstrative qualifies a simplejaoun..it precedes~it and the noun Jakes the article e.g.

vjutfdT -IjJ> hadha 'Ikftabu "this book".

But if the noun is defined by a following genitive.or a pronominal suffix the demonstrative isplaced

after these e.g. !J^> ^JJ\ ^ ibnu 'Imaliki hadha

"this son of the king" |j^> fXAxs'kxtabukum hadha

"this book of yours".

5. If the demonstrative is used pronominally andas subject of a nominal sentence, then:

a) If the predicate is an indefinite noun, no copula

is necessary e.g. u>lii=9 \o& hadha kitabun."this is

a book .

b) If the predicate is defined by the article the

3rd pers. pron. is used as a copula to prevent the

demonstrative from being taken adjectivally (as in 4) e.g.

oJ^J! jp !JNJ> hadha huwa 'Iwaladu "this is the boy".

c) If the predicate is defined by' a following genitiveor a pronominal suflix, the demonstrative is put first

and no copula is needed e.g. ^jGbsa !J^> "this is

your book".

6. The Interrogative pronouns. (j,l$ix*/5S? ^ ism

alistifham) are ^ man "who", U ma "what" (sometimes

Ninth Lesson. 55

- . a

lou madha), ^5 aiyun fern, jul aiyatuu "which",

kam "how much? how many?"

^ is indeclinable (^^^ mabnl). The genitive

relation is expressed by placing it after a noun e.g.

Q, obtf kitabu man "whose book?"

U is also indeclinable. After some prepositions it

is written^

as<J

lima "for what? why?"2 OaS

'

t^!,fern. iu| is declinable and is treated as a noun,

so takes a following noun in the genitive e.g. J^ ^aiyu rajulin "which man?" ^j^ xll aiyatu bintin

"which girl?"

^ takes the following noun in the accusative e.g.

{jjj *y kam waladan "how many boys?"o .

Note. The interrogative particle*. (I, J^1

) are not used

before the interrogative pronouns.

Vocabulary.

G

qatilun killing.

,

Jahzun glance.

qamusun dictionary.

yLu manzarun look.

o!or ( ghaflatun careless-

Vl Q_t {

\ ness.

imra'atun woman,(in distinction from

man).

anlsun amiable,

shakhsun person.

sababun cause.

Jmuslbatun mis-

( fortune.

matlubun desire,

sanatun year.

fumrun life.

56 First Part.

Exercise 17.

o , J , , \ G . .

s^ &lj UJ

I ^GjG,o , *$>* ,

Jv?

U UA

Exercise 18.

This is a good man and that (fern.) is a bad woman.This is the judge. This judge is upright and that

physician is learned. These friends of thine are rich.

This son of the sheikh is amiable and that daughterof his is beautiful (of face). O my master, what is

thy desire? What I want (my desire) is paper (and)

pen and ink. . Who is the minister's son, this or that?- This is the minister's son. Whose son is Hasan?

Hasan is the son of Abdurrahman. Howmany sons has Abdurrahman? He has five. Hastthou this book? No, I have that. This dictionary

Tenth Lesson. 57

is useful. What is thy name? My name is Hasan.

How old art thou (how many years is thy life)?

I am 50 years old (my life is 50 years, or I am a son

of 50 years). These two men are friends.

Tenth Lesson.

Adjectives.

1. Some of the commonest forms of adjectives

IL[ ism sifa) are:

a) J^cli fa'ilun (properly the present participle) e.g.

A * ft

ol* sadiqun "upright", i>U 'adilun "just", J^L>

jahilun "ignorant".

G 6 6

b) J^uis fa'llun e.g. .Xou* sa'ldun "happy", y^

kablrun "great", ^S kathirun "much, many".

c) Ojjiifa'ulun denoting intensity e.g. J^> jahulun

r, j ^

"very ignorant", 3j*~S kasalun "very- lazy".

d) Q^J* fa'lanu (without nunation) e.g. o lwu

ta'banu "tired", U*iot ghadlbanu "angry".

2. Adjectives denoting colours or bodily defects

have the following form:

Masc. sing, jj afalu. Fern. sing. *Su fa'la'u.

6 a}

Plural for both genders Joe fu'lun.

58 First Part.

E.g.

Sing. Masc.

^M! aswadu, black

uol abyadu, white

j?\ ahmaru, red

ijjf azraqu, blue

akhdaru, green t\~.

a?faru, yellow

atrashu, deaf

(j*jZ>\ akhrasu, <

^j4*\a

e

ma, blind

_jc! a'raju, lame

' * f\ ahdabu,V^5*"'

{ humpbacked.1

Notice the absence of nunation in the Sing. (cf.

Lesson 6, 3).

Note. The fern, of the dual changes hamza into . e.g.- -o .

Q^!O^M saudSwani.

3. For the comparative and superlative of adjectives

the so-called Elative is used, (the J^&Jt ^^ ism

attaf^il). It is always of the form JoiiJ afalu, e.g.

^J^> sa'bun "hard" Elative vlJiIal as'abu "harder".

yfJ:kablran "great" Elative '^\ akbaru "greater".

4. If the second and third radicals of an adjectiveare the same, they are written as one with the tashdid

in this form (cf. Less. 23); e.g. 3sjJs shadldun "violent"

Tenth Lesson. 59

(radicals oj^i) makes its Elative JLif ashaddu; (for

; J^IS qalllun "few", Elative J^t aqallu.

5. The_Elatiye as comparative is the_same for all

numbers. It is followed by ^ to expressthe English "than", e.g.

**> o ,02 Go-

j+c a. jS\ j^ zaidun akbaru min 'umara "Zaid

is older than Omar"., ^o- o i , ttf O o

j*f\O^IP hindun akbaru min zainaba

"Hind, is older than Zainab".^ +tj *o + > * o c- + j - c c

oUJ! S\ i albanttna akbaru mina

'Ibanati "the sons are older than the daughters".

6. The Elative as superlative is .always -defined bythe article _or a following genitive or a pronpniijaaT

j3uffix.. Its feminine is ji fu'la (see Less.. 38, 5. c.),

e.g. ^iHf al'akbaru "the greatest" (masc.) (j-^Xl!alkubra

"the greatest".

(fern.).

7. The substantives ^ khairun "good" and ^isharrun "evil" are used as Elatives with the meanings"better" and "worse", e.g.

js> huwa khairun minka "he is better

than thou".

Vocabulary.

latlfun pleasant. o_p launun colour.

6 o .

wajnatun cheek. U^.*f> aaifun summer.

bahrun sea (used -, , .

also for the Nile).sharan hair -

nisa'un women j^ thaqllun heavy(used as plur. of

madrasatun school.

First Part.

jami'un mos-

que. J& a?lun n&IL

Ijamham the mos-aljami'u Taz- *-

fhaddun boundary,

'"1 limit.

jazlratan

6 - fsharlfun *,

-_,.,

I noble. ^ 8a llun

albariha o

yesterday ^3^ sbauqun yearning.

(used in ace. **,.

as adverb.). V/ gnarbun West.

Exercise 19.

.OE j - - o c

(Less. 7, 6)

W

J^Ji ^ J-.J

os -o >,o ^j So>. 7, 6) ^| yu,J _^ ^^

jJ

..)iU^

>CM> ,0 , O^CK, ) . , o <o s o-o

c^

jif

(Less. 36, 7)

*

l3| ^

Eleventh Lesson. 61

Exercise 20.

The lame girl is in the yellow room. The girl's

eyes are blue. The black eyes of the girl are killing.- The. slave is black. The Red Sea is the boundaryof the peninsula (island) of Arabia in the West. The

beggar is deaf and dumb. My house is more spa-cious than thine (thy house), it is the most spaciousof the houses of the city. The Nile is wider than

the 'Euphrates. This book is better (^^l) than that

(book), it is the best of the books. Most men(jX~\

jjJjJI literally "the most of the men") are idle. My

yearning for (&\ cf. Less. 8, 4) thee is more violent than

for thy brother."

Eleventh Lesson.

The Verb.

1. The Verb (J^s fic

l) has usually three radical

letters as vjotf kataba to write, but may have four or

more as^-ji tarjama to translate, (see Less. 30).

Note. In 4ip.tioiia.riea the ArpKif- verb ia found iu the fprn\the 3rd sing, masc. perf. active, while the infin. is given as

e translation nfj Thus we say kataba "to write" although

really means "he wrote".

2. The 3rdsg. masc. perf. is of the forms juls, jo

or jots i.e. the first and third radicals always have^'

v

atAwhile jibe second may have any one of the three

a. i. u. verbs having i or uare generally intrangjtiveanci jdenote a state or qualityl^those with! denoting^^

temporary state as.^

-j>- hazina, to be sad; whiletthose

jyith u denote a lasting or permanent state as ^hasuna, to be beautifuL

62 First Part.

3. The verb has two main tenses: the Perfect

al-madi) denoting a finished action, and the

Jmperfect (^Laif al-muflari') denoting unfinished action.

To these the Arabs add as a third the Imperative

al-amr).

4. The Perfect Stem is obtained by cutting pff the

last vowel of the 3rd sing, masc. perf. fand the perfect is

Declined by adding to this stem the following endings^

Sing. Dual Plur.

3. masc. a. 3. masc. !_'_a 3. masc. 1.,u

3. fern. oJlat 3. fern. _ata 3. fern. o_na

2. masc. o_ta 1. m.a. f. U_tuma 2. masc.*?__turn

2. fern. o. ti

1. m. a. f. o tu

Kg.

Sing. 3. masc.

3. fern.

,, 2. masc.

2. fern.

1. masc. a. fem.

Dual 3. masc.

3. fera.

2. masc. a. fem.

i

2. fern,^j'__tuuna

1. rn. a. f. G_na.

|kataba he has written,

( (or he wrote).

katabat she has written.

|katabta thou (man) hast

} written.

jkatabti thou (woman)j

hast written

katabtu I have written.

- (kataba they two (men)*1 have written.

-- fkatabata they two

I (women) have written.

)katabtuma you two

\ have written.

Eleventh Lesson. 63

> - -f kataou they (men) have

Plural 3. masc. f^T{

- <- - fkatabna they (women)3 ' lem> "( have written.

" - -f katabtum you (men) have

2. masc. ^ { written

* * <" -fkatabtunna you (women)

2. fern. ^xT haye

,, 1. masc. a. fern, lllx/ katabna we have written.

In the same way from verbs of the forms Jod

fa'ila and jj fa'ula we have: yyi shariba "he drank",

ooyi sharibat "she drank" etc.: from ^^a karuma

"he was noble", ^^S karumtu "I was noble" etc.

Note. The endings in the forma above are simply shortenedforms of the personal' propQivr^sed as^nommativea except in the

.Si* aing. maac. whereTEe a is unexplained, nythe 3^ sing, fem^

yhere the at i_8.,tne" fern, ending and in the 3^ masc. plur. where

the u is simply the sign of tire plural. (The I in this last endingis not pronounced and is introduced only to prevent the form

being read at the beginning of the next word as "and".)

The chief rules for the Concord of subject and

predicate are:6 o

a) When the verb (Jois ffl) precedes the subject

'Jjf al-fa'il) then:

1. If the subject is a sing. masc. or usually if it

is a dual masc. or a sonnd plur. masc. the verb is putin the 3rd sing. masc.

fJuit ^JS kataba 'Imu'allimu the teacher wrote.

T'n ' V /kataba 'Imu'allimfmi the two teachers

o-^**5 ^

\ wrote.

-

|kataba

!

lmu allimuna the teachers

64 First Part

2. If the subject is a fern. sing, followed imme-

diately by the verb, or a dual fern, or a sound fern.

plur., or a broken plur., the verb is put in the

3rd sing. fern.

|katabati 'Imu'allimatu the teacher

( (fem.) wrote.

-|katabati 'linu'allimatani the two

( teachers (fem.) wrote.

katabati 'Imu'allimatu the teachers

(fem

)wrote

Jt viv^ katabati 'ttalamidhatu the pupils wrote.

3. If the subject is a sing. fem. not- immediately

following the verb, or a collective (see Less. 2, 4), the

verb may be in the 3rd sing. masc. or fem.

*f (vaJ^) v^ kataba (or katabat) lahu

'Imu'allimatu, the teacher (fem.) wrote to him.

xi* jJafi (viiJft)-

jtf akala (or akalati) 'ftairu minhu,

the birds (coll.) ate of it.

b) If the subject comes first the verb must agreewith it in gender and number,

tjlfcjj o>iLLlt f&=>hadara 'Imu'allimQna wadha-

habu, the teachers were present and went away.

6. Sentences according to Arabian grammariansare of two kinds:

a) The Verbal sentence (0**J!niJuJ-t al~jumla al-

fi'llya) when the verb (jJUj I)is followed by the subject

(called in this case J^UJ f al-fa'il) e.g. >oj JJaT kataba

zaidun "Zaid has written".

b) The Nominal sentence (il*-!^? idljl aj-jumla al-

ismlya), when the subject (here called IJJllI almubtada'

Eleventh Lesson. 65

"that (with which) is begun" comes first, whether the

predicate (j+?-\ alkhabar) be a noun or its equivalent,o ,, e o,

an adverbial clause or a verb e.g. jo j^ zaidun

waladun "Zaid is a boy", vlja" -Vj zaidun kataba

"Zaid (he) has written".

Note. The particle Jo qad is often put before the perfect

to strengthen it. It may sometimes be translated "already",sometimes it may be omitted in translation.

Vocabulary.

-jfahima to under-

"cv

r9stand. j^

o

Oo,

OjS qaulun speech.

--r(tala'a

to rise (of

; 1 the sun).

-r | gharaba to set (of

\the sun).

shamsun sun.

qamarun moon.

- fqasada to strive

{ after, make for.

sa'ihun traveller.

- - -f dakhala to enter,

1 g into.

'^> kharaja to go. out.

(3jlnazala to alight.

ei\A ma'un water.

j+> khamrun wine.

ft r. -

haushun courtyard.Arabic Grammar.

naharun day.

saidun hunt,

qabila to receive.

guest,

kasara to break,

kubbayatun glass,

ba'atha to send,

fallahun peasant,

hakimun governor.

rajar

a to return.

ba'uda to be distant.

{nahwatowards,

about.

nisfun half,

sa'atun hour.

66 First Part.

>j wajada to find. He. ghulamun youth.

2 -f ghanfyun (plur. g)

- -f jtalaba to seek,

tff \ rich. v^31 require.

G 'F

-06 fataha to open. r^> ta'amun food.

^5fariha to rejoice. JJL> jalasa to sit.

Exercise 21.^

u ^

,b< - >, , ., J * ~ , s.

U (Intro. 11, 3)

(Intro. 9)

t

jrir / x

Twelfth Lesson. 67

Exercise 22.

The verb is always to be put at the beginning of sentences.

Have you written your letters (plur. k)? Yes, wehave written our letters. The beggar sought food

from me. The maidservant opened the door of the

house. Hast thou gone out to the hunt to-day? No,I did not go out to the hunt, I went into the city,

(accus.). Has the sun set? Yes, the sun has set

and the moon has risen. Mohammed and his sons

entered the city and went out (dual) of it. The mensat. We returned from the hunt and sat. Theydrank (the) coffee. I received the guest at my house

(^JUc) this night. O maidservant, hast thou returned

from the market? I alighted at the house of (j>J^)

the peasants. O girl, hast thou understood what I

say (my speech)?

Twelfth Lesson.

The Verb with Suffixes.

1. When a personal pronoun is the direct objectof a verb it is attached to it as a suffix in one of the

forms given in Lesson 8 e.g. y^L^fc darabtuka "I have

struck thee", ,joyo darabani "he has struck me".

Note. The otiose { in the 3r<3plur. rnasc. is omitted before.

the suffixes e.g. J,_^Jytodarabun "they have struck me"; and

>

$ U is added to the 2nd piur . masc. before the suffixes e.y

darabtumtlha "you have struck her".

68 First Part.

S -o,2. The verb kana "to be" is weak Jow inu'tall.

See Less.- 23, 1) and its conjugation will be explainedin Less. 27, but it is needed so often that the Perfect

is given here.

Sing. 3. masc.J}

tf kana he was.

,, 3. fern. oj kanat she was.

,, 2. nlasc. o-^ kunta thou (in.) wast.

2. fern. ^JS kunti thou(f.)

wast.

1. masc. a. fern. ^^jS kuutu I was.

Dual 3. masc. \j'tf kana they two (m.) were.

,,3. fern. Lxjl^ kanata they two

(f.)were.

2. masc. a. fern. Uxlf kuntuma you two were.

Plur. 3. masc.Ijjfc'

kanu they (m.) were.

3. fern.^yf

kunna they (f.) were.

O JO J

,.2 masc. p&S kuntum you (m.) were.

2. fern. ^^ kuntuuna you (f.)were.

,,1. masc. a. fern. \JS kunna we were.

3. The Perfect of ^ is _used with the Perf.j)j

ajuptherverb to express the Pluperfect of the latter, the

subject being often jjlaced between the two "verbs e.g.

zaidun kataba Zaid had

\ written.

'.- - - --

Jkana 'rrijalu sharibu the men

--r

1 O^ ( had drunk, (cf. Less. 11, 3 b).

Twelfth Lesson. 69

4. When, ^ is used as a copula its predicate0- - 5 o i

(^> khabar) is put in the accusative (^umj nab (see

Less. 30, 12), e.g.

:*7 .'.- . ,- v Ikanat fatimatu

?

bnata 'Imalikixj| ^b c^ott

( Fatima was the king's daughter.

* -, <o. . ,

Ikana zaidun waladan Zaid was

KXJj J^J C)tt

j a j.JQy

- >

j:V]*-

1?Ikana 'Ibustanu kabiran the

j*i O^***^ Oj garden was large.

5. Any verb in Arabic may govern its own Verbal

j^oun (j-Vc^> masdar) m the accusative. When an

adjective is attached to this, the two words together _are

translated in English bv an adverb e.g. '--.t.^^r lJ>j ,,J*

fariha farahan 'aziman, he rejoiced greatly (literally"he rejoiced a great rejoicing", cf. Less. 34).

Vocabulary.

% baiagha to reach. # 1

1

? 1

^

70 First Part.

2 -

J'allyun Ali (name

c>1 of man). .^^

bada i u), wares,

Jui qatala to kill. I goods.

?.'?' fqal'atun fortress, ^ sami'a to hear.****

1 citadel.- - *

i asara to take* -

f sallmuu Selim, ^ \ prisoner."I (name of man). f ^

S

J* )

c

aduwun (pi. slj^i

bal but. *\ a'da'un) enemy.

Exercise 23.

t, . Go- ., , - - Oo c, -

Ls bSJ^j t^Joj/to JwP

j'uj i s j>

irf . iLiJ iju^f iJ^ is dJtf

'UCU

(Less. 7, 2) *& &> \S

U

Exercise 24.

Have you struck them (fern.)? No, we have not

struck them, the men have struck them. This news

Thirteenth Lesson. 71

(plur.) has reached me. The king was just. This

sheikh was learned. Wast thou present yesterdayin the assembly? No, I was absent. children,

were you diligent? girl, hast thou understood me?I have understood thee. The girls were present

and rejoiced greatly. Her name was Hind. The

king took the enemies prisoner and killed them. Omerchants, where are your wares, have you left themin the house? Have you heard it? We have

heard it. Hast thou (oo!) written it, or did thysister write it? They both wrote it.

Thirteenth Lesson.

The Imperfect.

1. The Imperfect tense (p'u^L! almudari') ex

an action still unfinished and is translated in Englishby the present, the future~"or when used without

q,

conunction after another verb by the present particile* , , ~ -

e.g. ^4^-1 o_j^ixj ijJUft ij*JL> jalasa 'nnasu yashrabuna'Ikhamra "the men sat drinking (literally "they were

drinking") wine".

2. The Imperfect Stem consists of the three radicals

of -the Yerb1_thefirst baying, no vowel, the second

having a, i/or u (the dictionary always tells which is

used with each verb). The persons are expressed byprefixing ya, ta, 'a and~na to the stein with theaddition in some cases of suffixes also. The Moodsai'e indicated by adding the vowels u for the Indicative,a for the Subjunctive to the last radical^ which is left

without vowel for the Jussive!

Prefixes and suffixes added to imperfect stem in

indicative mood:

72 First Part.

3. masc. j 3. masc. o l j 3. masc.C)3

j

3. fem. I_Ij* 3. fem.c,U_Is 3. fem.

t*,I_Ij

2. masc. _j:2. m.a.f. ,.,! j 2. niasc. ,.,._ _j

2. fem.

1. m. a. f. ___ j

2 fem.

1. m. a. f. J___

Full form of Imperfect Indicative of j3 -u (i.e.

imperf. stem = W>):- fyaktubu he writes (or

Sing. o. masc.

,, 3. fem.

2. masc.

2 ' fem '

1. masc. a. fem.

Dual 3. masc.

" 3 - fem -

2. masc. a. fem. ,..*

Plur. 3. masc.

3 femd. lem.

2. masc.

2. fem.

1. masc. a. fem.

will

taktubu she writes.

,- /taktubu thou (masc.)\ wrjtest

rtaktublna thou (fem.)

{ writest.

aktubu I write.

fyaktubani they two

^ (masc<) write/

/taktubani they two (fem.)t write.

taktubani you two write.

(yaktubana they (masc.)

\\^/yflktubna they (

fem-)

/ taktubQna you (masc.)

{ write

taktubna you (fem.) write.

naktubu we write.

Thirteenth Lesson. 73

3. The vowel of the second letter of the imperfectstem must be ascertained from the dictionary. The

following points however may be noted:

a) Most verbs whose second or third radical is a

guttural (i.e. ^ ^ ^? ^) take a e.g. g fataha,

Imperf. gZu yaftahu; ^ mana'a "to hinder, Imperf.

jl/ yamna'u. There are however many exceptions as

J^i-o dakhala "to enter", Lnperf. Jciou yadkhulu; iL

balagha "to reach", Imperf. jjL; yablughu; ^.>J raja'a

"to return", Imperf. ^-^ yarjfu.

b) Verbs of the form JjJ fa'ila generally take -L.

as yyi shariba "to drink", Imperf. <-jyiu yashrabu;

exceptions however occur as v^v*> hasiba "to esteem",

Imperf. v-^^^r. yaljsibu. (v-^> hasaba "to reckon"

makes ^w*o^ yahsubu).

c) Verbs of the form jJii fa'ula take ___ as ^karurna "to be noble", Imperf. Xj yakrumu.

4. The Imperfect in itself denotes only unfinished

action, but it may be made to indicate the future by

putting the independent word vJj*. saufa before it or

prefixing the contraction *. sa, e.g. wJciu *J^ saufa

yaktubu or ^JsLl soyaktubu "he will write".

5. The Imperfect of ^ (which generally has a

future meaning) is:

Sing. 3. masc. o-*^ ya^unu ^e w^^ ^e -

3. fern. 1 ta^unu sne w'^ ^e -

74 First Part.

Sing. 2. masc.

2. fern.

,, 1. masc. a. fern,

n ! QDual 3. masc.

o -" - fem -

2. masc. a. fem.

Plur. 3. masc.

,, 3. fem.

2. masc.

2. fem,

1. masc. a. fem.

'

takunu thou (m.) wilt be.

thou (f.) wilt be.

akttnu I shall be.-

si- /yakunani they two (ra.)

{- win be

/takunani they two (f.)

I will be.

takttnani you two will be.

yakuntma they (m.) will be.

yakunna they (f.) will be.

takQnftna you (m.) will be.

yCi: takunna you (f.)

will be.

o nakunu we shall be.

6. The Perf. of ,^ used with the Imperf. of another

verb gives to the second one the meaning of the LatinJ^G." Go^ --^

imperf. e.g. v_>jdj J^\ ^ kana zaidun yal'abu "Zaid

was playing".

7. The Imperf. of^l/used with the Perf. of another

verb gives to the latter ^the meaning of the Future-

perfect e.g. vlJjr J^ ^ysj' yakttnu zaidun kataba

"Zaid will have written".

Vocabulary.

shan un street.

la iba to play.

allahu God.

itauftqun success

{ (of God)>

'arafa to know.

aghniyft>u (plur of' 2

1 u ghanlyun)rich.

Thirteenth Lesson. 75

!Esuffix ^x^-I ahadu-

hum one of them).

dhahaba to go away.

faina where?\ whither?

i dukhanun smoke,i tobacco.

Exercise 25.

9 -c

hammalun porter.

( himlun load,

\ burden.

zuhrun midday.

|bac

da 'zzuhri, in

I the afternoon.

<S > o,SLiau'uiiJ Q4J tiU* wJLu ^

76 First Part.

!3U dJj C jilj (accus. cf. Less. 12, 4)

Exercise 26.

Dost thou smoke? I do not smoke. Will youtwo be present to-morrow with us? No, we shall beabsent. What does he desire from me? He de-

sires his right from me. The girl sat playing with

us. Zaid knew (use ,.

}l/ with imperf.) the sheikh of

the tribe. I did not know him. The porter will

carry the load to (Jl) thy house. Dost thou under-

stand what I say (my speech)? No, I do not under-stand it. The men were present going to the hunt.

When wilt thou return from the hunt? I shall

return to-morrow Will this news (plur.) reach him?It will reach him in the afternoon. The king

will be just. The sheikh smoked f.^ with imperf.)

much tobacco. merchant, wilt thou send the

wares to my house? The porter will bring themto thee.

Fourteenth Lesson.

The Moods of the Imperfect.

1. The Imperfect (g^'ualt almugtari') has three Moods

which are distinguished by the vowel of the third

Fourteenth Lesson. 77

radical In this it resembles the noun with_jts__three

case-endings. (Hence the terrag^'wax

which means

"resembling".)

Note. Arabian grammarians treat the imperfect as a noun,

thus, where we should say that the conjunction ^! anna "that"

requires the F bjunctive Mood, the- Arab says that the particleas

,.! governs the imperf. in the accusative.

The three_Mpod3 are.t

1) The Indicative ending in Corresponding to the

nominative, and hence called<^j>'f\ pj**?l

almudari' almarfu', e.g. ^JjCj yaktubu.

2)The Sflhjnnntiye pndinpr in JL corresponding.

to the accusative and called v-jj^allf ?j'**l

almudari' almansub e.g. ^JOu yaktuba.

5) The Jussive with a vowelless ending correspond-

ing to the genitive and called ..i>al p.uz\

almudari' ahnajzum e.g. ^OXj yaktub.

Note. The Jussive originally ended in which is now

dropped, but reappears before a word beginning with hamzat

alwasl e.g. L.jJ>XI ! v*^H yaktubi-lkitaba.

2. The Imperfect Subjunctive is declined as follows:

Singular. Dual.

3. masc. <-^po yaktuba. 3. masc. ux*j yaktuba.

3. fern. ^-jOo taktuba. 3. fern. Ux>' taktuba.

2. masc. ^okj" taktuba. 2. m. a. f. Ljjsj:taktuba.

2. fern. u^*^ taktubi.

1. m. a. f. is] aktuba.

78 First Part.

Plural.

3. masc. l^-<j yaktubu.

3. fern. cr*^' yaktubna.

2. masc. \_^& taktubu.

2. fern. i^' taktubna.

1. m. a. f. v_JXs naktuba.

Note 1. In the 2nd sing. fern, and in the 2nd and 3rd dual

and plur. mascl. the final Q of the Indicative is dropped. In the 2^d

and 3rd plur. the otiose ! is added at the end except when a

suffix is attached to the verb e.g. s^yi yaktuubhu.

Note 2. The Imperf. Subjunctive of Q is declined like

the indie, subject to the same changes in the endings as in theverb above.

3. The Subjunctive is used after the conjunctions

an "that", ^ alia (see Intro. 9) "that not", &-

hatta "until, so that", li, "^ kai, jCMikai, ^ li'an

"so that", ^l li alia $ ^ li'an la) "so that not", Jfa and 3 wa when they mean "so that", *\ au when

it means "unless that, until that':

and ^ Ian "not"

* 9 <t + O -^^(used as negation of the future), e.g. ^o^r. o \ -.Jib

talaba an yahdura "he required that he should be

present".

Note. ^ is a contraction for ^1 ^j^. ^ la yakunu an

"it will not be that".

Vocabulary.

The vowel after a verb is that of the second radical

in the imperfect.

rkashafa(i)

to un- s* famrun command,t cover, examine. 7*' \ affair.

Fourteenth Lesson. 79

amara. (u) to com- 9 * -

mand (takes ace. *#** maujndun existing.

of the person).

samaha to allow,

(with J for the

person'and o for

the thing).

p ghurfatun room,

to spend

-

firashun bed.

j raqada (u) to sleep.

-- , /.. . . .

ai qagada (i)to intend.

Lc 'aqilun intelligent.

Ji

- fmafqudun wanting,***** \ not present.

^j nazara (u), to see.

J4ji 'amila (a)- to do.

--f /amama before (of

rUJ

I place).

, .( wa'ada to promise

vXej < (with ace. of the

I person).

^M sirrun a secret.

baina between.

Exercise 27.

U VLJgJSL

li Oe \j>0 Vj'u

<o^Ox>;jO, ^ , 0o,o - o -

^LSJt JUJI rf)j ^ l ULSXJ

Exercise 28.

We requke thee (from thee) (fern.) to be present(see Less. 16, 6) with us. He entered the bed to

sleep (so that he might sleep). The women intended

80 First Part.

to go out of (from) the house. I sent a boy with

him to see what (L) he would do. Mohammed and

his servant intended to go to (Jit) the market. I

shall return to the house to see what thou art doing.I have commanded the servant to appear (be present)

before me. They went away until they entered the

city. I have promised him that that shall be a

secret between me and (between) him.

Fifteenth Lesson.

The Jussive.

1. The Jussive Mood almudarf

Fifteenth Lesson. 81

2. The verb^ in the Jussive losesits^ (see Less. 27)

when the last radical is vowelless (see Intro. 13, 3) e.g.

Singular. Dual.

3. masc. ^Xj yakun 3. masc. byL yakunu

3. fern.^xi'

takun 3. fern. Gyj takun a

2. masc. .i takun 2. m. a. f. ijAi takun a.

2. fern. j,yC5takunl

Plural.

l.-m. a. f. I akun.

3. The Jussive is used: .

a) Alone, especially in the 3rdpers. to express a

command e.g. v_^JJo yaktub "let him write". In this

sense it is' generally strengthened by a prefixed -3 e.g.

^JjCll liyaktub "let him write". If ^J precedes this

particle, the ^ loses its vowel eg. u^xXJb falyaktub

"So let him write".

b) After i la used for prohibitions (^-JIl!i la

annahyi) e.g. ._.r^-.v i la taktub "do not write".

,& *$ la takun gha'iban "be nqt absent".

Arabic Grammar. 6

82 Ffret Part.

c) Afterjj

lam used to deny a statement. Here

the Imperf. has the force of the Perf. e.g. u^xXj .J

lam yaktub "he has not written". It is also used after

CJ lamina in the sense "not yet".

d) In the protasis and apodosis of conditional

sentences, (see Less. 57).

Note. The jussive may be rendered more emphatic byadding anna or an, thus forming the so-called modus energicus1 and 2, e.g.

Modus energicus I. Modus energicus IL

Fifteenth Lesson. 83

These forms (not much used) are employed for

exhortation and are often strengthened by prefixing

the particle 3, e.g. ^JO^J layaktubanna "let him

surely write". They are also used after the prohibitive

la taktubanna "thou shalt not write".

Vocabulary.

janibun side,

dlquu anxiety, need.

mana'a to prevent,

dukhnlun entrance.

& _ shai'un thing.

G -

(gharlbun strange

| pi. t(i ji ghuraba'u.

daqiqatun minute.

maudi'un

crmakanun

place.

(ghadibatobeangry

(followed by j^).

i qadara(i) to be able.

>.- |ghairunanother

*-I (noun).

L another than he.

kadhaba(i) to lie.

qala to soy.

nQrun light.

Exercise 29.

vj

(Less. 16, 4 a) s G

L^s

.Cyjf oL

84 First Part.

gui

Exercise 30.

I did not(*>) know the affair and did not (.J)

understand it. boys, do not open the door. -

girl, do not lie. The pupils were idle and did not

(J) write the letter. O boys, be not idle. Theyheard your epeech and- did not understand it. Donot leave your friends in (the) anxiety. Do not pre-

vent me from entrance to (out) you. Be not angry

with me, o girl. Let us drink (the) coffee. Thefather and his son were not able to return to their house

(. . . . that they should return).

Sixteenth Lesson.

The imperative,

1. The Imperative >^i jJi fi'l aFamr is formed

jrom the Jussive by omittiug the pronominal prefix,

but as a word in Arabic must not begin with ayowelless

letter (see Intro, fc? 2) a hauazat alwasl (Intro. 11) su]>

ported by t is prefixecT__This hamza" takes the vowel

_ if the second radical has_,but __ if the second

radical has _ oj _ e.g.

kataba, Jussive vS yaktub, Imperative

} uktub.

Sixteenth Lssson. 85

daraba, Jussive y^**y yadrib, Imperative

vytolidrib.

}tjjs> maua'a, Jussive .>Uj yamna', Imperative

<cix>j.imna'.

iic* oUlT it J^H idhhab ila 'Ibabi waftalihu

"go to the door and open it".

2. The Imperative is naturally found in the 2nd pers.

only:

Sing. 2. masc. <^>ji'! uktub

2. fern. ^1 uktubl

Dual 2. masc. and fern. LXJ'! uktuba

Plur. 2. raasc. -*^' uktub\3

fern. ^ nktubna.

The Imper. of o^ is:

3. The Imperative is negatived by ^ with the

Jussive (see Less. 15, 3 b).

4. Direct address (the vocative) is introduced by:

a) The particle \ ya followed by a noun, which,

if it stands alone is put in the nom. without the article

88 First Part.

and without nunation in the sing.; but if it is followed

by a genit. is put in the accus. e.g. jjj [> ya waladu

"Oboyl"; Jjf jJc' I? ya <abda 'llahi "O Abdallahl"

(literally "servant of God").

b) The particle l^jf aiyuha; fern. L^ aiyatuha;

.strengthened forml^it

G ya aiyuha followed by a noun

in the nom. and always with the -article e g. j^JJdT Ql C

ya aiyuha 'ttilmidhu "0 scholar I"

For further details see Less. 48, 1.

Present Participle.

5. The Present Participle ism alfa'il,

katibunnomen agenda) is of the form J^eli e.g.

"writing".

T^eJParticiple is declined like other nouns and

generally has a sound plural e.g.

Masc. Fern.G - O- ^

Sing. nom. wo'tf katibuii writing xo'K katibatun

ace. katiban ilstf tatibatan

Sixteenth Lesson. 87

After^l/^tbej^articiple ^xpresses a condition in

Go-the past e.g. Lj'l/ Joj ...li' kana zaidun katiban "Zaid

was writing" thus having much the same meaning as

(see Less. 13, 6).

6. There is no infinitive- in the sense of_theEuropean languages in Arabic. The English infinitive is

expressed by a sentence in Arabic e.g. *JL;u O 5

vX^' ^JsJu

yaqdiru zaiduu an yac

malahu "Zaid is able to do it".

'

The Verbal Noun.

7. Every verb in Arabic fans a Verbal Noun(^j^a*

masdar). In the simple verb this may be of one or

more of some 40 forms. Among the most commonGo- 9 o- O,-

are Jue fa'lun as Jj3 qatlun "killing"; Joe fae

aluu (from

verbs of the form joe) as -j farahun "rejoicing" (fromO ,) O , >

**};and ^ye fu'ttlun as

Oj^O dukhulun "entering",

khurQjun "going out", cjii tulti'un "rising",

nuzftlun "descending".

For details see Less. 34.

Vocabulary.

n small.

-

|sakata(u) to be -j |labisa to Put ou

I silent. u: I (clothes).

o ,

thaubun (pi. ujLS

thiyabun)garment,clothes.

sakana(u) to dwell. o

;- -

| saiyidatuu woman,\ mistress.

* -I wastun middle,

faala to do. Ja**s centre.

88 First Part.

L taraqa to knock at. ujb-l ajaba to answer.

Izarffun (plur. & *t / fa'inna for, (cou-

zurafa'u) a witty* * Junction).

( person, wag.

Exercise 81.

,>- , e -o - . . . , 0,0 .o

!^JL30u 3 0^5 1 b ! U oLJt

tijT i^rff ii

(what) Lo

jib!

Exercise 32.

See, o boys, what you have done. friend, enter

and sit by my side. scholar, open the door of

the room. I was going to the city. Whither are

you going? We are going to the market. O boy,come down from the mountain. you two scholars,

Seventeenth Lesson. 89

write your two letters. girl, speak the truth and

lie not. Where is Mr. (>xLl) Hasan living? He

is living in the middle of the city. What are youdoing? We are putting on our clothes. I was

writing a letter, when (o) our friend entered, Do

not prevent me from entrance to (jsc) you.

Seventeenth Lesson.

The Passive.

1. The Active Voice is called in Arabic

alma'lttm "the known" because the agent is known,when the active is used as in "Zaid struck him";

} i o -o E

the Passive Voice is called i3j^sU! almajhul "the

unknown" because when the passive is used as in

"Zaid is struck" the agent (the striker) is unknown.

The Passive is formed from the Active by change

of vowels, jn the perf. the I 8t radical takes __,the

2nd takes __ In the iroperf. the prefix takes __,the

2nd radical takes __ All the other vowels are as in

thejacjtiye e.g.

Perfect.

Sing. 3. rnasc. ^^o duriba he was struck.

3. fern.vi^oyto

cluribat she was struck.

2. masc. ^yto duribta thoti (m.) wast struck.

2. fern. c>o/s duribti thou (f.)wast struck.

1. in. a. f. v^oto duribtu I was struck.

90 First Part.

Imperfectum.

Sing. 3. masc. VV^ yudrabu he is struck.

3. fern.Vj**2-1 tudrabu she is struck.

2. masc. vy^ tu<Jrabu thou (in.) art struck.

2. fern. ?O;^J tudrablna thou (f )art struck.

1. m. a. f. ujyst udrabu I am struck.

2. The Passive must not be used in Arabic whenthe agent is expressed; thus "Zaid has been struck by

Omar" must be rendered by tJoj .*.v_jyto

daraba

'umaru zaidan "Omar struck Zaid"

The_Passive is often used impersonally e.g. Jjdhukira "it has been mentioned", or "it is told",

Passive Participle.

3. The passive participle (JytlU ^\ ism almaful)O to, G ) o ^

is of the form &J*SLA mafol e.g. \->^&A maktubun

"written". It is declined like other nouns and generallyhas the sound plural.

The Particle ^.Os o O,o ,

4. A Nominal sentence (JLM [ '^U> jumla ismlya

see Less. 11, 6, b) jg often introduced by the particle

y\sinna "verily". _shich is followed by the subject

(!JcoI5 almubtada') in the accus. and the predicate

(^3-1 alkhabar) in the nom. The predicate is often

strengthened by the prefix 5, e.g. JJiU ulj ^ inna

zaidan 'aqilun or JSLJ tJsJ J^linna zaidan la

c

aqilun

"verily Zaid is intelligent".

Seventeenth Lesson. 91

If_the subject is a personal pronoun, it is attached

as a suffix (see Less. 3) to ^ e.g. aJjinnahu "verily he".

Note. Alternative forms are used with the I8 'pers.

- . v *

pronoun i.e. J>l innl and .c^ inttanl "verily 1"; lit innS and

Lot innana "verily we".

The Particles ^ and $.5. The Conjunction "that" is expressed in Arabic:

a) By o t an (see Less. 14, 3) with a Verbal sentence

(Less. 11), the verb being either in the perf. (osL>) or

O > o- O - j

the imperf. subj. (^.J^^A fj^a*} e.g.

'IqadI an yahdura

zaidun the judge required Zaid to be present (to appear).

Jo-. i^sAi ,.J c>ou sami'tu an dhahaba zaidun'V \*J

I heard that Zaid had gone away.

If more than one verb is dependent on^t,

the

imperf. subj. is used throughout and the o? is not

repeated e.g.

zlru an yahdura rauhammadun wayajlisu bijanibihi the

vezir commanded Mohammed to be present and sit

beside him.

b) By ^1anna with a Nominal sentence, the noun

immediately following the conjunction being put in

the accus. (as with^jj.

If a pronoun follows it is

added to^1

as a suffix. With the 1 stpers. pron. the

double forms ^U arml and '^\ annani, ijj anna and-SBUJl annana are used.

92 First Part.

If the predicate is a noun it is put in the noni.,if it is a verb (see Less. 11, 6) it is put in the perf. or

the imperf. indicative, e g.

O _"'

f o ., -5

JjjLc L>o-. ...I ,-jtb balaghan!*anna zaidan 'aqilunw**J \^j ^" *

it has reached me (i.e. I have heard) that Zaid is

intelligent.

jzji?. iJvj o l ^icl aUamu anna zaidan yahduruI know that Zaid will be present.

Vocabulary.

/ dhakara to

\ mention.

(anlsuu ami-

\ able.

li for.

/ shaja'atun\ courage.

(daraba to

\ strike, coin.

sikkatun coin.-

yatu Con-

1 stantiuople.

fmashghQlunI busy.

(hadamato

1 destroy.

waqtun time.

-,,

J5r-

Islratun manner

\ of life.

khusrun loss.

qabila to receive

(hadlyatun a gift,

{

surOrun joy.

| salahu 'ddlni

\ Saladin.

c.

^>

* khaufun fear.

/ majhulun un-' known '

(ghalaba to

^ concluer -

j

mu'arrikhun

{^^ (8ound

ghasda to wash.

salaba to crucify.

Seventeenth Lesson. 93

/munajjimun astro- ^ /rifatun lifting up,

\ loger. ***j I raising.

-

/qlla (passive of & %& wa iakinna but .

:j qala "to say").

OG, ?.'' I kbashabatun a

^ najrnun star. ^^> t pjece of wooc|.

Exercise 33.

* Jt 1' jiT Jli ^* LLf

( (Koran, Sura 2, 151)

(Koran, Sura 103, 2)

JL? i' ^aS

o ^ oS

Jit!

Exercise 34.

The doors of the house were opened. The pre-sent was received with (o) joy. It is told that Saladin

was a powerful sultan. I did not know that you

were busy today.- Was this news known to (*x*c)

you? Truly this news is unknown to us. I know

94 First Part.

that Hasan is the conqueror and that thou art the

conquered. Truly the men mentioned are my friends.

His courage has been mentioned by (j^JLt) the his-

torians. Your clothes were washed.

Eighteenth Lesson.

Derived Forms of the Verb.

1. TheSimple_^erli (which alone has been treated soOs-> O o

far) is called o^s? Jje fi'l mujarrad ("the naked verb").6 - O o

From this is formed the derived verb (xo vXjj/> Jots

fi'l raazld flhi litterally "the verb in which is -an

increase"). There are 14 forms of this latter, each

consisting of "the three radicals, of theTBiffiple form

with the addition of one or moreletter^ajidhavjng"g.

meaning -whfoh * H a mnHififtation of that of~the SimpleThese with the simple form are designated by

e numbers 1 to 15. Of these the first 10 only are

in common use^ and the ten seldom occur from anyone root. The forms of a root in actual use are givenin the dictionaries.

2. General list of the Perfects in each of the

15 forms with its modification of the root meaning:

L Simple form: fca fa'ala, joti fa'ila or jJe fa'ula

(see Less. 11).

Forms increased by one letter:

II. JJI fa"ala, (with doubling of the second radical).

Meaning: Intensive as'^s> qataV'to cut", ^Jai

qatta'a "to cut to pieces"; or causative as(JU

'alirna

"to know", 'JLtic

allama "to make to know, teach".

Eighteenth Lesson. 95

HI. J^ fa'ala (with introduction of an alif after

the first radical).

Meaning: Relation of the action to a person as ^jS

kataba "to write", ^:M kataba "to write to someone";

or Attempt to do the action as JJ3 qatala "to kill",

jj&*qatala "to try 4o kill, fight".

IV. jjf afala (with prefixed^L&IT gjl*

hamzat

alqat' cf. Intro. 10; the first radical losing its vowej).^ , * .. o E

Meaning: Causative as ^^Jb- jalasa "to sit''..^^?

ajlasa "to make to sit".

Forms increased by two letters:

V. jj^j tafaccala (with prefixed o ta and doubling

of the second radical).

Meaning: Reflexive of II. as 5Jbi qallada "to gird"

jjj taqallada "to gird oneself".

VI. j^llf tafa'ala (witl^ prefixed o ta and alif

introduced after the first radical).

Meaning: Reflexive of III, as J3i qatala "to fight",

taqatala "to fight one another".

VII. jJtlj? infn'ala (with prefixed hamza and nunhe hamza here and in all the following forms beinghamzat alwasl, cf. Intro. 11).

Meaning: Originally Reflexive of I but generally.

u^sedas a Passive as '^=> kasara "to break" "~*=\\

inkasara "to be broken".

^ VIII. Jjts^ ifta'ala (with prefixed hamzat alwasl ando ta introduced after the radical, which loses its vowel).

First Part.

Meaning: Reflexive of I as ?c+=>- jaina'a "to collect,

unite" pt+>1 ijtaina'a "to collect themselves, to assemble".

IX. jjist ifalia (with prefixed hamzat alwasl,^omig,-

gion of the vowel of the first radical and doubling of

the^third radical).

Meaning: Used only for Coloursand Defectsrfls

~^s>\ihmarra "to be red"; ^^[ i'wajja "to be crooked".

Forms increased by more than two letters:

X. Jou^Lj istafala (with prefixed ^v*[ ista_ and

omission of the vowel of the first radical).

Meaning: Properly Reflexive of IV as JUt aslama

"to give up" JL*JOJ istnslama "to give oneself up".

XI. 3t*s! ifalla a rare secondary form of IX.

XII. ,'kc^asl ifau'ala

j^st ifauwaiarape f

^Tms occurriug }n

certain verbs only with

XIV. .jJuisj if'anlala special meanings.

XV.Jjjiit

ifanla

3. Any verb in the above list that has Reflexive

meaning is called ? .Lax uiutu\vi\

4. The imperfect of the derived forms is foripeflfrom the ])erfect according to the following rules:

a) The prefixes ya, til, alif, nun receive the voweju_if the verb is increased by one letter only (II. III.

IV forms), otherwise

Eighteenth Lesson. 97

b) The second radical receives the vowel i exceptin the Ibrms with prefixed ta (V and VI) when it

Deceives a.

c) The first radical remains as in the perfect: the

third radical receives the vowel of the mood u for

the indie., a for the subj., sukGn for the juss.

Thejbamza at the beginning of some forms in the

erf. lajis away in the imperT

Thus the Imperfects are as follows:

Perfect. Imperfect.

II. Jots fV'ala Joub yufa"ilu

III. Jiis fa'ala J^l^j yufa'ilu

IV. jJtM afala JoJb yufilu

V. Jobb tafa"ala JotiL yatafa'f

ali>

VI. J^IAJ tafa'ala J^i^j yatafac

alu

VII. Jotl>5 infac

ala Jjt^j yanfa'ilu

VIII. ji-3^ ifta'ala J**^ yafta'ilu

IX. JUsl if'alla joilj yafallu

X. joilxx-l istafala Jj^*u yastafilu.

5. The Imperative is formed according to tbg

general rule (Less. 16, 1) from the Jussive by tbg

.omission of the prefixes^'

If the first radical thus becomes vowelless a hamzamust be put before it (Intro. 13, 2). In the IV. formthis is hamzat alqaf (Intro. 11) which receives the

vowel a (fatha); in the other forms it is hamzat alwasland receives i (kasra).

Arabic Grammar. 7

98 First Part.

6. The Participles are formed from the Perfects

by prefixing a mlm with the vowel IT The prefixedhamza is droppeoL The second radical' takes the"vowel

i in the Active, a in the Passive!

Eighteenth Lesson. 99

7"

100 First Part.

Nineteenth Lesson.

II. Form j.1. Conjugation of ^ly "to break to pieces, smash'

Imperf.

Perf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

etc. etc. etc. etc.

Imperative

.I/ Part. Active

^5j~J etc. Part. Pass.

Verbal noun

In some verbs there is a secondary form of the

Verbal Noun of the form 3l*' e.g. from vj^>' "to

welcome"

The Passive is in thePerf.JJlr etc., in the Imperf.

etc.

2. The form Jsii denotes:

Nineteenth Lesson. 101

a) A strengthening of the meaning e.g. '^S "to

break", ^ "to break into pieces, smash".

b) It has usually a Causative or Factitive meaning

(like jJiM) e.g. jji^"to learn" ^ "to make to learn,

teach".

Note. In these cases, if a verb is intransitive in the Simple

form, it becomes transitive in II. e.g. jT "to be numerous",v**

jiT "to make numerous, increase"; while if it is transitive in

the Simple form, it becomes doubly transitive in II. e.g. ,,Jb

- a ^

"to reach", jJb"to make (something) reach (someone to transmit)".

c) Sometimes it has the meaning of thinking,

esteeming e.g. OJcT "to lie", v_jJo "to esteem (someone)

a liar", .Woo "to be sincere" .%vXo "to think (someone)

sincere, believe".

d) It is often used to form verbs from nouns e.g.Go * z ,

from oJl>. "skin, leather" is formed jsJb*. "to skin,

bind (books)"; from j&glc ,^UJt "peace be on thee"

is formed *jUJjL,

"he greeted him" i.e. said "peace

be upon thee" to him.

III. Form j^.

3. Conjugation of v-*i' "to write to":

Imperf.

Perf. . Indie. Subj. Juss.

WOO i^o'LXj

102 First Part.

Imperf.

Perf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

etc. etc. etc. etc.

Imperative

vlo Part. Active viol*

^f etc. Part. Passive sLjb

5Verbal noun

^jlxi',more usually

Passive, Perf. v*jy Imperf. Indie. JJlx!

4. The form jlli is used to express the relation

of the action to a person e.g. ^>jS "to write", ^J*"to write to (someone), correspond with".

It also very often expresses an attempt to do

something e.g. Jjia "to kill", Jjls "to attempt to kill,

to fight"; 0L* "to precede", ^l^ "to try to precede.to compete with".

5. The j^li form is always transitive and takes

the Accus. of the Person e.g. xli'^ "he corresponded

with him", Uii "he fought with him".

IV. Form jJS.

6. Conjugation of JJi^? "to make to sit".

Nineteenth Lesson.

Imperf.

103

Indie. Subj. Juss.

etc.

Imperative

etc.

etc.

Verbal nount

Passive, Perf.

etc.

Part. Active

Part. Passive

Imperf. Indie.

etc.

7. The meaning of the jJ^st form is causative or

factitive (cf. jJki). It makes intransitive verbs transitive

and transitive doubly transitive. y^> "to be present",-. ^ o

"to make to be present i.e. to bring, present";^ -. o

"to sit", Jb-l "to make to sit, seat".

Many verbs employ both the II. and IV. forms

as causatives, sometimes with different shades of

meaning, e.g. 'j-> and ^3-t are both used to mean

"to inform"; while

inform".

means "to teach" and "to

104 First Part.

"to do in the

"to receive Islam,

The joist form is often used to form verbs from<5 o > - - o

nouns e.g. from *xwo "morning" ^/-ot "to do in the

morning"; from sL** "evening"

evening"; from p^LJ"Islam"'

^

become a Moslem".

Vocabulary.

;III. to speak to,

r* iaddress (ace.).

(III. to treat in a

1 frierdly way.

II. to kiss.

IV. to destroy,

to be (literally

"to do in the

morning").

ramping.

>JJL> III. to disobey,

yd! pl. y>!3 5 command.

pl. affair.

-'j^ jIV. to inform (^

I"concerning").

..-f father (literally

}* \ "begetter").

JlS IV. to become dark.

;3U to ask advice of.

;^-to equip.

III. to defend.

to witness, III. to see.

half.

around.

if not, except.'

i only.

horizon.

III. to interrupt.

speech.

to send.

bedouin.

II. to bring.

IV. to bring for-

ward, present.

II. to cause to

reach, convey.O > j

pl. (jojjaj robber.

III. to attack.

Nineteenth Lesson. 105

land.

from.

distance.

II. to seek.

to be neighbour to.

neighbourhood.

-f IV. to deprive,

c1 (with two accus.).

I life, (see Intro. 6,-

\Note 3).

-f III to watch, ob-

;(

serve.

fc to cover, overwhelm,

friendliness.

IV. to treat kindly.

Exercise 35.

.

-(immediately, (ad-

Iverbial accus.).

II. to take goodnews to.

to mix, III. to haveintercourse with,

(ace.).

:-

fIII. to frequent the^

( society of (ace.).

-|II. to propose,

^JI manage.

xi II. to determine.

II. to believe.

to tmvel

P^ce, greeting.

as.like -

to find.

t s

xobs.it -- clsJsJu

106 First Part.

(Perfect for the English Future)

(proverb) JjJb *LM3

Exercise 36.

O servant, bring us the coffee. The judge com-manded them to (that they should) bring forward the

robber. We kiss thy hands. Convey to him mygreeting. I have commanded thee, o girl, to convey

my greeting to them. I informed him of (^ this

affair, but he did not believe me. Do not believe

this boy, o girl. The proposing is from men, the

determining is from God. I ask advice of my friends

in anxiety.- Thou hast seen many cities and had

intercourse with many peoples. Send that man to

Twentieth Lesson. 107

me so that ($) I. may treat him (*-J;) kindly.

Do not disobey my commands. Defence is the rightof (the) man. I bring thee the good news that wehave conquered the robbers. We have travelled to

Damascus. Bring in (cause to enter) the physician.

Twentieth . Lesson.

V. Form

1. The jJiii' form is the same as the jJis with

prefixed o.

Conjugation of Juli' "to take over, receive":

Imperf.

Perf. Indie. Subj Juss.

etc. etc. etc. etc.

Imperative

Part. Active

etc. Part. Passivet

JLliL*

108

Verbal noun

Passive, Perf. ^JUo Irnperf. Indie.

2. The V. form jJi is the Reflexive of the II. form

jj^i e.g. t -;Js'"to separate", X^AS

"to separate oneself

to scatter";-

jjtc"to teach" pUj

"to teach oneself i.e.

to learn".

It is also used to form verbs from nxmns e.g.2 .. o - ' - '-

from ,iLkflj "a Christian" is formed ^o "to become

a Christian"; from ^50^ "a Jew", o^ii' "to becomea Jew".

It often has the meaning "to think oneself, to

represent oneself as", ag. & "to think oneself great,*-. S 1

be haughty"; Ltf (from ^^ "a prophet") "to represent

oneself as a prophet".

VI. Form.

3. The VI. Form is the same as III. with a pre-

fixed o.

Conjugation of jjlai' "to fight with one another":

Iinperf.

Perf. Indie.. Subj. Juss.

etc. etc. etc. etc.

Twentieth Lesson. 109

Imperativeo - ,- G ., ,

Part. Active

9j' etc. Part. Passive

Verbal noun

Passive, Perf.jjjjtf Imperf. Indie.

4. The jsilij' form is the Eeflexive of the III. form,

e.g. JJIs "to fight", jjlii4

"to fight with one another",

therefore if the verb occurs in the Sing, its subject

must be a Plural or a Collective, e.g.

"the men fought with one another";

is Collective) "the people fought with one another".

This form is used more often than V. to mean "to

represent oneself as", e.g. ,^>L*j"to pretend to be

blind"; oj*if

"to pretend to be dead".

Vocabulary.

jjiV. to speak. L***-^ a^

(a^v. accus.).

,

- - (morning, ace. "in f ?

\ the morning". ^ also.

c^L necessary, duty.-

(V. to come for-

frf 1 ward.

Li V. to follow. ---f

V - to seParate*j

jfrom one another,

% trace.1 VI. to disperse.

IV. to narrate toU when

- after'

one another, VI. >

jfrom (the presence

to converse. *^ cr of . . ..

V. to show oneself

brave H1^ 8K'e'direction.

110 First Part.

<CAJO'

j presence, ap-

| pearance.

V. to be grateful.

|(plur. ^AJ5^c)

| tender feeling.

VI to play (L->).

flame.

V. to remember.

people.

V. to be slow.

j VI. to meet one

\another.

VI. to be bold.^

Exercise 37.

y" li **J

o , ,. ,--

r

JV. to wonder, be

(astonished.

extreme, extremity.

(to know, II. to

\teach, V. to learn.

medicine.

(thus, (literally

( "like that").

I appointed, speci-

V. to have the

honour.

or J>KxiJ (plur.

ristian.

fV. to say farewell

{to one another.

G?

- .0.0

"b

o (about) j

(from thee) ^(

UJ

Twenty-first Lesson. Ill

j jfLtfS (Less. 12, 5) vs'

og &->, ,.. J - .

st ,3 a*ot ^

Exercise 38.

Do you speak Arabic? No, we do not speakArabic. They did not speak with us. We con-

versed about this affair. Hast thou learnt what thyteacher has taught thee? Yes, I have learnt it.

These pupils learn the science of medicine. Do not

speak thus, o child. They separated from one another

that they might follow the way and meet at (,3) an

appointed place. I was greatly astonished (I was

astonished the extreme of astonishment) at (^ him.

Truly we are exceedingly grateful (we are grateful the

excess of gratitude). The Moslems and the Christians

fought with one another. We said farewell to oneanother so that we might disperse.

Twenty-first Lesson.

VII. Form.

1. Conjugation of J&1 "to break" (intransitive):

Imperf.

Perf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

y^^.

.^W^AJ

112 First Part.

Imperf.

Perf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

etc. etc.

Imperative

etc.

Verbal noun

Passive, Perf.

etc.

Part. Active

Part, Passive

Imperf. Indie.

etc.

2. The VII. form is originally the Reflexive of the

Simple form, but generally it contains the idea of

allowing some action to be done to one i.e. it has a

Passive sense as ^LZ "to uncover", oJiXM "to be

uncovered".

3. The VII. form is wanting in all verbs that

begin with hamza, waw, ya, ra, lam or nun.

VIII. Form.

4. Conjugation of^=>-\

"to assemble".

Imperf.

Perf. Indie. Subj. Juss.o , o ,

Twenty-first Lesson.

Imperf.

113

Perf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

etc. etc.

Imperative

etc -

Verbal noun

Passive, Perf.

etc. etc.

r.

Part. Active

Port. Passive

Imperf. Indie.

5. The <a introduced after the first radical under-

goes certain changes:

a) If the first radical is one of the emphatic letters

OJ, {jo, -b, -b, the ta is changed into a _b; this is

assimilated to a _b or jo which is then written with

tashdld e.g.

strike" forms

"to make" forms

ib uto rise" forms

"to

"to be dark" forms lib! and JLbt.

b) If the first radical is o, 3 orj,

the ta is softened

to o; this is assimilated to a 6, which is then written

forms formswith tashdld e.g. ^J

Jso forms^2*3^

and

c) If the first radical is cy, it sometimes assimilates

the o e.g. ^ forms e^ or

Arabic Grammar.

114 First Part.

6. The VIII. form is like the VII. the Reflexive of

the Simple verb e.g. from *=* "to collect" is formed

+z>-\ "to collect themselves, to assemble"; but has

also the sense of doing a thing for oneself e.g. from

"to acquire" is formed ^r^u^'[ "to acquire for

oneself. Sometimes it has a reciprocal meaning e.g.'

"to strive", Loi>! "to strive with one another".

Vocabulary.

l*Ji to divide.

(MM? division, part.

, jVlJLto approach

"**\ (with ;,).

13! see! behold!

VIII. to be

experienced.

VIE. to be mingled.o 6 - &S

Jut/> plur. 31**! likeness.

Twenty-first Lesson. 115

deed.

- to lash. flog.

a lash.

|VIE. to confess

I (something v_j).

ilLa> truth.

foot.

I. and VIII. to

tremble.

> fear.

whole, all.

Oli, youth.

nearness, neighbourhood.

armv.

I. "to help, VIIL to

conquer (literally,

"to be heh

by God).

VIH. to think.

VIIL tohonour.

-: f VIIL to busy one-

1 self, work.

[VIIL to crowd;I verbal noun, "aI crowd".

Exercise 39.

U -

(Intro. 9)

116 First Part.

,3 (

l'from fear" adv. accus.) li

\

Exercise 40.

Do not approach us. We assembled in the neigh-bourhood of the city. Do not expect us. We were

exceedingly pleased that yon were present with us.

The army of the Sultan was defeated (broken) and the

Christians conquered. Think not that thou hast con-

quered us. Truly, he is honoured by all. We are

diligent and work much. There was a great crowdin the streets. The feelings of the men were stirred

as they heard that. Work and do not play, o children !

Twenty-second Lesson.

IX. Form.

1. Through the meeting of two similar letters at

the end of this form certain assimilations and con-tractions take place in the conjugation, The rules for

these are given in Lesson 23.

Twenty-second Lesson. 117

Conjugation of ^>\ "to be or become red' .

Perfect.

Sing. Dual Plur.

3. p. m.

3. f.

2. m.

2.,

f.

Dual 3. m.(.

3. f.

i:

M ">

Plur. 3. m.' *

Imperfect. Indie. Subj. Juss.

i.,0- a ^ o - o-o.Sing. 3. p. in. J^T;

3. f. ^i'

2. m. "^

118 First Part.

Imperfect. Indie. Subj. Juss.

Plur. 2. m. ^ l I3^

Imperative.

Sing. 2. m. =>*

Dual. 2.fj

Plur. 2. m.

2.f. 2.f.

.,Part, Active

> s?

Part. Passive not used.

6^0Verbal noun A^s>\. Passive not in use.

2. The IX. form is used only for Colours and Defects

(for the corresponding adjectives see Less. 10, 2), e.g.

to be or become black.

yellow, pale.

,, white.

red

,, green.

crooked.

The very rare form XL jUst is according to somea stronger, according to others^ weaker form of IX.

e.g. jU=>j."to be or become red".

Twenty-second Lesson. 119

X. Form.

3. Conjugation of Q^^J "to esteem beautiful":

Imperfect

Perfect, ,' 0,0

Iiidic. Subj. Juss.

O"""~

etc. etc.

Imperative

etc.

0,Verbal noun

o o , oE

etc.

Part. Active

Part. Passive ..

Imperf. Indie.

etc.

Passive, Perf.

4. The X. form:

a) Is originally the Reflexive of IV. e.g. JL! "to

give up" jJUJLl"to give oneself up".

b) Denotes "to desire or. ask for oneself" e.g. ^ac.

"to pardon" la*j "to ask pardon".

c) Denotes "to esteem or think" e.g. (^>*s> "to be.

beautiful" jl^w "to think beautiful" oi "to be

120 First Part.

disgraceful" *.*J&.\ "to esteem (something) disgraceful,

wrong".

d) Often has a Causative meaning, e.g. >JiL> "to

swear", ^JJLs^J "to make to swear".

Lk> world.

Vocabulary.> o -

X. to rejoice.

X. to esteem

forbidden.

opinion.

X. to enquire.

X. to receive.

future.

;..{ if God will.

i, plur. _.x meadow.&*

to be big, X. to

esteem great, im-

portant.

Ajiil. event.

(to serve X. to take

I into ones service.

government.

X. to use.

reed, pen.

hard} difficult.

.x> X. to enquire.

Exercise 41.

iJAio]Xl>? (Lesson 9, 6

,J)U

Juu ^ Ciij

U

J L

Twenty-third Lesson. 121

Jcill J l.'Ii? olcJ-l *jff IftiLl?>;

* r f ,^ * >,

(Less. 12, 5) U-J-^ ilUxIf olbllj? Uil^I? x

Exercise 42.

Do not esteem this event important. girl,

why hast thou become red ? I saw the men become

pale (white). Do you think right (beautiful) what hehas done? No, we think it disgraceful. The plantshave become green. I have taken this slave into

service. He is taken into service by the government.They have received this foreigner well (a great re-

ceiving). Do you use this pen? No, we do not

u$e it, its use is difficult. Do you think it rightthat I should take this man into service? I think it

wrong. Enquire concerning (^) this matter. Hewent out to the reception of the vezir.

Twenty-third Lesson.

Classification of Verbs.

1 . yerba are divided by Arabian grammarians into :

a|Sound jU ji).

b) Not sound(fJL, '^, jjii).

These latter are again divided into:9 -j

JJts i.e. the Correct verb comprising^ (a)

"Doubled verb" i.e. the verb in which

the 2nd and 3rd radicals are the same (b

122

'jHamzated verb" i.e. the verb in which one radical

isa~Eamza!

IL jjil jli the ^Weak" verb in which one of

the radicals is a waw orjj_jgu

Note. The terms JL- and & are often used as identical.

In this case the doubled verbs and harazated verbs are regarded

as Sound. The terms Regular and Irregular are sometimes used

loosely for Sound and Not sound. This use should be avoided

as all these verbs follow certain laws, though they suffer some

changes of form due to the laws of contraction and assimilation.

Doubled,Verbs.

2. The following rules govern the conjugation of

verbs whose 2nd and 3rd radicals are the same letter:

I. These two identical radicals are written as one

wjth_tashdid (or as the Arab grammarians say ^Uo^"assimilation" takes place):

a) When the lat and 3rd radicals have^vQwels (are

^^Lt "vowelled"), in which case the 2nd radical losesT

its_vowej, e.g. Jo from jJ3; Uo from vijLb; Ji from

JJo (Pass. Perf.); & from &S (Dual Perf.); Jb from

JJto (III. form); Jfi from JJIJ (Part. Act,).

Exception: The Pass. Perf. of III. is JJ^i.9

*

b) If the first radical is vowelless (^L.) and th^

3rd radical has a vowel, in which case the 2nd radical

givesjip its vowel to the 1 st, e.g. 3ij from jJjsj.

II. When the 3rdladicaHsjvQwelless, the 2Pd

^retains

its vowel and contraction(fliop

does not take place,

e.g. 2. Perf. Sing. Masc. Perf. v^i'o; Juss. JJjo Imper. JJoi.

Twenty-third Lesson. 123

.. , * t *

Note 1. Doubled verbs of the Joe and Jie form are thus

only distinguished from those of the Joe form in the uncon-

S - - - O ,

tracted forme, e.g. Jw (= JJU) forms in 2nd Sing. Masc. Perf. oJLL.

Note 2. In the Jussive mood and in the 2nd Sing. Masc.

Imperative contracted forms occur very often. In these cases,

to prevent two vowelless letters coming together (Intro. 13, 3)

at the end, the doubled letter takes a vowel (either fatha or

kaera, or damma when the Imperf. has damma), e.g.

->,->, f, t * GJO,Jussive: U^J, OJo and O^J beside JJ^o.

S->" O ,0$.

Imperative: ^ beside JJol.o >o

The other forms of-the Imper. are formed either from JJoJ

or from 3o as li ^O tyJ but always

IE. When, the 2Dd radical is separated from the

3rdby a long vowel, no contraction can take plac.

e.g. Part. Pass, jjix*; Verbal noun of IV.

3. Conjugation of 3^ "to show":

Perfect.

Sing. 3. m. 5o Dual. & Plur.

3. f. vili bJo

2. m. ^-f. Vtt

LJUo

Imperfect Indie. Subj. Juss.

OvXj ^JskJ JJ^xJ, also OjJ or ixj

or

124 First Part.

Imperfect Indie. Subj. Juss.

33 33

o

Imperative.o,ot =,

JJo! or Jo

or

or

or

Part. Active 3lo Part. Passive

Twenty-third Lesson. 125

Passive.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss.

etc. etc. etc.

Derived Forms.

Perf. Iraperf. Irnper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

II. jlS jixi JIS JJ3J.

in.

(Passive

iv. 33

v.

VI.

VII.

vm. Jo^t j"

(The VIII. form of 3J> "to stretch out" is given

here, because in the VIII. form of t there is assimi-

lation = 3^ (see Less. 21, 4, b.)

126 First Part.

IX.

X.

Perf. Imperf. Imper. Part. Act. Part Pass.

Seldom occurs.

AXIS

G- -

Vocabulary.

then, thereupon. j((u) to stretch out,

IV. to help, VIE. ^{

to extend. Jc>,

tablecloth. s -

as (with genitive). ,. c_

custom.

Bedouin.

((u) to narrate ("to"

narrative, story,

history.

(u) to collect, VII. to

join (with ^o).

|(u) to count IV. to

\ prepare, X. to

[ prepare oneself.

pi. il&j companion,

journey, start.

pi. Sjli horses,

(i)to be settled.

determination.

V. to go.

pi.J^jo boundary.

\uncle (on the

i father's side).

people.

HI. to make war.

G; , (i **

o French-

man.

(i)to determine

(with v).

Cairo.

(u)to injure, VIII.

to compel.

(u) to think, be-

lieve, esteem.

time, fate,

to be cheerful.

IV. to love,

extensive.

[subjects(of a

I kingdom).

Twenty-third Lesson. 127

JaU^Ji

*1J 5 aj'

128 First Part.

UJ li^ jJ JoJ?J,f

jj u

lil

Exercise 44.

Have you felt the heat? Yes, we have felt it.

- Hast thou passed by this place? I did not passby it, but I will pass by it to-morrow, if God will. -

Do you believe that he will appear before the judge?- We do not believe that. The rich people count

their money. We have prepared ourselves for the

Twenty-fourth Lesson. 129

journey. Do you think him a brave man? I

thought him a brave man, but to-day I do not think

him so (uJJs^). Thy presence rejoiced us. We

are glad (rejoiced) of it (w). Ring the bell. The

boy did not complete his speech, when (o) his father-

entered. Do not speak much (make little thy speech).- I loved her very much (a strong loving). He

loves her and she loves him. The heat was too greatfor us (strengthened itself on us). This city extends

to the sea. He deserves a great reward.

Twenty-fourth Lesson.>o o*,, > 9 -a > o 3

(o*r^ ^ u^)The Hamzated Verbs.

1. The Hamzated verbs are of three classes according

to whether the hamza is the first radical as in o^>\ "to

take"; or the second as in 3ll "to ask"; or^the third

as in \ "to read".

2. In the conjugation of these verbs theJJQllQwing

rulea are employed (cf. also Intro. 10):

a) ft.t the beginning of a word the bamza is always

written with alif e.g. <A^t, Pass. Perf.

b) If it comes at the end of A syllable fl.mj__hfla

no vowel, jt is written with alif afterffl^ha^^with^ya^

after kasra]_witF waw after jlamma. e.g.

Jc>G (Indie. Imperf. I.) ; iXi^j (Indie . Imperf. Pass. I.) ;

*3- (1. Sing. Perf. Pass. I. of llJ> "to conceal"); o!^3

Arabic Grammar.

130 First Part.

(1. Sing. Perf. I. of Ti "to read");^ (Part. Act, IV. of

^if "to be true, believing").

c) Kithaskasra or damma and follows fatha jt

is written with ya or waw e.g. ^j "to despair"; ^^"to be brave".

Exception. At the end of a word it is written

with alif even when it follows fatha e.g. \JL (Imperf.

Indie I. ofTjs).

d) If it has fatha and follows kasra or damma, it

is written with ya or waw e.g. UJJ (Iraperf. Indie. II.

of JiS); JdJI (Part. Act.); ^Jo (Perf. Act. I.).

e) If it has kasra or damma and follows a vowelless

letter, it is written with ya or waw e.g. ^Lu or

, 0,

(Imperf. Indie, of(_r^); uj*j (Imperf. Indie, of

(Imperf. Indie. III. of 'jL); jJLl (Part. Act. I.).

f) If it has fatha and is followed bv the alif that

jengthens the vowel, the latter is written with maddj^

(see Intro. 12.) e.g. 3^-T (Perf. III. of J^f); 1>T

(Part. Act. I. of the same). If however it has fatha

and follows an alif that lengthens the vowel, ItTs writlen

mdependently e.g. 3 lL (Perf. III. of JU).

g) If a hamza is prefixed to the first radical andthat radical is a hamza, then two hamzas will conie^

together, in whi^h case alif with madda is written in

jjace of both.. The III, form and the IV. forifL.will

thus be identical in the Perf. e.g. ^T(IV.) "to believe";

J^>7 (III.) "to blame".

Twenty-fourth Lesson. 131

IJjie prefixed hamza has kasra or damma. the

hamza ojme root is ciianged into the ya or waw thai:

o

lengthens the vowel e.g. o'uj[ (Verbal noun of IV.);o , i> , *.c. G *,&

J^f (Imper. I. of J^l); yU (Imper. I. of^1); jj*A^

(Perf. VIII. of "p "to quote").

h) The Verbal Noun of the II. form takes the

form xLr&f in verbs of which the last radical is hamza0, o'.. Z,^

e.g. ^jfis (Verbal noun II. off^).

3. Peculiar forms of certain special Hamzated verbs:

a) The verbs jeM "to take", j*\"to command"

and jft "to eat" drop the first radical in the Imperative

of the I. form e.g. j^> "take"; Fein. ^JsJ., Dual |jj-

etc.y> "command", J* "eat".

b) The verb S-* has in the Jussive a regular form

oLlu (written also jJL-Io) and a form J^Ia with omission

of the hamza. So in the Imperative J** (as well as

),Fern, jl, etc.

c) The verb je>! in the VIII. form assimilates

the hamza to the following ta e.g. $[; Imperf.

Indie.

4. Conjugation of verb, the first radical of whichis hamza:

vjJ! "to get accustomed to".

182 First Part.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

at \ . gj Ij ^&J U \Q-J L>

Jji Jjfe Jilff

> . - J! o --

uwb sJJo sjJIi"

vail

etc. etc. etc. etc.

Imperativeo- O. ^

lib! Part. Active ^A! t

"*

G ,-

^Lt etc. Part. Passive o^JU

- f. >->Passive Perf. u>Jl Imperf. Indie, ^^t* .* >

Jf.O , t

J**J "to hope : Imperf. Indie. J^>b Imper. J^l.

j3l"to quote": Imperf. Indie.

ySu Imper. jt

Derived Forms.

Indie.'

Noun.. ~-S. t~e> oS O_Si O IL*

II. v_^S t oaJ^J v ^ I

m. JJT JjC JjT

IV.

--- -, ^

V. v^Jlj- V_jjLAJ JJB

Twenty-fourth Lesson. 133

** S 1"P- P rt ^ N'VI. JCJ

VII. Wanting in all verbs beginning with hamza

waw, ya, ra, lam, nun.

- .> -- o , O .1) O -

VIII.

IX. Wanting.

X.

Vocabulary,

(to appear, IV.

1 to show.

JIII. to be friend-

{ ly with.

(III. to be inti-

} mate with.

to be true, safe,

IV. to believe

(in religious

sense).

( properly /^U

(plur.

angel.

I apostle.

resurrection.

religion.

Jthe day of

i judgment.

III. to travel.

o,,

^^

to take, III. to

blame, VIII. to

take for oneself.

wealth, possessions.

bread.

beggar.

to be satisfied.

|

to hope, V. to ob-

serve (with ^ of

I thing.

food.

bedouin (adjective).

(sound plur.) move-ment.

sick, ill.

to make an impres-

sion, V. to be in-

fluenced, affected.

134 First Part.

(Moslem creed.)

Twenty-fourth Lesson. 135

*L' J^J JJI1

,..} (JJUI A^Jj'J IAP

(adv. accus. "in order to")

>

O > - - o->,.

I

| u^j* vJU 5 vi

sis. > i o - * J S >ox>

136 First Part,

Exercise 46.

Have you taken the money? No, we have not

taken it, but we will take it now. Eat and drink

until thou art satisfied. Take the reward of yourwork. They both seated themselves to eat. I

think that 1 am affected by the heat. He hopes that

his father will command us to appear (that we appear).- Excuse us for our lateness. We came forward

to ask permission of the Commander of the Faithful

to come in to him, and he allowed us that. Trulythis book is. the work (editing) of the sheikh Mohammed.- Do not blame us. Eat with us. We disciplinethe lazy scholars. The discipline of the lazy scholars

is the duty of the teacher. We do not blame (withus is lack of blaming). We spoke pleasantly to him(we were friendly with him in speech). He took

(VIII.) a house.

Twenty-fifth Lesson.

1. Conjugation of verb the second radical of whichis hamza.

Si "to ask".

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj.

Si ill! (also written jllu) jLlj (J^

to

oJU oL*o oLwj

M Jui

etc. etc. etc.

Twenty-fifth Lesson. 187

Jussive.

etc. etc.

Imperative.

(also written jll or

etc. etc.

Part. Act. JJLl

- ,

Part. Pass.3j)_j (also written ^^-^ or

Passive Perf. J^l, Imperf. Indie. JLLji (also written V

Example of the form Joe: vjjj"'to be cast down

Imperf. Indie. vjIXj (also written

Imper.

Example of the form J.J6: J^ "to be brave".

Imperf. Indie.

Imper.

138 First Part.

Derived Forms.

Perf. Imperf Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

,,n. ju

IV.

v.

VI.

, G ,,o, u,o G^

, o > Gg,o,VII. OLvAJt JuLw.*^ JwLwJ!_ JUCvWwiX (jLtM^/4

^ , , ^ ,

VIII. Jjdf *-^ri ^A>Jt ,vxxJu<l lxLo

(from 1^ "to bind up a wound" as this form of

3L1 does not occur).

IX. does not occur.

Verbal Noun.

II. !Uls IV. 5Hl VI. StLJ VIII. !tixh> S I ^ ^

m. ii uJ v. 3lli- vii. StLJi x.

2. Example of verb, whose third radical is hamza:

lyi"to read".

Perf. Imperf. Iixiic. Subj. Juss.,, i--o, f.e* I, o.

y i/^ 5yM 5y^

t,o, ,&, i-o,

lytt !yu !_JG

Twenty-fifth Lesson. 139

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj; Juss.

etc. etc. etc. etc.

Imperative-0 8 -

iyslPart. Active ^Is

j.yjtetc. Part. Passive

s.yli

Pass. Perf. ^yj Imperf. Indie.lyL'

dJyi etc.

Conjugation of verbs which take kasra in the

Imperf.: UP "to be healthy", Imperf. Indie. ^^5, Impe-

rative

Conjugation of verbs of the form Joe:^^ "to sin".

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper.

etc.

etc. etc.

140 First Part.

Conjugation of verbs of the form jJis: yLi "to

be slow"

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper., o.

.i,. i.o^ku _?rv" etc.

etc. etc.

Derived Forms.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

n r *JM2

"i V-' rr>

s--.

*r.'

c:

9 - ' s- - '

S-oS to, f o 9 o, 9-0,IV.

!yil L5j*^ L5j*' L5j** ^j^*

Es_ *.*-- i-- 9~--.> is--

V.lyij

IJixjtyij ^

E- -- *-:.--

*':.:.

9

E-,o * -o- -o 9

VII. tjijl

VIII.IJXSJ

IX. Does not occur.

-0-0 & 0-0.X.

^ ^ j

Verbal Noun.

II. Jiys IV. syj VI. 3JL& VIII.

III. ?LL^ V.*

VII. sfjut X.

Twenty-fifth Lesson. 141

142 First Part.

Exercise 47

2T ill* L^

it OU j^ Li i <i)JI j

L'4? ^' b

UL

W (Less. 9, 6) J jGjJJ ljJl 3l5 Jalll xUJ

cn

(than) jj !l^ ^i U (for me) u

Exercise 48.

Read this letter. I have read it. This woman

seeks (j^ai) me that (S) i may read her letter to her.

The people appeared asking (Imperf.) concerning mycondition. Ask me for what you want (ask me thy

need). I ask you to (that you) pardon my guilt.

Twenty-sixth Lesson. 143

Have you filled this cask with apples? We havefilled it. -- Fill it immediately.

--girl, read this

book. They began to read (that they read). I knowthe beginning (Verbal Noun) of this book. I haveannounced to them the arrival of the Emir. Comeforward that I may reward thee. We bring thee

congratulation (Verbal Noun). We are beginners

(Part.) in the Arabic language. The Sultan set upa school.

Twent-sixth Lesson.

Weak Verbs,

1. The Weak verbs (Jojw Jons), in which one of

the radicals is a waw or a ya are divided into three

classes,:"~*r

'

O - -6 o

A. Assimilated verbs^ (o&o joe) whose first radical

is waw or ya.) , c, f} o

B. Hollow verbs (vJy>i Joe) whose second radical

is waw_or ya.

C. Defective verbs djoSij Jots) whose third radical

is_waw or ya^

A. Assimilated Verbs.

I. Verbs whose first radical is 3 .

2. Verbs whose first radical is waw have the

following peculiarities":

a) Those that take kasra injhe Imperf. lose their

in the Imperf. and Imper. e.g. from j^5"to arrive"

Imperf. J^aj Imper. J^o. Many also that take fatha

in the Imperf. have the same peculiarity e.g.

144 First Part.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper.

<txsj"to place, put". *j jto

^, "to be wide" .*j *

gl "'to fall". L ^

v^.5 "^ sive"- v4^ v^

Most verbs of the form Joe take kasra in the

Imperf. (contrary to the rule in Less. 13, 3) e.g.

/ . "to trust", Imperf. /u Imper. /sS

o ^"to inherit"

cy^j ,, ey.

'^\"to be swollen" ^ j^

The verbs which take damma or fatha in jhe

Imperf. and preserve their^ arg__rare^ e.g. :

jo*.^"to be

afraid", Imperf. Indie.j4"-_*J, Imper. jJ?.l (for J^>-3 (

see below).

Those which are also Doubled verbs retain their,

^inthe Imperf. e.g. ^ "to love", Imperf. Indie. o_^j.

Note. In the Imperf. of the Passive the.,

is retained,

even when it is lost in the Active e.g.: *X>j "to find", Imperf.

Indie. Act. X^r., Pass. ^X>-^j.

b) If the \vaw is vowelless and preceded by a.

kasra it is changed into a ya e.g. j4=T.I (for Jo^j[) Imper.

from jc>-31so from jo> the Verbal Noun IV. is

(for

Twenty-sixth Lesson. 145

Vowelless waw preceded by damma becomes u e.g.

(for Jc>-jj) cf. Less. 27.

c) In the VIII. form the waw is assimilated to

the followiDgrj^ e.g.

J*oj "to join" VIII. JyaSJ, Imperf. Indie.

II. Verbs whose first radical is^c.

3. These Verbs retain their ya in the Imperfect e.g.

_**j "to be easy'.', Imperf. Indie. ~-o.

(j*Ju"to despair", ,, ,, ^Uj (see Less. 25).

If the ya is vowelless and follows damma, it is

changed into a waw e.g. JOJL "to be awake", Imperf.

Indie. IV. J%j (for -a&u).

In the VIII. form the ya is assimilated to the

following td e.g. J^j VIII. u%4. Conjugation of the verb whose first radical is .

jyo3 "to arrive, join".

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

etc. etc. etc. etc.

Arabic Grammar. 10

146 first Part.

ImperativeO

Part, Act.

G

Juo etc. Part. Pass.

O o - G ..> 0.

Verbal Noun J 3 or Jyaj or iXo

Pass. Perf. j^ Imperf. Indie.

An example of those verbs, which retain their 3

in the Imperfect is J^>.. "to be afraid", Imperf. Indie.

Imper. J^rj.

Derived Forms.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.,- > - ~> o,, - > G s - >

II. *o

III.jy^fj

--o-IV.

V.

VI.

VII.

VIII. jsx:

^IX. Does not occur.

* ., O , > 0,0- O 0,0 G 0,OJ 0,0, O >

X.J^O^A**<| ^V^fl^iUMj .J-O^XAW? JwO_jJC**v9 J*9^C*w

Verbal Nouu.

II.juyoji' IV. 3LL| VI. J^tji' VIII. 3^

IH. Jll^ or iUux" V. 3-^3 VK. Sliyj X.

Twenty-sixth Lesson. 147

5. Conjugation of the verbs, whose first radical is ^ ;

J^J "to be dry".

Perf. Irnperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

etc. etc. etc. etc.

Imperative .

Part. Act.

etc. Part. Pass.

Verbal Noun U *AJ

Pass. Perf. ,jj Imperf. Indie.

Derived Forms.

Perf. Iinperf. Indie. Iniper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

III.

- -oS > > o oS O

V.

9- ,,j

VI.

148 First Part.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

vii.

IX. Does not occur.

H.

Verbal Noun.

i7

IV. ,^Uil VI. J VIII.

v. vn.

Vocabulary.

&

II. to complete.

to- stay, remain,stand still, IV. to

refrain from (with

^), I. to learn,

ascertain (with

eat, throne.

to lay down, to

let, allow (onlyin Imperf. and

Imper.).

time-

jVIII. to be dis-

j turbed, excited.

>*** hearing.

IV. to conduct,

bring.

to be necessary,incumbent (with

anger,

body.

Exercise 49.

fi

4521

150 First Pare.

^^i1

1^3? (j|3ffi (in regard to . . .

.) ul

U(j-j*

b bo u *,*>r

L3& ;i ^ (j^is; k. ^ ~ v

Jj

Twenty-seventh Lesson. 151

Exercise 50.

You have sought us and not found us. Hastthou laid these books down on the seat? I havenot yet laid them down, but I will lay them down

shortly. Lay them down immediately.- Let

us stay with you. If God will, you will arrive at

(it) Cairo in (the) comfort. We have already arrived

long ago (since a time). Ho fled from the bear, hefell into the cistern. girl, do not fall. friends,

lead us to the sheikh of the tribe. This dwellingwill be very suitable for us. Stand still and do not

move. The entrance to (jUc) the Sultan was made

possible for us. It is our duty to bring you to the

prince (the bringing you to). Many .marvels are found

in Egypt. I shall describe it to thee in this letter.

Your letter has not reached(j,! oj us. We have

fallen into great distress. God will help (^^* II)

your affairs, for He fety is the Helper (Part.). Wehave agreed that you shall stay with us for a long time

(sjji Accus.).

Twenty-seventh Lesson.

B. Hollow Verbs.

1. Hollow Verbs i.e. those, whose second radical

is j or ^"observe the following rules!

152 First Part.

A. If the or ^ is vowelless and the third radical

ia ajsojvowelless,then the 3 or ^js dropped to prevent

the meeting of two vowgTesTIettirs. (Intro. 13, 3) e.g.

From Ji (for ^) the Jussive should be(.yb (see

below, B, 1), but as the 3 andr

are vowelless, the 3

is dropped and it becomes ,Jb; so Imper. ^3.

From eC (for 'o) the Jussive is *.J, the Imper. j.

From sJJ> (for J^) the Jussive is s^k1

., the

Imper. ^>.

If the third radical, by conjugation, receives a

voweJ, no elision takes place e.g. 2ud Sing. Fein. Juss.

.Ji^iS, Plur. Masc. Imper. \jAj*.

So also the alif, when it takes the place .of ^ or

^, is dropped, whenever the third radical is vowelless

by conjugation e.g.

From IV.jjsf (for j^Sl)

is formed 2nd Sing. Masc.

ie*ti.

B. If the 3 or ^5 is vowelled, the following rules

are observeHl

1} If the first radical is voweliess, then the vowel,of the ,~or

L 9 is given to It. the^or t g thus becomingvowelless; aw is then changed to~ a &u<Tiw to f, e.g.:

Fromj.15

(= fja]is formed Iraperf. Indie ^su

(for ^jil).

From^f (= >clj), Imperf. Indie. ^MJ (for *H).

From ck> (= v_3^i-), Imperf. Indie. vJL?. (for

?. for

Twenty-seventh Lesson. 153

So also fromjLlS (= ^s)

are formed Perf. IV. J&

for 1^1 forpjsf); Imperf. Indie. IV. '^ (for ^Jib

for

^b); Part. Act. IV. ^JU (for ^aJ for^U);

Part. Pass.

IV. ^Uu (for ^ for~

rjju).

2) If the first radical is vowelled.

a) Then if the third radical is also vowelled,

a) (twa, am, awu, aya, ayi, ayu become a, e.g. 3 r<1

Sing.

Perf. I. ^ becomes j, ^^> becomes \Jte>,^ becomes

X 3^i> becomes JLb, J**P becomes (jJs>. VII. Form

Perf. 4y*J! becomes 3lJu! and Imperf. Indie, oyi^j becomes

^lilj. P) wwi, wy* become z, e.g. Pass. Perf. I. &j

becomes J^3, .&o becomes^.oo.

Note. The rules a) and(3) apply also to the VIII. form

e.g. Perf. VIII. ^ys^ becomes lj^|, Imperf. ~j*&:. becomes

-&*?. Perf.-*g^\

becomesjLx*|.

b) If the third radical is vowclless, elision takes

place and

a) awa becomes u, awl, aya, ayi becomef, e.g.

1 stSing. Perf. ^^ becomes &**, v^o>> becomes

to,, >(, jo, it,

o-e becomes co o' becomes v

p) uwi and uyi becomej; e.g. 1stSing. Perf. Pass. I.

tl becomes vils OAAO becomes

2. I^e_Verbal Nouns of IV. and X. drop the

and add fa after the third radical; e.g.

Fromj.15?

the Verbal Noun isKxls'^j

from

it is

154 First Part.

3. In the Participle Active of the I. form the<TT G""^

and the^_are changed into hamza; e.g. ^Ss (for r is),

!?J, (for

4. In the Participle Passive of the I. form of verbs

whose Second radical is^ one of the two waws is

propped and damnta is written over the one left;

TT~~-

e j., G~

e.g. from ^15 the Part. Pass. I. is ^AA (for ^JA*).

In the Pass. Part, of verbs whose second radical^is ^ the ^ isdropped and kasra is written under thg

first radical; e.g. from cL (= ^u)the Pass. Part. I. is

G + * G'

><> ~

Note 1. A few verbs whose middle radical is ^ or ^5 of

the form Joo preserve the ^ or ^9 and are conjugated as Sound

verbs; e.g

jz. "to be one-eyed", Irnperf. Indie, ^au etc.

Hollow verbs, which denote Colours or Defects, always retain

the 3 or ^ in thg IX. form; e.g.

J "to be or become black" Imperf. Indie.

* -o

"to be or become white"

The 5 is often retained in the X. form; e.g.

> o - o -

Imperf. Indie,

Note 2. Hollow verbs, which have 3 or ^ as third radical

always retain their ^ e.g.

^5_jj* ''to be worth", Imperf. Indie. (j_?+->.

Note 3. Those Hollow verbs which have ta or nun asthird radical assimilate it with a following ta or nun', e.g.

- - i, > > o >

From OU the I8* Sing. Perf. I. is c^v (for

From o the l*t Plur. Perf. I. is UT (for U

Twenty-seventh Lesson. 155

Conjugation ofj.15

(= j.^5)"to stand":

Perfect.

Sing. jteDual Uli Plural

I_^l5

0-- .. - ^0>Uxls

( ..*S

Imperfect.

Indie. Subj. Juss.

q. Q ,

'.'.-

-.'.- "i-

oin^r. o. m. <%ftj <JLi ^.QJ

3f * ' *."^ ...'

*

i*-'^ t*^^ J

i j>* + } * (i > *

n f' '

,, ^5. I. t^y_jA>

Dual 3. m. 'Jijl

3. f.

g

" 2 - g

Plur. 3. in. ;,

3. f.

156 First Part.

Indie. Subj. Juss.

Plur. 2. in. Oj*j&

2. f. ^1. r>

:

Imperative

S. 2. m.^3

2. f. ^5 Part. Act.^15

D. 2. Uj5 Part. Pass,rjiU

PI. 2. m. |_^5

2- ^ o^Passive.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

UB,lu

JG

> , - > e> , ^

,

JLj,.ftJ

AJlj

etc. etc. etc. etc.

Derived Forms.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part Act. Part. Pass

III. $.-

IV.rl5i

Twenty-seventh Lesson. 157

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

-a-- **--, os-- O , OS--;V. *Jij

VI.

VII.

VIII.

IX. ^%-*4 ^j~~* 3vj>^*t o^**ws wanting.

--,& > .0- 0-0 'J -0> 6 - . O

X. LAJUkw! ,jjiX^*)U AJt/Lwt ^iX&X^-./O _...

Verbal Noun.

II. ,s V. !j VIII.

III. K^'JU VI.^183

IX.

IV. VJ5[ VII.^LxiJi

X.

5. Conjugation of the form J*s.

JU> (for s_^)"to fear"

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

old?. oli:

o'ws:1

'

- . s

ol1

etc. etc. etc.

158 First Part.

Imperative6

Part. Act.

etc. Part. Pass.

Passive.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

etc. etc. etc.

etc.

Conjugation of the form J***:

51b (for Jb) "to be long".

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss. Imper.

vl^Jlb etc. e*c - et. ete. etc.

6. Conjugation of verb, whose middle radical isc

JLO (for 'jLa)"to become"

Perfect.

Sing. 3. m. Ju> Dual|Jli

Plural!^U>

3. f. 0jU 6^li Q^>^ O ^ O o J r,

2. m. o

2. f.

,, 1.OjA9

Twenty-seventh Lesson. 159

Imperfect.

Indie. Subj. Juss.

Siug. 3. m.

3. f.

2. m.

,12. f.

I-

Dual 3. m.

3, f.

2.g^ 1^ t^

Plur. 3. rr

3. f.

o tv.

. 2. f.

1-

Imperative

Part. Act.

Part. Pass.

160 First Part.

Passive.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

etc. etc. etc. etc.

Derived Forms.

Perf. Iraperf. Indie. Irqper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

IV.}

v -*-i *-:.- *-:.-"

V. wkXU ^ClAJ ^A=L>

VI.

VII. ji^[

vin. JiLit

(see Less. 21, 4 a)

S -0 i ,0, O ,0 8-0,IX. ijaot \J**! u13^1

-?' u13*^* wanting.

Verbal Noun.

II. UJ V. !IJJ VIII. ^'III. 1^ VI. *JuL: IX.

IV. gtUI VII. *l^Jj X. gjLkll^ * J " t S

Twenty-seventh Lesson.

Conjugation of the form Joe;

ujU> (for vJyjS1

)"to fear".

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

161

Imper.

etc.

162 First Part.

164 First Part.

- -f (, e) to be absent, o -

>ji {

V1J7 'i >oo eggs (collective).

I go away.

pli (5=

^1) to sleep. *_^ government.

protection. .^Lb (^5)to fly.

Exercise 51.

^ eg - oS o - - o ,

c^o! ^j! Q,., oJi cr

M" (Optative) jlif lllu U

sX5 |Jo5

(Intro. 9) ioJT

yaxi

Twenty-seventh Lesson. 165

"as regards" . ..,) Cs 54-/! (Less. 21, 5,-b) oloL' S&S\

i[ pjJ&T ^llj^ ZJ (see Less. 42, 2, f

jNjlo! L fSA> ^ (Proverb) ^J,\J> x

(what .... of insult= what insult) KJ

,*

s l jjJ!3'

C^jlij

j'S .

("which the lions fear", see Less. 31,4) WL^J

jdLi !^> ^ (Less. 21, 5, a)

166 First Part.

oojf

"as regards"...) i ^Ja uLOOLsl (Optative) Ji-ou

j*j*k (

see Less ' 42) 2)

--U ^ -

S o^ j v_ (Proverb) &| BoU

\ 'S (Less. 34, 6)

,

*^ * f + - s *E *-> -.^ c^ * ^ ^

Titf.hr SOlSt 'tii'Jol dULLP NxSb BJu33

Exercise 52.

Rise O girl, and let us sit. -> We wish to stayin this city half a year. A great misfortune hascome upon us. You were afflicted by (\J) a great

misfortune. O woman, go away and do not return.

What have you said? We said, this is not fitting.Do not say this. Dost thou wish O girl, that I

Twenty-eighth Lesson. 167

say to thee the truth? It was said, the king haddied. He did not die and will live long. Trulywe yearn to see you (to your seeing). I wished to

visit you, but was not able to (that). Go my son,in the protection of God. The merchant, who lives

(Part, ofpli?)

in Cairo will visit us. We wish that

God may lengthen your life. He fancied in (the)

sleep that he was flying. We flew from joy. Eatand drink and rest. They handed us the coffee andafter the handing of the coffee we rested. He wished

to sell these eggs, but he was not able. You havemade us giddy with your speech. Did you spendthe night in Damascus? No, we did not spend the

night in that city,

'

The government appointed him

governor. Trust in God and fear not. The coward

(fearing) does not attain the reward. Repeat your

question. I have already repeated it. He will

approve our opinion. This stuff (jiUS) will not last.

(The) obedience (Verbal Noun of "obey") is our duty.

Twenty-eighth Lesson

C. Defective Verbs.

1. The Defective verbs, which have ^ or ^ as third

radical are conjugated according to the following rules :

A. If the ^ or l5 is vowelless:

1_. It is dropped, when nothing is added at the

end, as in the Jussive and Imper. e.g.

From U3 (= _^>) "to call": Imperf. Indie,

Juss. xj, Imper. >!.

168 *'irst Part.

From -xj (= ^;) "to throw": Imperf. Indie.

Juss. ^Imper.p!.From "j& "to meet": Imperf. Indie.

^^fiJLi.Juss.

, Imper. ^K.So also in the II. form (and other Derived forms):

forms Imperf. Indie. L vXj, Juss. cjo, Imper. cj>.

The elision takes place even when the Personal

Pronoun is added as &xOl "call him".

2. If there is an addition at the end:

a) aw becomes au; ay becomes ai e.g. 2nd Sing.

Masc. Perf. I. of Uo is o^*x>; of ^, is ^^A} .

b) iw and iy become r, uiv becomes v\ e.g. 2ud Sing.

Masc. Perf. I. of ^>j is\&*+Oj\

of ^ is ulyJif; of

3y*<"to be noble" is o.,^.B. When the 3 or ^5 i8_vowelled:

1. If the second radical is vowelless. the_ 3,or ^

S o,

e.g, Verbal Noun (of the form Joe) ofi^~

raid"

: 3^5 of L^J : J*>^If the second radical is vowelled, and

a) there is no addition at the end:

a) awa and aya become a, this a being written

^ alif when it is derived from atpq," with ya whenIPs derived Jrom__a?/: e.g 3ra

iSing.^Masc..Perf. 1. of

is 1*3, of^ is ^J.

fyjiwa become^ iya, iya remains; e g. ^^ becomes

Pass. Perf. I. > becomes > remains

unchanged. So in Imperf. Subj. I. '^^ remains

unchanged.-

Twenty-eighth Lesson. 169

* > .* - ) O x

*t] uwa remains; e.g. 5J*, Imperf. Subj. _^x.j, (uyadoes not occur).

8) mow becomes u\ e.g. Imperf. Ihdic. I. _^Xj

becomes _j&xi, (uyu does not occur).

s] iyitbecomes g; e.g. Imperf. Indie. I. ^^ becomes

^yy', (iwu does not occur).

C) awu and ayw become a (always written withJ-'O-' * O .* >.,&.*

\5); e -g- Imperf. Indie. I. ^o^ becomes ^fo^\ ^j. (from

^^ "to pasture") becomes ^^The same changes take place in the Derived forms,

wbereTIowever c 9 alwajsjakes the place of ^ (see below

rule 3); e.g. III. ^to becomes(J=|3; Imperf. Indie.

becomes lJu etc.

b)There is an addition at the end:

a) The,

andt <- are retained when immediately

followed by an alif (in the Dual); e.g.;

3^ Dual, Perf. I. |J^ 1^, L^, UJ.

3^ Imperf.

2nd Imper. I^o! etc.

In these cases however iwa becomes iya\ e.g. \^o)

becomesLytoJ;

Pass. Perf. \^> becomes Leo.

P) If M or f follows (as in Plur. Masc.;2nd Sing.

Fein. Imperf. and Imper.) .the following changes take

placej_

a,wfi and aya become au. and so aivuna and ayana

become auna: e.g. 3rd Plur. Masc. Perf. I. l^^to becomes

t^co; 3rd Plur. Masc. Imperf. I. \^o^ becomes j^a, and

becomes '; lsL' becomes L.

170 First Part.

MC#, iyn and urni become u and so twang and

iyana become ana; e.g. 3rd Plur. Masc. I. 1^J becomes

\jjtoj-, j^jj becomes \j&\ J3j^ becomes l^l; 3rd Plur.

Masc. Imperf. Oj**j4becomes o^jj.

tiwl and ay? become i ; e.g. 2nd Sing. Fern. Imperf. I.

j~O~~^~

~+ Q * > O ^

^j^kxj'becomes

^A^vXj';Juss. jjj^cJG becomes

^. o - - o*

and Q-^-J becomes ^.yy.

oy? becomes oi; e.g. 2nd Sing. Fern. Imperf. I.

becomes,jliij; Imper. Sing. Fein.

L^kJ!becomes

^aJt.

7) When the o of the 3rd Sing. Fern. Perf. is added,

the awa and aya are first changed to a and then, to

prevent the meeting of two vowelless letters (see Intro.

13, 3), ^the alif is dropped; e.g. o_j*o becomes oUo

then u>^cO; ^yJ becomes oUj then u>^.

The^ Fem. of the Dual is (irregularly) formed by

analogy from the Sing.: 'u^J, Jo.

The following forms are regular i-^J-^j (since iwa

changes into iya], Dual

Note. The ^5 as sign of ti at the end of a word is changed

into \ whenever a suffix ia added ; e.g. ^U^"he threw him", (see

Intro. 6, Note 3).

2. In the Active Participle iwun and iyun are

6 G

changed into in\ e.g. _^c!o becomes c!o; ,c*5.becomes

These forms are declined like (jaii in Less. -6, 3.

Singular.

Nom. Gen.pto;

with the Article ^tSJ! (iww and

become z.

Twenty-eighth Lesson. 171

Accus. Uck>; with the Article <^lJj? (iya remains).

Dual.

Nom.^licto;

Gen. Accus.^-JXA^O.

Plural.

Nom. yj&te (uwfi and iyn become),

Gen. Accus.

i^xcfo (iwt and iyi becomei).

In the Part. Pass, of verbs whose third radical is

* the two waws are contracted into one written witEs , o , sTTT

tasMtd; e.g. ^jo becomes

In the verbs whose third radical is ^5, the ^ofthe form is changed to

, f and this is assimilated to

~*^T. TT3theof the root; e.g. j^yyj becomes

3. The verbs whose third radical is 9 are treated

in the Derived forms as if their third radical were ( g ;

e.g. from Leo: II.,^=0,

III. ^lo, IV. ^i etc.

4. a) The Verbal Noun of the II. form is of theG- o, T

" " '

pattern iUxaj (as in the case of the verbs whose third

O- o - a,radical is hanusa. See Less. 24, 2, h); e.g. i\.^-o from ^.

b)In the Verbal Noun of the III, form the ya is

changed into alif; e.g. slsSU from J,^ "to meet".

cLIn the Verbal Nouns of of the IV VII.. .

and xTlbrms, where the third radical follows an cdif,

the. ya is changed into a hatnza (without bearer); e.g.

IV. from t^to throw": 9liiJ!.

*. -

VII. from.y^Ail

"to come to an end" :

VIII. from tjj&l "to buy": sljx&j.^ " O

ucJ "to ask forgiveness, abdicate" :

172 First Part.

d) In the Verbal Noun of the V. and_VL forms

uyun becomes in,' uyu becomes f; e.g. '^Sw becomes

/&; Jib' becomes xtlS; with the Article{jk\ and ipbat,

5. In the Participles of the Derived forms ii/un

becomes in; iyu becomes i; ayun becomes an (writtenwith (t;); ayu becomes a (also written with'\c); e.g.

becomesJfJU,

with the Article ^SU I ;Part. Pass II.

becomes'.^Lo,

with the Article^ySil!

etc.

Conjugation of the Defective Verbs.

a) Conjugation of the verbs whose third radical is * ;

a) Of the form J^s;

Uo "to call".

Perfect.

Dual

3. masc.\

3. fem. L;

Singular

3. masc.

3. fern.

2. masc.

2. fem.

Sing. 3. masc.

3. fem.

,, 2. masc.

2. fem.

1.

Plural

3. masc.

3. fem.

2. masc.

2. fem.

1.

Imperfect.

Indie. Subj. Juss.

Twenty-eighth Leeson. 173

Indie. Subj. Juss.

t^eJG*

Dual 3. masc.

3. fem.

2.

Plur. 3. masc.

3. fem.

2. masc.

2. fem.

Siog. maec. e

^ .

fem.^o!

fern.

Part. Active.

Sing. nom. masc. cfj (with Art. ^ijJi) fem. iixc

accus.

Imperative.*>o1>

Dual lcoi Plur. masc.

gen.jp|.

Dual. nom. masc. J

gen. accus.

Plur. notn.

gen. accus. ^

Part. Pass.

fem.

174 First Part.

Passive Perfect,

Sing. 3. masc. ^o Dual U&j Plur.

3. fern.

2. masc.

2. fern.

Pass. Imperf. Tndic. Siibj. Juss.

Sing. 3. masc.

3. fern.

.2. masc.

2. fern.

Dual 3. masc.

3. fern.^UcjsJ ^J^'

2.

Plur. 3. masc.

,, 3. fern.

,, 2. masc.

2. fern.

1.

Twenty-eighth Lesson. 175

p) Of the form Jjti:

^o}"'to be pleased".

Perfect.

Sing. 3. masc.^i>*

Dual L^ Plur. 1^,

3. fern.

2. masc.

2. fern.

I-_..^

Imperf. Tndic. Subj. Juss.

Sing. 3. masc.

3. fern.

2. masc.

2. fern.

Dual 3. masc.

3. fern.

2.

Plur. 3. masc.

3. fern.

2. masc.

2. fern.

1.

176 Inrst Part.

Imperative.

Sing, raasc.\jo^

Dual L*>J Plur. masc.

fern. J^t fern.

Part. Act. tl Part. Pass,

Pass. Perf.'^o} (s. ^o) Imperf. Indie.

Verbs of the form Jo*i (as SjM "to be noble") are rare,

b) Conjugation of verbs whose third radical is ^:

a) Of the form jjli;

^J*}"to throw".

Perfect.

Sing. 3. masc. ^*J Dual U** Plur. \^

3. fern. vi^ Lx^ ^AJ

2. masc.

2. fern.

1.

Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

Sing. 3. masc.

3. fern.

2. masc.

2. fern.

1.

Twenty-eighth Lesson. 1

Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.

Dual 3. masc.

3. fern.

,,2.

Plur. 3. masc.

3. fern.

2. masc.

2. fern.

" * c*V

Imperative.

Sing. masc.^t

Dualll^t

Plur. masc.

fern.

Verbal Noun

Part. Act.

Pass. Perf.

etc.

r

fern,

Part. Pass. ^^

Imperf. Indie. ^^

etc. ==

,3)Of the form >S:

_1 "to meet" is conjugated likeJ4

Arabic Gretnmar.

173 First Part.

c) Conjugation of the Derived forms of all Defective

verbs.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

II. JU

in. &i

IV. JtV. J&

vi. J.ii

VII. J&[

VIII.LjiS

IX. Wanting.

Verbal Noun.

Twenty-eighth Lesson. 179

j>

G.,..

r^

V. to breakfast.

I

to stretch, V. to

stretch oneself,I rest.

V. to take supper,

(plur. L-);

wixt5) herbs.

1

1. and VIII. to bewatered (suffici-

l ently).

rain.

G=^Uj.

time.

winter.

to remain.

rest, remainder.

G ,,

f (pi. Ojxis) section,

1 season.

to pasture, feed on.

11. and III. to meet,IV. to throw, VI.

j

and VIII. to meet'

one another.

I IV. to give (withtwo accus.), VI. to

I give one another.

sheep (collective).

j: butter.

'" (dried dates (collec-*1 tive).

tobacco.

to go away, Part.

Act. past, last.

to call, to pray for,

wish (with J of

person ,of

thing) VIII. (seeLess. 21, 5, b) to

claim, X. to

summon.G - O -

^jL. (plur. *lf) seller.

'PJ&-VIII. to honour.

iio to approach.

,=-

((literally "to let

***"\ live") to greet.

1x5* to bend.

- o *

iXw to complain of

-ASS brevity.

|to be sufficient for,

jIII. to reward.

collecting.

180 First Part.

Twenty-eighth Lesson. 181

Exercise 53.

3J3T UL S&. tsi^J i ijJ C cJ i-Su

j> (Proverb) jti' (for o

* * - --o-o - o

Jall'd*

1X^(5 isJo ^M ^i

jLo^. l. b3 Ub (Less. 34, 6)

olf Ljf (Less. 44, 5) JU

&J (Less. 31, 4) *XCJOL*O

182 First Part.

=>(as pledge) \JjS

LM i.

Lie T (Optative: "May God pardon", Less. 30, 6)

i J Is iJT toJ>

^-00,0 a ---.

*5j 1*1*^ (joo iJJJT t>3^ (Proverb)

(Less. 34, 7)

jfuJoo

U J? ,U xJiilJL il

i|

j U (Proverb)

; jl; ^' u -

Twenty-eighth Lesson. 188

b jjT\ it Q vi^fti (Proverb)

(Koran, Sura 1.) .^-JiiLIf.LuJ?

Iwij, .(Jfi^ ^A

Exercise 54.

When was this house built? It was built

(Part, Pass.) in the lime( ) of the last Sultan.

Why did you weep girls? We beg your pardon(we hope from you the excuse). I have read yourletter. Do not forget what I have said to thee Oboy! I have not forgotten it O my master. Goslowly (with w slowness). When will the time of

our meeting be? We shall give you what we ought(is necessary for us). You have not given us our

due (right). Remain with us. I heard a crier

(Part. Act. III. of |jo) crying (he cries) in the market

with a loud voice. The girl wept bitterly (a bitter

weeping). We fell fainting. What you wanteddid not happen. What you have said is sufficient

for me. Whither art thou going? Wast thoucontent with what I said to thee? I met a dog in

the street. What (how) is this called in Arabic?I went from the house to meet them (to their meeting).

Do not be anxious about this man. Spare me(make me remain II). -*- Hast thou watered the horses?

We have already breakfasted and, if God will, weshall shortly take supper. Truly, the merchants buyand sell in the market. Buy what is necessary for

us. If God will, we shall meet in the current

(flowing) month.

J84 First Part.

Twenty-ninth Lesson.

Doubly weak Verb,

1. The most usual of the doubly weak verbs are/

of the following three classes:

A. Those in which one radical is hamza, while

another is a weak letter.

B. Those in which two radicals are weak letters.

C._ Those m which all three radicals are hamzasor weak letters!

Hi

2. Verbs in which one radical is hamza andanother a weak letter.

I) Those in which the first radical is hamza, the

second s or<jr; e.g.: vjt "to return".

Perf. Imperf. Indio. .Tuss.

. ^ > ><>* >.. o t,

oi oj^j (also written ^j) v^o -^ > i-. t-

oj !

. , ,

^o I etc. ^jj etc. o_p-

etc.

Imper.c i, 9v_j5 Part. Active .^ !

jjjt Pass. Perf. Ju[.

So too the rarer verbs:

vJ! (for ^i3 !)"to injure".

jT (for vi,!) "to come, return".

31 (for jo!) "to be strong". II. jJ? "to strengthen".

2) Those in which the first radical is hamza, the

third_j

or ^; e.g. j^l"to come".

Twenty-ninth Lesson. 185

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Subj. Juss.,E 1. .^ I.

& M M 0'* .

etc.,'$s

etc.j|j

etc. oil' etc.

|c>j? (from oJ5) also shortened oImper. <

Part. Active o! (with Article j^fl)

Pass. Perf. Ji Imperf. Indie, ^j.

Of this verb the IV. form is jl "to bring"; Imperf.

Indie, ^^j; Juss. o^j; Imper. ol; Pass. Perf.j^J.

So alsojil

"to refuse"; Imperf. Indie,jj'j.

lot" "to pay"; II. ^ot (with same meaning); Verbal

Noun l\oli'.

3) Those in which the second radical is hamza,

the iirst or ^\ e.g. ,j^ "to despair"; Imperf. Indie.

LXJi; Imper. UWM_ etc.

4) Those in 'which the second radical is hamza,

the third ^ or L$ ; e.g. ^f, "to see". (Note that the

hamza is dropped in the Imperf. and Imper. and in

the IV. form).Perfect.

Sing. 3. masc. ^ Dual C^Plur.

\J\}

,, 3. fern. o^ ,,[, Qj'l,

,,2. masc.

. 2. fern.

1.

186 First Part.

Imperfect Indie. Subj. Juss.

Sing. 3. masc. ^^ ^^ ^

3. fem. ^jj ^^ ^

2. masc. ^y ^:i '^

2. fem.

Dual 3. maec.

3. fem.

?

Plur. 3. masc.

3. fem.

2. masc.

2. fem.

Imperative.

Sing. jDual

bjPlur.

o -

Verbal Noun^J\j

Part. Activestj (with Article

J^\~/\]

Part. Pass. ^Pass. Perf. ^ Imperf. Indie.

Twenty-ninth Leeson. 187

When united with a suffix the forms used are

TJ"he saw him"; Ipt^J

"he sees her" etc.

Of the Derived forms the following occur:

III.jj;*^

"to dissemble"; Imperf. Indie. ^\^.\O , >

Verbal Noun B!y>

orsL^,.

IV. t^l "to show'; Imperf. Indie.<^jj;

Juss.jj;

O .

Imper. ^; Verbal Noun 21,1 orsel^t.

VI. ^*t-j "to look at one another".

VIII. J^[ "to think".

b) Those in which the third radical is hamza. thee. & - -

first_j

or ^; e.g. _bj "to tread"; Imperf. Indie. Lkj etc.

6) Those in which the third radical is hamza, the

second 3 or ^5, e.g. sL- (for 1^1) "to be bad".

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss.

etc. etc. etc.

Imper.

* Verbal Noun 9

Part. Active *L, (with Article

Pass. Perf. Imperf. Indie.

Of the Derived forms is IV. sL? "to make bad";

Imperf. Indie.^**j; Imper. ^1; Verbal Noun 8LJ;

Part. Act.

188 First Part.

So from -eUj (for to)

"to shine, be bright"; IV.

"to light".

Conjugation of ^ (for L>) "to come".

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss.

sL i -&. (also written

,Jj^>. etc. -^' etc. ^ etc.~,

^',

^'-

Imper.

^>.Verbal Noun '^^^

'?5

^*> etc. Part. Active SL> (with Article^L^l)

Pass. Perf.-,^.

C * * C5-

So from ?U? (for L*tf)II. form LP "to prepare";

O, o-

Verbal Noun NAAJ.

Conjugation of zLfc (for sy#)"to wish".

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss.a * .

02 Li

- o . , f . -

o^l etc. iUxj' etc. UbJ etc.

Imper. Li Verbal Noun^yfc

and '*J++A

Pass. Perf.i(yi Part. Act. ^ (with Article

^tl/t).

B.

3. Verbs in which two radicals are weak letters.

1) Those in which the first and third radicals

are weak letters. These follow the rules that governthe conjugation of the Assimilated and the Defective

verbs; e.g.

Twenty-ninth Lesson. 189

Perf. & "to guard"; Imperf. Indie.iJ

Jij; Juss. ^.Irnper. Masc. Sing, s; Fern. Sing. $; Plur.

!y>.

Part. Act.^tl

(with Article $$]).

VIII. form'Jz^

"to fear (God)".

Perf. j "to be complete, fulfil (a promise)".

IV. form ^j! "to fulfil a vow"; Imperf. Indie, ^^j;

Imper. vj^tj Verbal Noun slLl.

Perf. '^ "to be near"; Iraperf. Indie, jjj; Juss. Ju;

Imper. j.

"2)Those in which the second and third radicals

are weak letters. These retain the second radical (see

Less. 27, '4, Note 2); e.g. ^j "to narrate".

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss. Imper.

- etc.

etc. etc. etc.

Part. Active ^ (^1^1) Part. Pass.

Pass. Perf. ^^ Imperf. Indie.

ij:.."to be well watered" (of cattle, land, etc.).

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss. Imper.

etc. etc.

etc. etc.

190 first Part.

In the same way are conjugated ^5^, "to be worth":

[f^i "to be strong'1

Conjugation of ^p. also written^_=> (for

to live".

Perf. Imperf. Indie

II. form u>- "to let live, greet"; Verbal Noun

contracted iU^'.

X. form llsr^t "to spare alive"; in the sense "to

be ashamed" generally written with one^: Perf. -^uJ;

Imperf. Indie. ^?Uo.C.

4. Verbs in which all three radicals are weak letters.

The only verb of this class, which is in common

use is ^i "to seek refuge"; Imperf. Indie, ^jj; Juss.

_Jj; Imper. _^jS;Part. Act. ^i (with Article ^c.bH). II. form

Sc '* ^~-

^.\ "to show hospitality to'"; IV. form ^ | (witli same

meaning).Vocabulary.

school.

i to swear, X. to

|make to swear

I (by v)-

or v_> s\.>- (literallv

r. o^ij> or"to come with"),to bring (with

^^] ^J|^) need, affair.

accus. of person).

Twenty-ninth Leeson. 191

U- E'U& .J

,..!

192 First Part.

Lij J U, O b' i .(Less. 47, 8) U ^j

Exercise 56.

Have you seen us come (we come)? We did

not see you come. I wished to see him, but herefused to see me. You have come to us at a most

seasonable time (the most blesseduS^ji

of times).

In the coining week I will show you the goods I have

(what is with me of goods). We shall bring youwhat you wish. After the greeting we inform you

that we have come to Q>\) Constantinople.- The

physician promised me that he would see me every

day. The master saw that I was ashamed (saw meI was ashamed). Show me the books thou hast

(what is with thee of books).

Thirtieth Lesson. 193

Thirtieth Lesson.

Quadriiiteral Verbs.3 ~> O o

1. The Quadriiiteral verb is of the form Jd*s e.g.

"to translate".

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Juss. Imper.

etc.

etc. etc. etc.

5 o * >

Part. Active *>J^ Part. Pass.

Verbal Noun

Pass. Perf. ^>^' Imperf. Indie. ^Derived Forms.

a) JJLxL', e.g. from ^LL~"to appoint Sultan"

'to become Sultan".

Imperf. Indie. ^LjUJo Imper.

Part. Active .JaLtiJLt Verbal Noun ,.J

b) Jlii!, e.g. from Ui>, >J

"to ^e quiet

Imperf. Indie. ^Jaj Imper.

-

Part. Active ^ijox Verbal Noun OArabic Grammar.

194 First Part.

There are numerous onomatopoetic quadriliteral

verbs; e.g. 3pj"to quake", Qji "to tremble", S^ "

to

howl (in mourning)", u-j*^ "to whisper" etc.

The Verb Jjj.

2. TheVerb J^Ij "not to be" occurs in thePerfect only:

Sing. 3. mafcc. J*^ ^ual L~i'' jplur -

,, 3. fern.

2. masc. <

2. fern.

For the syntax of this verb see below 12.

The Verbs ^ and Jjj.

3. These are known as the Verbs of Praise

and Blame Lo) and occur in the 3rd Masc. and Fern.

only: ^jtj 9 os^ "to be good"; \j~5i, c>^*Jj "to be bad".

The Verb ^L^.

4. The Verb ^^ followed by the conjunction

ol or^1

means "it is possible that; it is to be hoped

that; perhaps", e.g.

^o Q^si o' i?**^ "Perhaps (or "it is to hoped")

that will be".

The other Persons of the Perfect are rare.

Verbs of Surprise or Wonder.

5. To express Surprise or Wonder two methodsare employed:

Thirtieth Lesson. 195

a) The 3rdSing. Masc. Perf. of the IV. form

preceded by U "what" and followed by the Accusative;

e.g. iJsjJ cr^- ^ "how beautiful is Zaidl" (literally

"what has made Zaid beautiful").

b) The 2nd Sing. Masc. Itnper. of the IV. form fol-

lowed by a word with the Preposition u;; e.g.

"how beautiful is Zuidl" (literally "make beautiful with

Zaid").The Optative.

6. The Optative is expressed by the Perfect at the

beginning of a sentence; e.g.

^ "may God have mercy upon him".

This Perfect may be preceded by ^; e.g. ^|jo c^Jli ^

"may thy hands not grow dry!"

Note. In speech and in popular written language the

Optative is expressed by a Nominal sentence with the verb in

the Imperf. e.g., > - o- tl-s.

u*>-jj JJt (pronounced allah yarhamak) "may God have

mercy upon thee".

The Verb3f,

:.

7. The VerbJfj Imperf. jljl

is used with the

negative particles U, ^ and^J (3tj

U or^fjj'

i orJj^' jj)

with another verb or with an Accus. in the sense "is

still" or 'continues" e.g.

(Ls>U) v^Ju j^j (^ jj) ^|^U "Zaid did not

cease to go i.e. goes still".

(tfcfajUi) Jj^jlii (yfjj jj) ty'ljU "they still fought".

u>itjj

^1 "he is still alive".

Also:

Ol^f tO^ Jc jj*^ (v\jJ p) oJ|j U "matters were

still in this condition".

196 First Part

The Verb JU.

8. The Verb oLc, Imperf. oyu "to return" preceded

by a negative and followed by another verb is used to

express "not again", e.g.

)oU L*

uhe did not return again".

-lj .(^1 jJ)lijs* U "we did not return again"

Also in the Imperfect:

i ^ "do not do so again".

^ct ^ "I will not do it again .

Also with Accus. but without a second verb:

jj"the journey was no more

possible". The Verb 3^

9. The Verb 3tf, Imperf. olXj expresses the English

"almost, nearly", e.g.

ol/ "he nearly did it".

(oyil o !) ojxf oJs^ li} "I almost died".

The Verbr'tJ

10. The Verb ,.!j preceded by the Conjunction U"as long as" and followed by a 'verb in the Imperfect, or

an Accusative is used to express "as long as, while", e.g.

"as long as fjl v^vO U|"as long as

he stands"., ei

- ' > -[ I stand".

U38 *!

The Verbs ji and to.

11. The Verb ji "to be little or rare" is used in

the phrase U JJ (also written Uis) to express "seldom",

e.g. UH> U JJ (^JLis) "thou hast seldom come to us".

The verb ^J?, Imperf. J|y "to be long" is used

Thirtieth Lesson. 197

in the phrase L 5l> (also generally written LJLb) to

express "not for a long time", e.g.

JUs-i (-* &Jj] u*JLb "thou hast not honoured us> x '

for a loiig time".

The Verb o^ and its Sisters.

12. The verb '^ used as a copula takes its predi-

cate (^>] in the Accusative (see Less. 12, 4), e.g.

L>JJs^; ^ "Zaid was a merchant".

Certain other verbs known as the Sisters of ^(^ oi^>!) ha.ve the same construction, e.g.

jLJ "not to be" (see 2), which may also take

a predicate with\^>.

^ to remain.

b to continue, last, (see 10).

3h u not to cease, (see 7).

.La (Imperf. _^aj) to become.

to become.to be or do in the morning.

,->**] to be or do in the evening.

(^5) to be or do in the night.

e.g.

(or

(or

!vXS O *.J Said is not a boy.

UJLl I remained well.

we are getting (become)tired.

198 First Part.

13. The verbs Lo "to become", ei- "to- take",

and Jjo. "to make" used before another verb in the

Imperfect mean "to begin to" e.g.> * '0 ^O ^

or iL*3 or LJLjLs.. we began to travel.

Instead of the Imperfect of the verb the prepositionor v-j with the Verbal Noun may be used e.g.

J , o

\ IxXrM we began to travel.

Vocabulary.

Thirtieth Lesson. 199

200 First Part.

jJas goodness, nobility. yC*ow camp.

u& cup. JO HI. to defend.

Exercise 57.

- S& I ) , . -

3^> ^ \jl\\ U

- t-ot

jjj UUXij' ,JkIfT ^ LJ '.Jb U

Thirtieth Lesson. 201

OS* -5-

ioO Jo

Jo

,

liub ju y

l, "j^

xi aj

UJt 5

202 First Part.

Exercise 58.

The Emir died (Pass. V. of J5), may God have

mercy on him! May God prolong your days!

May God reward you for(CTC)

usl The woman

began to prepare the food. God curse his father!- They almost died from fear (Adv. Accus.). Satan

whispers in the breasts of men. pupil, translate

these words! I have already translated them.

boy, be quiet!-

boys, be quiet! Good is this-

girl, how beautiful she is! Bad are these goods,how vile they are! Good morning (May God do to

thee in the morning good), my master. We still

remember your kindness. You are not (;j~J) heros.

As long as we live, we shall remember your kindness.

Thanks to God we are still well (sound). boys,do not do this again! We will not do it again.I have not seen you for a long time. We had almost

drunk (y> V.) the cup of death(oy-). They

continued travelling until they arrived at the camp of

the enemies. We became (*A\) incapable of defending.

So long as we remained in this city, we continuallysaw wonders.

Thirty-first Lesson.

Relative Sentences.

1. The Relative Pronoun (J^tf JLT^T)is:

Sing. Masc.(jrjJf, Fern, ^t (in all cases), "who,

which".

Thirty-first Lesson. 203

Dual Norn. Masc.^CvL't

Fein. oudi?

Gen. Accus. Masc.

Plural Masc.

(in all cases).55

Note. The pronoun i^XSt is compounded of the Article

vM (therefore the hamza is a hamzat alwasl), the particle ^ and

the Demonstrative 13, ^cO (see Less. 9, 1).

Notice that the common forms of the Sing. Masc. and Fein.

and the Plur, Masc. are written with one lam, the other formswith two.

2. Other Pronouns used in Relative sentences are;

--" ~ ~-----it^ "he who", U "that which, what", more rarely ^\

OsgFern. KJ! (with following Gen.) "he who" and its com-

pounds (ytj\ ''whosoever" and L^J? "whatsoever".

The words ^ and U are always treated as nouns,

^5JJ! usually as an adjective but sometimes as a noun,

when it has the same meaning as ^ "he who" and

'^ "what".

3. The Relative Pronoun is called ij^T <L3l

and the following Relative Sentence &Ll5i. This sentence

is treated in Arabic as quite independent and as coor-

dinate with the main sentence; e.g.

zL> ^53sJ! Jo^l the man, who came (literally:

The man who he came).) }C* sx) > ) Z e.

*jii\j ^j^\ j"->j^the man, whom I saw (literally:

The man who I saw him).

204 First Part.

CUf J elJ^ isjj? J-^f tae man to whom I

wrote a letter (literally: The man who I wrote

a letter to him).

the man, whose son I saw

(literally: The man who I saw his son).

The Relative Pronoun must always be caught upagain in the Relative sentence by a Pronoun (called

joU or=-tJ)

either implied in the verb (as in the first

sentence above) or manifest (as in the other sentences).

Note. After ^ and Is the Oolc is often omitted; e.g.

.> o - - > ><>'

ooK L forayul^

U "that, which I have seen".

4. Jfthe noun to which the Relative sentence Jsattached""^ indefinite, the Relative pronoun is omitted".

STJ

Such a sentence is called a &ao; e.g.

I met a man, who had

gone out from his house.

5- - > ~. * 6, ,.>a-xi^ vxjL^ L^o iouJvo

|LiJ5Damascus is a city,

in which are, many marvels.

5. Certain constructions of the Participle Passive

are to be explained as shortened Relative sentences; e.g.

abo! ^UJ'

;y\xti o_^LlT the witnesses, whose

names are mentioned below.

The Article here may be regarded as a shortenedRelative pronoun, the following clause as a whole

depending on it; e.g. "The witnesses, who (mentionedare their names)". The following phrases of a similar

nature are much used:

Jl ,mi or xJS lojllthe above-mentioned.

Thirty-first Lesson. 205

Vocabulary.

Mt. Hermon. .<

Damascus. ,-

j(Elativeof^)J>

highest,summit. jy.

j IV. to deny.

to embrace,surround.

the man above-mentioned.

the woman above-mentioned.

the men above-mentioned.

I. and VIIJ. to hear.

(pL il or

0^15!)relative.

(plur.

answer,

cold.

- fin. to be like,

| correspond.

tender,

as, as if.

(pi.

(pi.

misfortune. G

(pi. ^l=*i) melody.

II. to cut in pieces

(plur. illff) liver,

(used metaphori-cally = heart).

(^5)II. to soften.

hard rock.

(i)to be tender, soft.

giant.

obstinate.

to be certain, V. to

be convinced of.

there.

(i)to break.

to determine (on j^t).

IV. to deliver.

oppressed.

206 First Part.

IV. to seize (with v-).

to fall.

veil.

fresh.

*!) W ^ - to a<^orn>

2 o,

ij^ rosy.

"L^I beautiful, shining.G '-

Jo!J> languid.

^ IV. to rain (trans.).

jjjj pearl (collective).

inflaming.

piercing, splitting.

exalted.

^ cry.

slic. song.2 / - o-JLfc (pi. La!) wretched.

G'

, a* S

joj^i (pi. *l>xii!) strong.G' -

JwJj brave.

.ix refuge, escape.

jojJ delightful, agreeable.

IV. to free.

(jj)Jo\to shoot,

death,

to cry.

0iiIV. to disturb.

Go', _ G > >

J^o tearing, carnivorous.

( meantime.

, . (IV. to advanceu

-"\ (to ji).

G -

o!j provisions.

jj (pi. Q^Gs-) partridge.G a w -

't+tS quantity.

'

Ll (^^ to

v1 distant.

^Jw VIII. to prepare.

supper.

cs ,iIthe day before

* 5 ^') yesterday.

G -

JjiS struggle,

jjis (pass.) to be lost.

itf.Li battle.

yd to be intoxicated.

G /-

oby>. flowing.

*o blood.

iULlo courage.

Thirty-first Lesson. 207

to carry, induce

to

V. and VIII. to

consider (with j).

measure.

method.

means.

swiftness.

entrance, approach.

Jo*. I death.

iUS, letter, note.

^.c. hidden, absent.

jsx number.

V. to endure.

(^5)to measure.

Exercise 59.

- a / u \flowers (coll.).

-' TT A.o V. to smile.

o, ,

j(pl.^ I ea

mes-

sage.

Mt Lebanon.

~o

Mediterranean.

V. to enjoy (vj).

(pi. *tjlt) prisoner.

boneg

mouth.

marshal -

last.

-lj (Less. 7, 4) w

208 First Part,

JU* Jo^j il vis J^y^ ;H^ J*

yUJ? ^5>>jt

*j vilf T *

.f^y

,,o,PJ^c c^l^. ^ e?^ r)>b^

U|fcAjj ^w-

LJ >Ui^ Jf^

jJi La i3

. -v* _-

JJI U JU i ^jJT

US! swi

Thirty-first Lesson. 209

(Less. 44, 2 B 8)

d #

(Less. 44, 2 B 8)

^

oB 1=^ U L.II'

that)

Arabic Grammar.

,,JwO sLAJkLAJ ^LciXc ~ii^ LJ. * -" "*i -

^'' ..

J^Sf v-juaj ^xL' ^f S? oJu iij jiJf j: ^gfA

,

210 First Part.

Exercise 60.

Those men, who are in the market, buy and sell.

- Those women, whom we have seen in the street,

are of our family. This is the boy to whom wehave given the money. He, whose tongue is long,his intelligence is small. The girl, in whose hand

(was) a flower, smiled. I saw girls (oJj), in whose

hands were flowers. All letters, which come to us,

must be addressed to (itis necessary that they be in

the name of) the director of our journal. This youngman, whose father, we know, is clever. Mt. Lebanon.from the summit of which you see the Mediterranean,is a very high mountain. After the enquity con-

cerning thy welfare (conditions) and the information

concerning thee (thy informing) (as to) which I hope that

thou art better than could be wished (thou art in excess

of what is wished), I inform thee that thy friendlyletter has reached me and I rejoice over (j) thy health

and thy well-being (soundness), which mayest thou

continually enjoy. I saw soldiers, with whom (were)

prisoners. I inform you that I am still in the con-

dition, which you know. A dog met a dog, in whosemouth was a bone. The above-mentioned Marshalis very renowned. The above-mentioned persons are

the owners of this house.

Thirty-second Lesson

(ojP&k ^ u>4The Numerals.

A. The Cardinal Numbers.

1. The Cardinal Numbers are as follows:

a) From 110:

2. ,,&!

o. .- / also s.i.\

3. xj^Lii VwrittenxiJLi/

2!

also o .A

e. .. / also'

9.

10.

b) From 1119.

11. masc.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

)..

fern.

also i.

212 First Part.

j(also frequently written xfu,j

*~!)

but the alif is not pro-j

nounced).

d) From 200 upwards.

200. u. 'iiu

etc. to 10000.

11000. li!1 jc^f etc.

100000.

1000000. vjjl JJf or*

JL, Plur.

0. Zero, Nil y>

Declension of the Cardinal Numbers.

2. The Numerals from 1 to 10 are declined: a) pUand

gtiullas Dual with Gen. Accus.

b) the others as Singulars^ e.g.

214 First Part.

j^>| Accus. tje>l Gen.

Fern, i i&S

The Numeral oui is declined like u^ii.*

g c ,

ll_is indeclinable (^~)-

12 forms Gen. Accus. yi^ ^y^H Fern, gjs

13 1_9 are indeclinable.

The Numerals 20 90 are declined as Sound^Plurals ; e.g.

Nom. oij^c; Gen. Accus. ^yi*The other Numerals are declined as follows:

Nom. *!/> Accus. io- Gen. 't&*

O S 8 V*, S . *t

i^aJI has two forms of the Plural: o^S ! and>-?_^i,

the latter being used for "thousands" in an indefinite

sense.

The Cardinal numbers from 3 to 10 are used in

jhe feminine form with masculine nouns and in the

masc. with fern, nouns.

Formation of the Compound Numbers.

3. Compound numbers from 20 on are formed byjoining the units, tens and hundreds by ^.

The largest number is put first, but the units are

put before the tens; e.g.- ,o -0

21

Thirty-second Lesson. 215

1896'

jLlo''

'

xLs i

"''

I "il

Such an expression as eighteen hundred must be

expressed by one thousand eight hundred.

In the compound numbers each numeral is dg-

clined: e.g. Accus.-rfyZ*-* .fJs^-f etc.

Syntax of the Numerals.

4. The Numerals are joined to the words they

Qualify according to the following rules:

a) The"

Numerals 1 and 2 are adjectives; e.g.O -. 9 4-

_JLa ''one heart".

^Lutis seldom used with a noun, because the

Dual of the noun itself can be used, but when it is

so used, the^wLit

loses its final nun (see Less. 7, 1)

and the noun follows in the Gen. Sing.

b) The Numerals 3 to 10 are Substantives andare followed by the noun in the Gen. Plur ; e.g.

JLs io^Ls Three men. z~^*i J^e. Ten women.

Note. They are more rarely placed after the noun in

apposition to it; e.g.

O, ,- O . o -

c) The Numerals 11 to 99 are followed by the,

noun in the Accus. Sing.: e.g.

!il>. -Ac js^-IEleven men. ti>, .....Ac Twenty men.

d) The Numerals fryin 100 on are Substantives

.and are followed bv Jhe noun in the Gen. Sing. : e.gT

Three hundred men.

thousand nights.

216 First Part.

e) After CompcmndJSumerals the noun follow?the laws regulating its relation to the last numeral

e.g.

* -, c,xix A hundred and three men. (Rule b).

* A hundred and twenty-

five men. (Rule c).

5. The Indefinite Numeral "some", when it is

used for a number between 3 and 10, is expressed by--the substantive .,00? (later also' iju^) followed by the-

Genitive: e.g. r (>t (iuwa?) ^cu some days.

Note. This word must not be confused with the word60, ,, A i o.

(jiaj, which means, "one of some, a certain" e.g. L**xJf (joju"Some poets" or "A certain poet".

An_jn^efinite number over 10 is expressed by the

e.g.

Jl idx A hundred thousand and some

(more) souls.

Method of denoting Hours and Days.

6. a) To express the Hour of the day the Ordinals

jure generally used, (see Less. 33): e.g.

x*LJt Three o'clock (the third hour).

At three o'clock (in the third hour).

BuUhe Cardinal numbers are used predicatively ; e.g.6--- /, a s

XcL*Jt It is three o'clock (the hour is three).

It is eleven o'clock.

Note. olcL* cy^ would mean "3 hours"; X&L*"11 hours". -

Thirty-second Lesson. 217

"What time is it?" is expressed by *jjjf ^ or

Note. The hours are counted in the East from sunset.

b) The times of day '*jpthe morning'', "in the

evening". "at midday" are best expressed by the Accus.t

otherwise by the preposition ; e.g.

n * mornng.

In the evening.

J ^<&TyAt midday.

7. Thejiaiaes_of tl>e Days of the week are:

j^-'51(Jlji)

'

Sunday.

yj Monday.

(sLiiST) *j&i!l(jLji)

'

r Tuesday.

(jLfrl) r_H Wednesday.

(^L^) ^ Thursday.

(ji-fi) *^j Friday.

(JL^

r

) ^ Saturday.

The word ^ or^ is often omitted; e.g.

Tuesday.

"The week" is iil^ff or^1*^1.

The Months of the Christian year.

8. The Christian year is called ilo^Lll xULl! "the

birth year" or ic^w*sl! xLlJl "the Messiah year" or

Ji iilljl "the sun year".

218 First Part.

The twelve Months are named:

a) usually in

^llJ January.

yt^o February.

JJu March.

j| April.

May.

June.

b) usually in Syria:

j,lijT .& January.

February.

March

April.

Oas

Jbt May

June.

J|jfMarch

^ July (also ^JjJ).

August.

September.

October.

November.

December.

j July.

August

September,

j* October.

November.

B.C. is expressed in Arabic by oLIt US (abbreviated ^ v)

or simpleThe Months of the Mohammedan Year.

9. jrhe_Mohammedan year is called x

"the flight year" (abbreviated after a date to #) orJS ^-0 >-5

uUJl "the moon year".

Thirty-second Lesson. 219

Dates are reckoned from 16th July 622 A.D. thk

being the day of the flight of Mohammed from Mecca

to Medina.

Every year has 354 days.

The Mohammedan year 1327 began on 23rdJan^

1909 AH-The yeau consists of the following twelve lunar

months:

or

O^j (the month of fasting).

3i (Month of the^>).

Some names of these months are often used with

special attributive; e.g.

Xt!.M-fc^;

etC.

Mohammedan Feasts.

The Mohammedans celebrate two chief festivals:

.

1) jtfjglf Os^5

"tne small festival" at the begin-

ning of the month 3t_^i immediately after the end of

the great fast in the month ^1*^.

2) ^xJC? Js^nJt "the great festival" also called

^^^iT J^c "the sacrificial festival" on the 10th of the

month A^f 3i when the pilgrims offer sacrifice in Mecca.

220 First Part.

Method of indicating Date.

10. To indicate Date the Ordinal numbers are,

generally used. Aftertbe^

Ordinal is put the Name of

the Month, with or without, the word *%& jbefore jit,

and ,after this the numbers indicating the Year with

or without iiJLl before them, in the Genitive: e.g.

5 - 3(1-0 a * ) . I

_^i | (f

)" rd of Mul.iarram.

) ^ viJ'JJi ,.JP

UT.

J! 1896-

On such and such a date is expressed by the

.Accus. or thepreposition ^.

Indication of Age.

11. How old art thou? is expressed by:

}U~ pf dj+s. literally "thy life (is) how manyyears?" or:

-o ,, o, jo

oo! 'iJ*M pf ^( literally "a son of how manyyears art thou?"

The answer to such a question would be of the form:

"I am twenty years old".

Vocabulary.

2 ..minute. J^ place.

equipment. ^ value' Price"

the first. ^ to subscribe

-> fr^ '

'

***"

c* expiration (of time). eUis franc.

Thirty-second Lesson. 221

I direction, part (of

( the word).relation.

222 First Part.

list, register,

library, bookshop,

title, address.

-

((Turkish)of full

I weight or value.'

narrative, play.

' travel.

(Ibn

Batuta, anArabian tra-

veller, whodied 778 A.H.= 1377 A.D.

geography.

1 K D-,Sa Lu

(.j**\Amm Bey

Fikri(a modern Egyptianwriter).

k

the trusty

guide" (name of a book),

-o'^c&j

Rifa'at Bey, (mo-

dern Egyptian writer).

O.L packing.

total.

Exercise 61.

/ (Persian) thin

)cotton stuff.

post.

Alexandria,

(pi. ^y wind,

north,

south,

east,

west,

heighth.

slumber,

to spend (time).

VIE. to be strong,

washerwoman,

(pi. Ou5) shirt.

(plur. Joollx) hand-

kerchief.

II. to lose (time), beslow (of a watch).

rj,j

jjf-

Thirty-second Lesson. 223

o!cL,(

jt W>LC

L-l ^JL- ji iu xl (for)

r. g >

a jf

.,t

- O; , O-

o g

224 First Part.

I 1*0

Exercise 62.

The earth revolves round (^^c.) the sun once (one

revolution) in 365 days and 6 hours. The Moslemsreckon from the Flight, which was (and it was) in the

year 622 A.D. Wilt thou honour us with a visit (thy

coming) on Sunday? I will visit you on Saturday.Wilt thou come in the morning or the evening?

Thirty-third Lesson. 225

I will come in the afternoon (after the midday), if Godwill. Alexander the Great came to Egypt in the year332 B.C. and built the city of Alexandria. The numberof its inhabitants is now 231396 souls. How old are

you (two)? I am 25 years old and my brother has

not reached in age more than 9 years. How old

art thou O girl? Next (on the coming) WednesdayI shall be (reach) 17. The winds come to this

mountain (Accus.) from the four directions, the North

(and) the South (and) the East and the West, and its

height is 11000 feet. Truly, my eye has not

tasted ( *lJ [u]) slumber for (since) four days. We

spend about three months in the mountains, for the

heat is strong in the city. The washerwoman broughtus six shirts and two nightshirts (shirts for the sleep

j.Jj)and twelve handkerchiefs. Hasan Pasha died

in the year 1888, may God have mercy upon him!What is the time? --It is ten minutes past nine

(nine and ten minutes). Thy watch is slow, it will

soon be ten. How much is this book?

Forty-five piastres, my master. This is dear

will give thee twenty. Give me thirty, and enough I

Thirty-third Lesson.

B. The Ordinal Numbers.

1. The Ordinals are generally formed from theO ,

' ''----- T

Cardinals according to the type J^li but with some

exceptions :

J*os , .05

1 fern. H the first.

ilsilh the second.

Arabic Grammar.

First Part.

fern. &Jl5t the third.

the fourth.

the fifth.

the sixth.

the seventh.

the eighth.

the ninth.

the tenth.

All the above are declined fully.

The Ordinals from 11 to 19 are indeclinable:

fern. -l^ y*S the eleventh.

ililSJ? the twelfth.

ixc KSM5I the thirteenth etc.

For the higher numbers the Cardinals only are

^ except_tE.at the^ Ordinals of the Units are_usedoined to the

^Cardinalsof the Tens to express the

Compound Ordinals. The Article must be attached JoeVch migteral use^

masc. and fern. the twentieth.

fern. L ijol^f the twenty-first.

^ - i E

Xjo'iilt the twenty-second.

twenty-third etc.

Thirty-third Lesson. 227

xiif masc. and fern, the hundredth.

fern.the last -

Note 1. For the use of the Ordinals in the indication of

Dates and the Hours of the day see the previous lesson.

yautNote. 2. The Ordinals have the Sound Plnral, e.g. i3^l

^The word 0^1 has also a Broken Plur. J<5j}31 meaning

> ^-ic > '-co

"the first parts" just as ~s>*$\ has a J'lor. f>\$$\ "the last

i oSoS > -oc

parts", and Jr*-^ I "the middle" has Ja**!^^! ''tlie middle parts".

These terms are sometimes used for the three decades of themonth.

2. The Numeral Adverbs "firstly, secondly, thirdly"tc. are expressed by the Adverbial Accus of the

Ordinals, e.g.

<$, Lo 1

}, &&, bulj,J-sx 1^ etc.

3. The Numeral Adverbs "once, twice, three times"

gtc.are expressed usually by the word "g.x in the

Accug.. e.g.

9.* "once", ^yj "twice", oLx cySii "three times" etc.

(Once = "once upon a time, one day" is U^J or

Sometimes the occurrence of an action once or

twice is expressed by the Verbal Noun with the ending

(the so-called i^ Up e.g.

0,^0- oS /&- > i -

8 ^ '*^e tums roUQd once or twice".

First Part.

4. The Fractions (with the exception of "a half)

are^oXJhe type ji or ~Us' with the Plural &(:e &

^AX1J

V'*

J "a >

eJiS or iJLi Plur.

O > CJ >

fi;" S>

O o , > ,

Oo ^

e.g.8/s LiH;

3/i

If a . whole and a fraction are united, they must

be joined b^>

r

^; e.g.

Note. /* i often written, ^-;

l

/j, <; /4>- ^.

5. The Multiplicative adjectives "twofold, threefold"O *.) S*t *} ^ >

etc, are of the form Joiw; e.g.(

i^ "twofold",

"threefold" (also = "triangle"); jj" "fourfold" (also

"square"). "Single, simple" is

6. The Distributive adjectives "two by two" etc.

are expressed

a) by repetition of the Cardinal numberTj)r

Thirty-third Lesson. 229

b) by the forms jus or JuU*; e.g.

J3*L>. or ^j& JjiLa- they come two

by two.

*(ztj'j*

I passed by people (walking)

in twos and threes.

7. Numeral adjectives expressing the number of

parts of which anything is made, are of the form ilii, e.g.

JjUi Biliteral.

2'

- >

gi^b Triliteral, or 3 cubits long, or high.

^bj QuaJriliteral, or 4 cubits high, or a quatrain.

Vocabulary.G c. S.o-

doctrine, teaching. $.J eastern.

.w^: Zanzibar,lesson. -" ".<>

> -te/(fern. JalJ) central,

noble - -^1 middle.

So.

tradition (in Islam).& western '

I ^tf. (a ect

x

of2

j^ southern.| Mohammedans).

--JVIII. to comprise, j' cape*^1 contain.

"-^

.*j to follow, belong.

",.,.. ,!$ continent,be Maghrib.

/^ fH. to date, (Verbal

\* . *iM Noun = date,ft Algeria.

( higtory).

5 .-.- JILT,

to agree, corre-

s* Morocco. (Js ( spond with.

230

o

First Part.

risingof the sun.

setting

Frankish, European.

(pl.2Ult)noun.

to be spoilt.

andU1 letter, particle.

s ^

tf/R

(pi. part,

beginning.

Spring.

Autumn .

of,

I the Koran).

(the Fatiha (name of

(the lst sirft) .

noble.

Exercise 63.

it

(.ListKil it

3 Lj 1* sj ibf e

^pjl iLJL/t oL-lSl

...,

UL* ~-

Thirty-third Lesson. 231

j s - -5 - a

pjf

i*-LJ x JkL ^i ,ll ,5

sUlST f Lllbri JU iJJl

io>

Exercise 64.

The date of this letter is: Tuesday the l t

July1890, corresponding with the 13ih

Dhu'lqa'da 1307.

The 114th Sura of the noble Koran is called "The Sura

of (the) men". In the first days (Jj3*) of the month

of May you (sing.) will receive (will come to you) aletter from us and, if God will, you will send us the

answer in the latter days of June. In this night I

have not slept a quarter of an hour. I will return

to your dwelling after three quarters of an (from the)hour. Take seven eighths of this stuff and we will

232 First Part.

take the last eighth. Two thirds of this food is

spoilt My servant was in the fifteenth year of his

life. - -

Yesterday I read the first (and) second andthird chapters of this book, and to-morrow I shall read

the fourth (and) fifth and sixth. How old art thou?- I am in the twenty-sixth year of my life, for

1 shall be twenty-six (reach the twenty-six) on the

29thJanuary. The beginning of Spring is on the

21 s.

1 March, and the beginning of Summer on the

21 stJune, and (the beginning) of Autumn on the

21 st

September, and (the beginning) of Winter- on the

21 st December. The doctrine of the Relative Pronounis contained (is found) in the 31st Lesson of this book.

There are three kinds of words in the Arabic

language: firstly the Noun, (and) secondly the Verb,

(and) thirdly the Particle.

END OF PART J.

233

Second Part,

Thirty-fourth Lesson.

The Noun and its Derivation.o ,oS

Nouns (f*\ Plur. l

iUwt) are divided according

to their Derivation into:O -

a) Primitive; e.g-.^J, "head". Such nouns are

to be found in the dictionaries under the verbal stem,

although in this case the verbJ*jJ

"to be at the head of

a tribe, to strike on the head" is derived from the noun.

b) Derivative:

a) Derived from Verbs. Most nouns are of this

Go- - ,, O 0,

class, e.g. Jo3 "killing" from Jis; (JJ^1

"session, council"

from jUb- "to sit"; -^ "great" from ^j'uto be great"

o , *&3

p) Derived from Nouns; e.g. sJu/u "a place in

which there are lions" from ,xj "a lion";

"Islamic" from *ill "Islam".

2. The most usual nouns derived from the verb are :

a) The Verbal Noun(,vX*ax)

which properly expresses

the verbal idea in the form of a noun, but sometimeshas a more remote meaning and is then known as the

b) The Active Participle

c) The Passive Participle ($&\ (lit).

284 Second Part.

These three forms have been treated in the first

part of the grammar, but the following facts regardingthe Verbal Noun of the Simple (I.) form of the verb

should be noted:9

a) The form Juis occurs especially in transitive

verbs of the form JJ6 and Ju6; e.g. jJa from jJa "to

kill"; pg from *^i "to understand".

6 " ' '

b) Juts in intransitive verbs of the form Jjc; e.g.

"joy" from ^.> 9 -

c) Jyc in intransitive verbs of the form Jsjis; e.g.

from jb. "to sit".

d) iJ^is and iJUi in verbs of the form jJii e.g.

"smoothness" and xlll "easiness" from

be smooth, easy".

e) l\jo especially in verbs denoting an Office or

Trade; e.g. x&> "Caliphate" from -Jfe-tlto follow";

I>Li. "tailoring" from M^> "to sew".

f) Many verbs form their Verbal Noun with aGo, , - .

prefixed mlm; e.g. -_V3S." "purpose" from Jwuas "to

2 0,0,intend". This form of Verbal Noun is called

g) Other common forms of the Verbal Noun of

the Simple verb are:

8 ' 9o, ..--( "to ocCUDV> e.g. JJL* "buBiness" from JJLi{ ,e in

"P

y o GOJoe

i

*w> "part" *~j> "to divide .

"smallness, - -(

youth,- ^ "to be small .

"treatise" lo "to say".

Note. In the dictionaries the Verbal Noun ia given foreach verb Sometimes several forms are in use from the same

verb, either with the same or different meanings; e.g. J^ais and6 o- , - , O o, O-

"purpose" from Jua*; ^^"description" and Kix '-quality"

from ft*3j "to describe

3. The Verbal Nouns of verbs whose 2nd "and

3rd radicals are the same, of hamzated verbs and ofweak verbs are of the same forms as above but subjectto the rules for assimilation etc. given in the earlier

lessons; e.g.

from to think": (for cy&) "opinion";

fromJ.I5

"to stand":^Ls (for f_^) "standing";

from jis" "to say": jJUu (for iJ^U) "treatise".

286 Second Part.

It should be noted that the verbs, whose first

radical is 3 ,which drop the 3 in the Imperf. (Less. 26, 2)

have also a Verbal Noun without the first radical; e.g.

from J-^5 "to unite": iJLo "tie" (beside jJ^); from vju>ijo,

"to describe": 'A*O "quality".

4. The Verbal Nouns of the Derived forms are

given in Lesson 18, 7. In these forms the Part. Pass.

is often used with the meaning of the Verbal Noun;

e.g. ^ax\ "that which is neceseitated" instead of

aliasS? "necessity".

5. The meaning of the Verbal Noun is either

Active or Passive. Often it is both; e.g. Jos is "killing"

or "being killed", sometimes it is only Passive; e.g.

"being found i.e. existence" (Active only is

"finding").

The meaning of the Verbal Noun is not in any

way connected with the idea of time, e.g. jus means

"killing" or "being killed" either in the past, presentor future.

6. In its syntax the Verbal Noun partakes of the

characteristics of the Noun and of the Verb. As aNoun it is followed by the Genitive, subjective or

objective; e.g.

j^ JJ3 may mean "Zaid's killing (someone)" or-

"the killing of Zaid" as ino o j <><> * *".

f*\"the king commanded that

(someone) should kill Zaid".

If however the Verbal Noun has both a subjectand an object, theln the former is put in the Genitive andthe latter in the Accusative or has the Preposition ^; e.g.

Thirty-fourth Lesson. 237

js^5\i or tj^^ Jsj: Jjcs "the fact of Zaid's killing

Mohammed".So also ^^\ v^> "the love of (one's) country".

or rwy'T LJL&J? *^o> "the youth's love of

(his) country",and with a pronominal suffix:

alia "his killing Mohammed".

^s" "my love of (my) country".

The preposition & is also used when the Verbal Noun

is employed indefinitely with an adverbial meaning, e.g.

"I rose in honour of Mohammed".

7. A verb can always be strengthened or specialisedin meaning by the addition of a Verbal Noun (cf.

Less. 12, "'). This (called in Arabic L ^i "the

absolute object") is usually derived from the same verb,

e.g. I't.'.k^ I0j| '-j>"he rejoiced greatly". (In this case the

absolute object is used "for distinguishing" lAjyjJLJ):

but may also be derived from another verb, e.g.'

"he rejoiced greatly".j

It is also used with the Passive, e.g.

"he was struck violently".Sometimes the Verbal Noun is so used without

an adjective, e.g. Lyo \L>fO"he struck a striking". (In

this case it is used jsuJlxJLJ i.e. for emphasising.)

Sometimes the Adjective alone is expressed and

the Verbal Noun is understood, e.g. ijoJUw Cya "he

struck violently" for

238 Second Part.

The Verbal Noun may be used thus with a Geni-

tive, or a Suffix or a Demonstrative Pronoun or a

Relative Sentence, e.g.

. LliT J^> uiJLs- "thou fearest the fearing of the

coward" i.e. like a coward.'

"I struck him this striking" i.e. thus.

"he was struck a striking which

pained him".-G** J O

8. The Active Participle (J^liil f**\) may also be

used as a Noun, in which case it is followed bya Genitive, or as a Verb when it is followed by anAccusative or the Preposition ,3, if it is used in the

sense of the Imperfect, e.g.

"one, who kills men".

JolklT "he, who kills men".3

**

iJLIJi "he, who strives after knowledge".

But if it is used in the sense of the Perfect, it

can have only the Genitive after it, e.g.

"he, who has killed men".

Exercise 65.

The words in the following exercises are to be found in the

Vocabulary at the end of the book. The rowels of the Article and.some common words are note omitted.

Thirty-fourth Lesson. 239

L ' U

l *5 ^ *^

U uLli

-e joss- .

UU.I (

MJ

!Xi i/li

iu^O!

) , O ,

Exercise 66.

We rejoiced greatly, when we received the books

you sent (your sending of the books). The love of

one's land is a part of (^ faith. -- I praised this

youth's love of his country. We rose in honour of

the prince. They have done this deed from hatredof their enemies. After bringing excess of greetingwe inform you that the inducement to write it

(i.e.

this letter) is to ask concerning your health and yourcircumstances. I shall leave the city (my leaving of

the city will be) on the 15th of November of this year.- I rejoiced greatly that your Excellency has perfect

health and security (I rejoice .... at your Excellency's

possessing the perfection of etc.).

240 Second Part.

Thirty-fifth Lesson

Nouns of Place and Time.

\ . Nouns denoting the Time or Place of an action

j"*^ (**"*)'when derived from the Simple verb

Go, O-o, 6,,o,are of the forms Js***, Jou/> and '!XAA, e.g.

- .. ,"

9 o,

from ^Jb- "to sit": ^Ji^* "place of sitting, assembly";, , ^ "O - o -

from sr*jtf' "to write": ^j&* "office, school";

fromjli

"to bury": s^Jj/i "cemetery".

The Plural of these three forms is J*Lix, e.g.

Note 1. These nouns, when derived from verbs, whichO o-

have kaara or fatha in the Imperf. are usually of the form Jou^J

those from verbs with damma in the Imperf. are of the form<> -o-

JuAftx. But there are many exceptions such as

O o ,. Go,-&/ "place ofsnnriae, East", v_jJw" place, of sunset, Weet'j,

O'

o - 9o- \

\\^M+A "place of praying, mosque," ^J***A "dwelling place",

all from verbs, which have damma in the Imperf.

Note 2. From some verbs more than one form is used e.g.

- -- G -o. G--O ,

from > ^uCT "to write": i^Ji&Q "office" and iyJlXx "library,

book-shop";- ,, Go, O-o,

from *3$ "to place": *>j* and g&j* "place".

6,0Note 3. A rarer form in use is oL^ (especially from

verbs whose first radical is or ^5), e.g.

, -, O , O -o

fromJOj "to bear children": J^Ly(for ^_^) "time of birth";

Thirty-fifth Lesson. 241

from >Ac "to promise": OULAX (for oLs^s) "time of fulfilling

promise, term";Go. G , G .<,

so also from the noun c^ "time" oliu/ (for C&**)"appointed time''.

2. These nouns formed from verbs "not sound'1

(Less. 28, 1) are subject to the laws which control the

forms of the verbs, e.g., 2.- G,o-

from "to settle: yw (for .yw) "abode";5 - S . V 9 -O-

from J^ "to alight": J^ (for JJb^) "place" andG;,, O^o-aJL^

8

for jJULs^) "city-quarter";G-, G.o-

fromj.15

"to rise":(JJw (for j.jju) "place, position".

from J^ "to pasture": ^^s "pasturage".

3. In the Derived forms of the verb the Part. Pass.

is used for the Noun of Place and Time, e.g.

fromjixJj

"to meet:^Jtik* "place of meeting";

,.o,o O-o,ojfrom ix*4 "to collect (of water)": &uC*v "marsh";

from JJ> "to pray": Jjl/> "place of prayer".

Nouns of Instrument..

4. Nouns which denote the instrument used in an~uo.o it, G .o

action (iJ^t ^J) are formed after the patterns: ^Iw,

and idxix, e.g.

^ --'

G ,ofrom

gj<s"to open": _.ljci "a key";

from JJtf "to sweep": x^llCo "a broom";

from oj^ "to weigh": otj,y (for a|j_^)"a balance";

from ^ "to ascend":sliy (for KxSyo)

"a ladder".

The Plural of ^L and il*L> is. i*GC; of

e.g

Arabic Grammar.

242 Second Part.

The Diminutive.

5. The Diminutive (i*kaJl *J) is formed from

Oo,,triliteral nouns according to the pattern #&, e.g.

"little dog" from

In the case of words derived from Doubled or

Weak verbs the usual changes take place, e.g. fromGo,

shadow":

G - G ,..

from v_j|j (for y^j) "door":

from j& "youth": j&.

From quadriliteral nouns the form of the Diminutive

is JJUis, e.g.f' ,(i * O o , )

from ^.St "scorpionO c - J

Or if there are more letters, the form j^JLoe is

used, e.g.G ) o , O o - ,

from ^tas. "sparrow":

. If the noun has a Feminine ending, this endingis attached to the Diminutive, e.g.

from iuUi "fortress":

from(

-*-L "Salma", (name of a woman):

The following Diminutives should be noted:

from yl (for^I?) "father":^ (for JIJj) "little father";

from 2 (for ^i-1) "brother": J^i (for ^Ii-|)"little

brother";O o Gs,i-

from c>^>! "sister : JL^>| "little sister";

O o O~ 2 ,1 Go^,from

^j^ (for _^o) "son": ^^ (for ^^vo)"little son";

O-o Go G s,>

from i-ut or v^ivo "daughter": iuuo "hHtle daughter";

Thirty-fifth Lesson. 243

o ,* , > 2,s

from 9 J "thing": ^e^i (for ,^-i)or more frequently

ij^i, "a little thing".

Note. The Diminutives are often used to express endear-

ment or contempt. The form i3_^*s is often used with Proper

rrnames at the present time to express endearment, e.g. ^_y^

from xjjli; ,y^ from jOlaJf Axe; ^>^f- from &JJt

Exercise 67.

t ,-f >o -- *>.'<! i

o Oc! ^S JOb

.i)JLi i-o v-o ^u LJJ Jc

ol-

/ ij|.Xs* U^i UU'UM c^oli" ^AOA*.*>

, L^c I^'L^ (Less. 30, 11)

ll! tv3v^ JLJ!

(*oJI IJ^ ^ iLL5cloi (Accus., Less. 16. 4)

16*

244 Second Part

LJ

Exercise 68.

This little dog is very watchful. This little

man sweeps the room with the broom. I went to

my house and opened the door with the key. Beirut

is the residence of the Wali. Boy, weigh the wheatin the balance. The visiting of mosques and tombsis not allowed during the tune of prayer. I saw the

horses in the pasturage. dear Fatima, give me a

little of this bread. The customs of the East andthose (the customs) of the West are different. Whenthe king arrived, they fired the cannons. little

son, I ask success from God. I bought this bookin the bookshop.

Thirty-sixth Lesson.

(o^S J^ u^OThe Relative Adjective.

1. The ending ^ attached to a noun denotes

that a person or thing is related to, or connected with

it, generally in respect to a tribe, land, city, business

etc., e.g.s -- S --

vjj* "Arabs" (collective); ^^ "Arabian, an Arab";1 Soyax "Egypt, Cairo"; ^^OA "an Egyptian, a Cairene",Oo

' S"*.*fie "science"; ^^JLc "scientific";

jl "day"; "daily".

Thirty-sixth Lesson. 245

If the noun has the feminine ending ,this is

dropped in the formation of the Relative Adjective, e.g.

o, , 2o "nature"; +Ay "natural";

"art"; Uo "artificial";

j 5 .. ..

iJc "Mecca"; J^> "Meccan".

Letters added to the radicals in the formationo- 8 , -

of the noun sometimes drop, e.g. i^ux/> "city"; J.jw

"pertaining to a city", but not always, e.g. Js-Oc> "iron"

2

"iron" (adjective).

6 E j

The words i_jt "father" and +\ "brother", take backS -c

their original wdw again and so form ^c^j! "fatherly",2 -

^5^1 "brotherly".

If a noun ends in a or an(I , >j= ,

I--- r

o

^_1_), this is changed into tiaw before the ^__ e.g.

*o~ 2 -o, -o>

JL*X> "meaning" forms ^yjw "abstract"; Loo "world"

2 o>

forms I^^AJO "worldly".

The same is the case with the hanusa in the ending

\JL-, e.g. sUl "heaven" forms ^lil "heavenly", buts - ..

SUi "winter" forms ^x "wintry" (without o?i/}.

2 o_ 2 . o,.

From L*J.9 "France" are formed *o os and

2 .

French".

The Plurals of these adjectives are usually regular,

e.g. jrfltl "the Egyptians".

246 Second Part.

2. The Feminine of the Relative Adjectives often

adds to its ordinary meaning that of an abstract idea,

O^o 2-o Ga^oe.g. oL*o[ "man", j.l~oj.

"human", X-uL*of "humanity".

"God", J[ "divine", x "deity".*>**

' ~

2 o, Oio,^ "month", (.% "monthly", 'iLt^ "monthly

wages".

Adjectives.

3. The following forms of the Adjective (*> ^-J)have been already mentioned (Less. 10):

a) Joiii Active Participle.

o' -

b) J-oii (sometimes also used in Passive sense, e.g:

!uxs "killed").

c) 3^6.

d) o^*.

e) JJ^T (for Colours and Defects).

f) ']jPass. Part. (Less. 17, 4).

4. The following forms are also of common occur-

rence:

g) Jo6 especially from intransitive verbs of the

form JJti, e.g. ^JM> "difficult" from ^ju^> "to be

difficult".

6,^ 6 , * f *

h) jje, e.g. Q-JS*"beautiful" from ^--J*

"to be

beautiful".

i) Jj^ especially from intransitive verbs of the form

iS, e.g. ^ "joyful" from'^

"to be joyful".

j) ^ii, e.g.^ "naked".

Thirty-sixth Lesson. 247

G a, o s -

k) v3l* (intensive) e.g. v.jLxi' "addicted to lying"

from ^S^ "to lie".

Note. The verbs whose 'second radical is ^ or ^ changeG So. G-,

the form Jojti into J*A9 which becomes Jy3, e.g.:

from oL>(j)

"to be excellent"

"excellent";, - G-

rG- G

from v-jtb (^5),"to b good" vv^3 (for v^s-Ja and

"good".

5. The form &*$ is also used to indicate one who

exercises a trade or profession, e,g. Jlr (from J^r "to

G s - G s -

carry") "a porter", and so jl^> "a baker"; J?L3- "a

tailor"; 9UL, "a water-carrier". These words use the

Sound plural, e.g.

'

oj&, o-5J^ etc>

6. The Elative (j-y^ixjT L\ see Less. 10, 37) is

always formed from the three radicals, e.g. Ju^b (Root9 * o G * ^

>) "long"; 3_>^>! "longer"; js-o* "excellent"

more excellent".

Some adjectives, such as the Participles of the

Derived forms and words of the form Joist cannot form

Elatives. In these cases such phrases as the followingare used:

G-OJ ,,0x>>-oj^gJcs* "diligent" tol$a>f ytft

"more diligent" lit.

more as to diligence.>-o #.*.*.,&}*,\ "black" !ojj* j^i! "blacker" lit. stronger as

to blackness.

7. If the second part of the comparison is not anoun but a whole sentence or an adverbial determination,

248 Second Part.

it is preceded by U* (for U ^ with a verb or the

Preposition ^ with a suffix of the Personal Pronoun, e.g.

(If. - *' _0,0,o }*(>. -,G

(J*\ o& Li* j^Jl sjikll *W "the weather is

pleasanter to-day than it was yesterday" or:

jlj^J?v_ftLJ! l^5l lit. "than it yesterday".

Exercise 69.

S\ Li jJb xxiL ^1 UJ LljN!c ,

(Proverb)

(Proverb)

Thirty-eeventh Lesson. 249

Exercise 70.

This water-carrier is more diligent to-day than he

was yesterday. My ink is blacker than yours (thy

ink). We arrived in Cairo by rail. The Egyptianis cleverer than the Syrian. If God will, the weather

will be better to-morrow than it was yesterday. This

Englishman is prouder (stronger as to pride) than that

Frenchman. The porters are more diligent than the

tailors. The crowd at the festivities was greater than

we thought. We went further away than we in-

tended. This wine is excellent, it is more excellent

than that, which we drank yesterday.

Thirty-seventh Lesson.

1. Words may be divided according to their meaning

into: a) Class names ^lf\ JLJ): b) Proper names(puSty

2. The Class- names are divided into:

(,. > o e > *

a) Concrete(o^. ^J), whether Nouns as Jo^

6 ~ & -

"man", ^js "horse" or Adjectives as wJ^ "riding",

Jjl> "sitting".

*o, id Go

b) Abstract(^*iw fp whether Nouns as

^leGo. S ">'-

"science", J^s* "ignorance" or Adjectives as ^*O, Q ,

"understood", ,&> "concealed".

Abstract nouns when used in a general sense andwithout further determination always take the Article, e.g.

O- - >- * 5 E

iJLyo=i iicl^Jt "bravery is a virtue ;

so also with names of material,, e.g.

pGjJw LLsjlj L^S\ "gold and silver are two

metals".

250 Second Part.

Proper Names.

3. Proper names are always definite and so canO > , So-

be the subject of a Nominal sentence, e.g. -Jj^ jy^Zaid is a man".

Proper names are either Simple or Compound.The Simple may consist of three or more radicals,9 o- G-o -

e.g. AJJ Zaid; ^a*^ Ja'far.

The Compound may consist of:

a) Two names placed together, e.g. <Aiiju Ba'albek;

or b) A noun with a Genitive, e.g. jJJl .js^c 'Abdallah,

! Imruulkais,* -

or c) A sentence, e.g. t^ Jajlj' Ta'abbata sharran(lit.

he carried mischief i.e. a sword, under his armpits.

4. Personal names are of three kinds:O o G o, o-o -

a) The Name in the strict sense (t) as jo

b) The Kunya (iJS) or name containing a term

of relation such as "father, mother, brother etc.", e.g.

c) The Nickname (<^M) usually given to a man, when

he has grown up referring to some quality in him or

event with which he has become associated etc., e.g.

ilaj (properly "a duck"), iLas (properly "a 'basket").

Note 1. Some Proper Names always have the Article ast -'

O^lsM (lit. the ploughman).

Note 2. The name C0mar ia distinguished from cAmr bythe fact that the latter has always an otiose

+,at the end in the

Go, o, *o-Norn, and Gen., e.g. ^j*^ and

*j+&- The Accus. of both istj+c.

For the Declension of the Proper names and for exercises

see Less. 41.

Thirty-eighth Lesson. 251

Thirty-eighth Lesson.

staff.

OJU

The Feminine.

1. For the formation of the Feminine see Less. 2.

Certain Substantives are feminine without a special

ending:60*

c*>)t* earth, land.

Jjt viper.

% well.

war (sometimes

masc.).

house.

coat of mail (sometimes masc., alwaysmasc. when usedin the meaning of

"smock").

*?' /bucket (sometimes^ \ masc,).

^ mill.

s|wind (sometimes

*)I masc.).

6 oCsun.

/hyena (sometimes

| masc.).

scorpion.

axe.

i Paradise (masc.

Jwhen it means

I "park").

cup.

catapult (some-times masc.).

razor.

!i fire.

sandal.

soul (with the

meaning "per-son" in count-

ing, it is masc.

jUl "breath-

foot (of verse). is masc.).

2. The following words are of Common Gender:G -

[thumb (usually masc.). .M veil.

hare (usually fern.). finger.

252 Second Part.

man.

breast,

JjUS fox.

G - - f wing (usually^*"

I masc.).

s -Icondition (usually

j

^1 fern.).

3li> shop.

_1^L> shop.

&j 8Pirit -

Jus*** path.

ifjui night journey.

knife.

weapon.

(masc. with

) meaning"Sultan").

peace.

JLk ladder.

.

- -f heaven (masc. with

**( meaning "roof").

;*_^* market.

G ,

-oui barley.

G - fa measure used

, I for corn etc.

o\^o way.

peace.

morning.

natural disposition.

j~ghinder part.

6 ,(nuptials (masc.

, w^Jwith the meaning

I "bridal feast").

honey.

neck.

spider (generally

fern.).G ~w-s horse.

dUl boat.

so(kettle (generally

^ \ fern.).

Us neck.

^^5 bow.

Go,

^ people.

Js^f liver.

c\S shank.

o ,

OLJ tongue.

"^ (night (generally"***

i masc.).

jmusk (generally

[ masc.).

, . f intestines (general-^ ( ly masc.).

,JU salt (generally fern.).

f-,' f people (generally

u-M masc.).

Thirty-eighth Lesson. 253

3. Collectives denoting irrational living beings andfrom which nouns of unity ending in y (Less. 2, 4)

_

cannot be formed are Feminine, e.g. J^o- "horses"Joj

"camels".

4. Those Collectives from which nouns of unityQ O-

can be formed are of Common gender, e.g. J^ "bees",

idli" "a bee" etc. The names of the Letters of the

alphabet are also of Common gender, but are gene-j , ) o^e> > I o

rally used as Feminines, e.g. a^oai! oaJ^I

5. The Feminine ending ^L. (the *UJ{ *}ya* Jill

C- , jo., 3 2

ora-jj^aiLo ^Ll! see Intro. 6, Note 2) is used in the

following cases:

a) Some Substantives have it, e.g. ^$^<i>"remem-

brance"; LJO "world" (properly fem. of the Elative of

J,o "low"; LjjJt is used for "this present world"

in contrast with Sy>^! "the future world").

b) Adjectives of the form'

o^> take as their Fe-

mininejjti, e.g. otlcafr "angry", Fem.

(jr*x=* (but not

9 -o*. O

adjectives of the form O^U3 (with nunation), e.g. ol

"repentant", Fem.

c) The Feminine of the Superlative is of the form

<M e-g-

Ly "great"; _^H? "the greatest" (masc.); ^JJ^I

"the greatest" (fem.).

& "high'r

; jI5T "the highest" (masc.); LuH "the

highest" (fem.).

254 Second Part.

d) The following should also be noticed:

Masc. i^5! "the first"; Fern. j^M.

"the other";

ill "feminine"Lf7j (no Masc.)

J^ "pregnant"G s

6. The Feminine ending i.\ (the so-called JjJI

"the lengthened alif") is used:

a) with some Substantives, e.g. *L^w> "desert",

"greatness, pridev

.

b) with Adjectives of the form Jjii! denoting Co-

9 * ti

lours or Defects (Less. 10, 2), e.g. o_^wi "black", Fern.

ib^J.

7. Some Adjectives have no special ending for theG

Feminine, e.g. those of the form .J^*i when they haveo _ 0,0

a Passive meaning as J^os ii^l "a slain girl"; also

9 f "

those of the form Jye when they have an Active mean-G ) . '-' - o

ing as J _^^*^ x*jl "a patient girl"; also certain Ad-<3

jectives which can only refer to women as Jw*Ls

O (,} O -

"pregnant" ^-to-* "one who gives suck", jsL"barren".

Note. Foreign words are treated as Femininee, even when

they were originally Masc., e,g. _jj^Lai3 "consulate",

"protest" (legal).

Exercise 71.

^5/6 ^ (Less. 15, 3 a) U3 (supply: J b)Us

Thirty-eighth Lesson. 255

^S u ^.i aJ to LkLji i

i

LI : JO vl^ Lo

U3 ^ Lajf ^La JIS

l> Us $ L 1 Jo <

IJo U Js vJlS 0/ Le J J^cl A-oUJt l U

i^u! ^JJ! Us JI5 oU Jis cUu] ^ ib> us JS

ol^l life oU

JJU T Jfe

256

b.lj5 auvXi (jo Q* J^s k>LtoUaxJij aJ JjJs *ju ulS .tjot

Exercise 72.

When I went out of the city, I met two women,the one of them (was) white and the other black.

The lazy girl has not done what I commanded her. -

This world is the house of transitoriuess, and the other

world is the house of eternity. The sheikh gave memany horses. The memory of the friend will be

lasting. No tree is found in the desert. The

condition of my friend is notdjlJj) good. My soul

yearns to meet thee (for thy meeting). Hind is a

patient girl. The pride of men will be punished.The minister has received the highest grade of this order.

Thirty-ninth Lesson.

(oj&ai; JST Jjijf)

Number.

1. For the three Numbers: Singular (oJL), Dual (e&)O ci *

and Plural (^>) see Lessons 3, 4 and 5.

2. The Sound Plural (JL, |^) Masculine is

used for:

1) Masculine Proper Names (except those which

end ing), e.g. ^iC.

Thirty ninth Leason. 257

2) Diminutives of Proper Names and Class Names

which indicate rational beings, e.g. ,-^t (Dimin. of

111), Plur. ^I*I; J^>j "little man", Plur.Q_jJU>j-

3) Participles, which form their Fern, in s, e.g.

j' "writer", Plur. O>*J'^;jy& "official", Plur.OJy_y>U;

> J

"believer", Plur.^^j-u^.

'5s-4) Nouns of the form ,31*3 which denote workers

O 5

at a trade or profession (Less. 36, 5), e.g. -bLi.

"tailor", Plur. >blli.

5) Relative Adjectives (Less. 36, 1), e.g.

"Egyptian", Plur. o &f*.

6) Adjectives of the form jJist denoting Elatives,

e.g. ^l Plur. a /^Ti.

The following Plurals should be noted:

6 o O-- i * <>

^1 son (for yj), Plur. oyLj (also slLl)

o - - -*- .

,J!cworld, ^^^

O^! earth, o-^9 ^also

^!;')

Jpf family, Q^f (also

master,

o,,Also the Fern, iu** "year", Plur. _^*/ (as well as

Arabic Grammar.

258 Second Part.

3. The Sound Plural Feminine is used for:

1. Feminine Proper Names, e.g. Jvi>, Plur.

also for Masculines ending in, e.g. xilk, Plur. o^bf

G- \.

2) Many Class names ending in g, e.g. sjb> "city-

quarter", Plur. o^L>.

3) The Feminines of Adjectives, whose Masc. takesG ,

the Sound Masc. Plur., e.g. oLjtf "female writers",

- G S c

"tailoresses", o^a* "Egyptian women".

4) Adjectives the Feminine of which end in \$

or *!_^ (Less. 38, 5, 6), e.g. ^'^S "greatest" (fern.),

G ,.* > * "- O^,o-Plur. o'y.*/ (rare); i!y^> "green" (fern.), Plur. ol^^ai-.

5) Names of the Letters of the alphabet and ofOt O^SOs^j

the months, e.g. vjji "alif", Plur. olllt; ^-^ the month

Muharram, Plur. oU^.6) Verbal Nouns of the Derived forms, e.g. J^Jtl

O ^ i, O i , -

"written work", Plur. oLaJu"; vJyaj "disposal", Plur.

But the Verbal Nouns of the II. and IV. forms

have also Broken Plurals, e.g. jj_^xaj' "picture", Plur.

C- - o'

, ,

"false news", Plur.

7) Diminutives of words denoting things and irra-

G o-* e ,o- >

tional beings, e.g. ^* "little dog", Plur. oL*K.

8) Foreign words, even when they denote male* G .., - - -

persons, e.g. lit (Turkish) "Aga", Plur. oJ_^t; (L^lyi-)

i>!_^ (Persian) "Sir", Plur. ol>!^; J^o (5La) (Tur-

kish) "Bey", Plur. ol.

Thirty-ninth Lesson. 259

Note. ^iXoJLS (Less. 38,7, Note) makes Plur.

Another form is A-Ju^i, PIor. oL*

Note the two following words:

~j.Us>

ubath"3Plur. oULU-; SL^, "heaven", Plur.

or o!_^) cf. Less. 36, 1.

Note 1. The Sound Fern. Plural of the Participles (espe-

cially of the Pass. Part.) is often used with a Neuter meaning,G - ^ G .- > o ^ O , o^

e.g. oLufc' or o!oy>-jx "existing things", olijL^ "created

things".'

Note 2. Of words derived from verbs that end in ^ or ^5o - - o \,

typical Sound Fern. Plurals are: from s^Lo (also written H^Jlo

cf. Intro. 6, Note 3) "prayer", Plur. o!_^>; from U6 "youngG --. G ,.,

girl", Plur. oLxs or oj^Xs.

Broken Plurals.

4. The most frequently used forms of the Broken

Plural (jZ&t i^>) are:

A. From triliteral nouns.

1. jjd (rare).

O , G Go,Fjom Jo:l5; e.g. wobo "companion", Plur. w^5

.

2. ji'.

a) From jJS (adjectives denoting colours and de-

fects), e.g. ^]p'blue", Plur.^j; !>jTi "black", Plur.

3^1; ^f "white", Plur. JL> (for ja^);

b) From *& (fern, of the preceding), e.g. Ms^J

"blue" (fern.), Plur.j.

260 Second Part.

c) From jJS, e.g. jslTl "lion", Plur. oJLf; jfo (for

Jjo) Chouse", Plur. J3o, cf. Note to 5.

3. 3i.G-o G.o- G-o

From xUa (rarely *!), e.g. K*La "piece", Plur.

G - Ga "G-O G'

O ^

Ja3; iJU (for idUU) "religion", Plur. JJU; H^ "mannerG-'G^O- 'G,'

of life", Plur. ^; x-^> "tent", Piur.^^3-.

-OJ -o> ,> s

a) From iJLi, e.g. x*^ "rank", Plur. v^J,; iU

G _> G^ j G - >

"dome", Plur. vJ: s,^^ "form", Plur. j^a.

b) From (cf. Less. 38, 5), e.g. -l "other"

(fern.), Plur. ^>\ (without nunation); ^jIxJl"the greatest"

(fern.), Plur. j.

G*o^c From iJixi (especially from words with medial

3or ^ e.g. xl/o "dynasty", Plur. 5JJ; i^S "village",

Plur. ^.d) From xlls (rare), e.g. iU "beard", Plur.^

5. Jo

a) From 5l*3 (but not from words in which the

second radical is doubled or from those that end in

3 or ^) t e.g. olir "book", Plur. wJb'.o

b) From J^oe (but not from words, the third radical

*

of which is ^ or^5), e.g. ^^ "way", Plur.

G. G- G *>c) From iJu*9, e.g. xjjj^i "city", Plui\ Jw*.

9

Thirty-ninth Lesson. 261

6 , ,

d) From Jjja, e.g. J^ "messenger, ambassador",

Flur. jJJ.Go, G , , Go, Oj>

e) From Joe or Joe (rare), e,g. u&~uroof ', Plur. ^jJu,.

Go* 6 ,, G ,E

Note. Joe is often met with beside Jots (see 1), e.g. ^X**l

G tt> G o

"Jion", Plnr. Jsj*l or %Xw5.

6. Jue.

G o i Go.' G- Go,

a) From Joe, e.g. v_Ji "dog", Plur. v

G ; s

"lance", Plur. _.U; ; vj "wine-skin", Plur.' '

- ,

"garment", Plur. LjUi;g-^ "wind", Plur.

l^.

G > - G /- O *.

b) From Joe, e.g. Jcj^ "man", Plur. JLa*,.'

G ,- G,-- G - ,

c) From Joe and iJLs, e.g. Jsx> "mountain", Plur.

3u>; ili^ "neck", Plur. vji,; ^b (for j^3) "house",

Plur.jlo (with the meaning "land").

A

d) From J^i (but not when used with Passive

G ', O -

meaning), e.g. ^..y "generous", Plur.^ty.

e) From idi', e.g. sS,' "piece of paper", Plur. ^.Oo- O^o-. -

f) From ^ixs, e.g. iLs^j "sheep" Plur. TL*j.

Gfc, Go, G-a) From jJJ, e.g. vXxc "slave", Plur. ^^c..

G - G , G

b) From Joe, e.g. ;1^> "ass", Plur. -tg^s*-

8. J^i.Oo^ Oci-- O>jOo

a) From Joe, e.g. vIJ| "heart"; Plur.v-^JLii; jjlc

'O O o , G j > g /"science", Plur.

,._^Lc; ^^ "troop", Plur.

262 Second Part.

"right", Plur.gj&>\ tH> "bead", Plur. JL3,J; ^G > >

"house", Plur. o_^-o.G .- G ,E G >& G .,

b) From Jj*, e.g. Js~t "lion", Plur. o^t; ^^JU

"king", Plur. ^Ju.

c) From J^tli (but not when second radical is

G

doubled, or the medial radical is , orL?), e.g. j^>lu,

"witness", Plur.

9. Joe.G - G . G= , G -

From Joib, e.g. ,SLs> judge ,Plur. ^s>\ (JU

"sleeper", Plur. JJ

10. 3&G - G - 5 s >

Only from Ju;l5, e.g. ^tf "writer", Plur. oUtf.

11. *l*i.

Only from .j^'J when it denotes rational beingsG ,

and has not5

or ^ as third radical, e.g. ^jK "writer",

Plur. if; ^5L "seller", Plur. &j) (for -^11).

12. xiii.

Only from J^ when the third radical is ^ or ^and the word denotes rational beings, e.g. j!5 "governor",

Plur. s% (for xljj); oais "judge", Plur. sUaS (for iU*ii).

13. Si.Go.

a) From Joii in words with medial 3 or ^5, e.g.

^ "ox", Plur. s

Thirty-ninth Lesson. 268

b) From Juis when the third radical is 3 or ^, e.g.

(for^l) "brother", Plur. *y>i.O * -. G 0- o

c) From jbe, e.g. ^l^. "gazelle", Plur. iJ;c..

d) From Jyje when the third radical is 3 or ^, e.g.

G G, o

(for *x^o) "boy", Plur. iU*x3.

14. Joel.

a) From Jj6, e.g. ^' "sea", Plur.

Plur. ^111

b) From JJ6, e.g.jJ^,

"foot", Plur.J^-jt.

c) From jli, e.g. jJs "bolt", Plur. JJsl

d) From Femmines, which do not end in s, and

which have a long vowel between the second andG - G j oc 5 ^

third radical, e.g. ^o "arm", Plur.^o!; ^-^^ "oath",

>oE

(and iL

16. jJb (rare).

From jli when the second radical is doubled, e.g.

G,

"uncle", Plur.

n. u.

a) From JJ6 (jJii especially, when the first radical

is ^ or the middle radical is ^ or ^}, e.g. (ja^i

"person",

264 . Second Part.

o og G , o ^&s o c, -

Plur. u^Ls^t; c^o "time", Plur. oli^5; O>J "colour",

Plur. Otjj]; *Jj "day", Pliy. j[CT (for plj!,]); ?^Ji "thing",^ o j: *O o

Plur. i'uui! (without nunation, cf. Less. 41, 2 a); Joo

"suckling", Plur. ui; "spirit", Plur.

6^- G , ,

b) From Jjii, e.g. ^^ "cause", Plur.

O^, O^osOei(for ,3^) "condition", Plur. 3[^>!; ^jl (for

Plur. 9Uj

c) From J^li, e.g. ^^L^ "friend", Plur.

o'

-

d) From J^ots (not with Passive sense); e.g.

"noble", Plur. \3y't^ (for^^) "dead", Plur.

e) Note specially ^xc "enemy", Plur. 9t

z G -

18.

a) From 5lii, e.g. ^Ij^ "food", Plur.

O,'c6 O , -

"physic", Plur.iu^ol; -.^L- "weapon", Plur. K^JUt; ^[

>4

Imam, leader of prayer", Plur. 'xj? (for xMll); 9^G, ^, O -> G^ oc

"vessel", Plur. lyoJ; v-jf^' "dust", Plur.*jy>!.

b) From J^*i (especially with Adjectives, the second

radical of which is doubled, or of which the third radicalG , G, os O

is 3 or13), e.g. Uuc, "loaf", Plur. ioul

proof, Plur. Sol (for S?of); j^ "valuable, dear", Plur.

= S G- oS

pl (forbj^t).

G j , G > , ,

c) From Jyd, e.g. o^+c "column", Plur.

G (i

d) Note specially ot3 "valley", Plur.

Thirty-ninth Lesson. 265

19.

From J^oc (especially from roots with doubled second

radical, or with final ^ or ^), when it refers to male

O of O .

persons, e.g. (jJvX-o"friend", Plur. iUxot; <~**+L> "phy-

sician", Plur. illbf (for *LJI); Jet "rich", Plur. *Lji].

20. ji.6

a) From Jyjii usually with Passive meaning, e.g.

- - o - C- , ,o,xs "slain", Plur. Jj6; *0j> "wounded", Plur.

u<~> *:

dead", Plur. j,

b) From Sui, e.g. ^i^J 'idle", Plur.

21. iiis.

a) From J4** (f mal6 persons but not in words

with doubled second radical or ending in 5 or ^}, e.g.

^ ''minister", Plur.i\^.; ^J& "poor", Plur. t\A.

e , c- ^ . *

b) From j^li, e.g. ^cui "poet", Plur.

c) Note specially &L)J> "Caliph", Plur.

22. ;ii.O o.

a) From Joe (especially from words with medial

J, e.g. Jb:

(for jy) "fire", Plur. J^J; J (for

"brother", Plur. .

e 0^ o

b) From Joe (medial J, e.g. o^s "large fish",

Plur.

266 Second Part.

c) From u, e.g. f "gazelle", Plur. i;

"boy", Plur. ^Uii.O 2 - -

d) From Ju^, e.g. ^^ "boy", Plur. oLO G

'- G

e) From J^cls, e.g. JaiL> "wall", Plur.

^ - ^ .

a) From Jy*, e.g. jJb "district", Plur.JjJb.

b) From J^tli (used as substantive, but not medial

3 or^5), e.g.

J^li"rider", Plur. o'il^; C.U (for sljJb)

"youth", Plur.^Li.

c) From ^lii, e.g. ll^ "brave", Plur. ^1*^.

d) From JjSi (Colours and Defects), e.g. ^1* "lame",

Plur. *^.Exercise 73.

^ ^5 J-i

ij txi *j L^x j to

(see Less. 38, 7)

Thirty-ninth Lesson. 267

cr

* .* -- &S , ^ G

fyj Jj.0*! ^

g

j^j ioj^j i| 3

'

(supply: "good!" Less. 47, 6)

>I

Exercise 74.

The Commander of the Faithful sent ambassadorsto the kings. The governors are the officials of the

Caliphs. Praise (belongs) to God, the Lord of the

worlds. I have not seen my friends for (since) five

years. There were many vegetables in the market.

We sat down to take (3(S VI.) the food and drink

we had with us (what was with us of foods and drinks).- Five prayers on each day are incumbent on the

Moslems. The highway robber (cutter of the ways)demanded money from us. The manner of life

(Plur.) of the first (Plur.) will be a warning to the last

(Plur.j. A preacher wished to say, "Improve yourhearts", and he said, "Skin your dogs". We said

farewell to our (the) dear friends. Kings have pages(youths) and slaves. In Beirut there are manyschools for boys.

Second Part.

Fortieth Lesson.

Broken Plurals of triliteral nouns continued.

24. ifcty.o o -

'

.-,d

a) From j^clj, e.g. L^'6 "rider", Plur.^ly; Jj

coast", Plur. J*=>[^*.O- '- O^ > ^

b) From jJUli, e.g. xiobs- "novelty", Plur.

i ~ O , i^-A3_> (for XjLix3L>) "nobles", Plur. u^^ (for

"slave-girl", Plur. ty>- (for ^ty?-) cf. Less. 41.

25. JJUi.

From Feminine nouns, which have a long vowel*" >

between the second and third radicals, e.g. ^_^>:old

J--O,, > * , * . ,

woman", Plur._J^S; xJw^ "letter", Plur.

"wonderful thing", Plur. ^o^.

Note specially -^xa "pronoun", Plur.

26. (with Article

a) From ^Sils, e.g. ^!^Ac "maiden", Plur. J !L\C (with

Article^lA*!?).

b) From jjJ, e.g. ,^3 "legal decision", Plur. 3jiO o - *G oS

c) Note specially A-J "night", Plur. JLJ; J^l

"people, family", Plur. fy "inhabitants"; y^J "earth",

Plur. {l "lands".

Fortieth Lesson. 269

27.

a) Is used with 26 a, b; so ^!Ac and u^Ls.

b) From JoU (Feminine, but not that of the Super-

lative), e.g. (jl> "pregnant", Plur. JL>.

c) From ^i, e.g. ^ilr "idle", Plur. iLLr.

d) From ijL*i (with final ^ or^5), e.g. pJ> "gift",

Plur. Cup; xlu "fate, death", Plur. ClU; iUc,' "flock",

Plur.jilej "subjects".

e) From xitli (with medial ^ and also final s or^c),

e.g. 'i^ "corner", Plur.bl^'.

B. Broken Plurals of quadriliteral nouns.

1. The three forms that occur have been mentioned

already hi Less. b.

28.

"star", Plur.vlj'ly'; slbli "bridge", Plur.

Nouns formed from triliteral roots by prefixing

o, j.

and t take the same forms of Plural as quadri-

literals, hence the forms: Jodtf, J^l and ^' e.g.

iJ^p' "experience", Plur. ^f^', c*-^ "school", Plur.

J^ (for JJb?) "place", Plur. JL# (for JJi>');

"the greatest", Plur. (31 "the nobles".

29.

From quadriliterals, which have a long vowel be-

O - o I

tween the third and fourth radical, e.g. ol^i*- "Sultan",

Plur. ^xki-1; Ju^* "lamp", Plur

270 Second Part.

, - - o ~

"coffer", Plur. /-ijjUjo; ^U "window", Plur.

^c~ "throne", Plur.( ~\j>', '^.^ "desert", Plur. ^U.

So (as in 28) from triliterals with prefixes arise

the forms J^Ui', J**fcUx and JtgclsT, e.g. jj_^oj' "picture",

Plur.Jjj'uai' (cf. Less. 39, 2); ZliL "key", Plur. ^oUx;

"letter", Plur. J-uulX*; jwJl/t "crown", Plur. JuJI??;

"false news", Plur. U^f,! (cf. Less. 39, 2).

> S~ * > ,

There is also a form J^cl^s, e.g. u-ysls- "buffalo",

Plur. JLyo!^>; ^S "law", Plur.^-Jl^S.

Note specially: ^iLo "dinar", Plur.._J-ota; O|^JO

"diwan, collection of poetry",

30. xJJ

a) From many Relative Adjectives (cf. Less. 36, 1),So, O-^S-o*

e.g. jj^w "Moor", Plur./O^'UM; j^t "Armenian", Plur.

G, ,2*' S . o- O- --

Xix^h ^50!job "man of Bagdad", Plur.

b) From certain quadriliteral nouns indicating

persons (whether with long vowel before the last radicalO a -

or not), especially from Foreign words, e.g.^L> "giant",e. ., , o , o * G..-S

Plur. BjjU^; oLcwl (Persian) "teacher", Plur.

G j

' ^,^"philosopher", Plur. Ka^iLs; ^aiu-t "bishop",

Plur. x&l!; SSi "angel", Plur.

Note 1. In nouns that contain more than four radicals

O > * o-

the extra letters generally fall out, e.g. o^Xxc "spider", Plur,

, o , > , >

v O i-ie, but not always, e.g. -4^-J' "interpreter", Plur.

Fortieth Lesson. 271

Note 2. Many nouns have different forms of BrokenG o.,

Plural with different meanings (see Less. 5, 3, Note 2), e.g. ,-**.

G,oc G ,,

"eye, spring, notable person", Plur. ,-rff-^ and n,***"eyes,

o , 035 GO. G .

springs", (J-kcf "notables"; ^Xxt "slave, servant", Piur. Jy^G > o G .

and Oy^t "slaves", oUc "servants of God".

Note 3. From some Plurals a second Plural is formed,G ..

sometimes Sound, sometimes Broken, e.g. /afjJs "way", Plur,G,, G.,, G. . 02

j^jto,Plar. of the Plur, olS-b; Jo "hand", Plur. Joi, Plur. of

,S - O, _ 5,E

Plur. Obi; Sli[ "vessel", Plur. &-u!, Plur. of Plur.^1.1.

2. In many Relative Adjectives the Feminine endinga gives the sense of the Plural. (Properly it is an

abstract Collective cf. Less. 36, 2), e.g. ^^ "mariner",

iJ^. "mariners"; ^^o "Sufi (mystic)", iUs^o "Sufis".

In like manner the Feminine of some words of

the form 3ls is used, e.g. ^{JS "bowman, Cawass",

X-w5y> "bowmen, Cawasses".

3. The following Irregular Plurals should be noted :

2 G -- G *

.1 "mother", Plur.

j

"mouth" (cf Less. 7, 2), Plur. i^i.

G . G^_ O ^oS G , G

9U "water" (for U for y),Plur. s^xj and!

uyo (for 8 !

*aJi "lip" (for x^i), Plur. $lLi.

- G,,, 9- G-lw "sheep" (for *P^ii), Plur. Lii and six*;.

G< - G --

iixi "maid-servant", Plur. Suj and ot^oi..

s- o - G - o G , o

Hlt "woman", Plur. 9LJ and s^J and

272 Second Part.

^Llj^ "man", Plur. ^Gl usuallyGo,

*2 >

"bow", Plur. H> and

Exercise 75.

15,1*lj ofj

ji

0^*0

j.yI [>.

viUi5 * .Xj ^A;/ JUil 5 Li

a*> U ^ U, v^jJ! ^U UJU oli'

IJ^P kl i ^1 lbJ I^- ! L

Lo *> U yUi

s

Fortieth Lesson. 273

tot jiJK

cr

'

u

Jo

hyall

Exercise 76.

A certain philosopher had a slave (from the slaves),and one day the philosopher said to his slave, "I wishto go to one of the baths." The soldiers bound the

prisoneid with (the) chains. This man was one of

the dearest of his friends, Who will pay the expensesof the journey? In this land I saw many schools,in which the scholars learn the sciences; and their

teachers are of the learned. Inform me soon of th

condition (Plur.), for thy friendship is dearer than

existing things. Kiss the hands of the brothers and-

sisters. The most honourable ruler and the mostnoble Sultan, possessor of the greatest happiness and

of the highest (Superlative of U) rank, God perpet-

uate his days and raise his standards! Amen. --- All

the travellers both men and women (what was be-

tween the men and the women) were smitten with

seasickness. The rains pour down like the mouthsof the wine-skins.

Arixbic Grammar.

274 Second Part.

Forty-first Lesson

Declension of the Noun.

f-cl)8ee Lessons 6 and 7.

1. Nouns are either Indeclinable ({/**), e.g.

"Cautionl", ^iLi "Qatam" (name of a woman), or De-Q ,*o>

clinable(uyt*).

The Declinable are either Triptotes (O^AO**) i.e.

*e > ,

having three case-endings (Less. 6, 2 a), e.g. J^ "a

man", or Diptotes (OJAOJU .*i) i.e. with two case-

endings only (Less. 6, 2 b and Note 1), e.g.

"idle", *c "Omar".

2. The following are Diptote:

a) Broken Plurals of the forms ^SUsf, j.*i

S, JJUi and j^JUi also the Plurals

3^1 (from Jjf "first"), ^1 (from ^T "other") and

(from 9^ "thing").

b) The Feminine forms *S&, jli, jis and

(Less. 38, 5, 6), e.g. t\*Je "desert", tl> "white",

"angry", \gjf& "remembrance", ^Jl/ "greatest".

c) Nouns of the form jjd>], the Feminine of which

is slxs or joe (denoting colours, defects or elative), e.g.

i3j*f "black", ^S\ "greater".

Forty-first Lesson. 275

6 -OS

On the other hand J^f "widower" makes a Feminine

6.,oXJLs.1 "widow".

d) Adjectives of the form oSL*i the Feminine of

which is jS, e.g. OL^ (Fern, lafc) "angry".

On the other hand ^Uxi (Fern. xiUxi) "companionat table".

e) The Numerals which end in s when they stand

alone as pure numbers, e.g. xx~ v^*aj x&Li "three is

the half of six".

f) Most Proper names (see Less. 37, 3, 4) includ-

ing all that end in whether Masc. or Fern. e.g.

tejo (masc.), iuJal^ x&; all that end in t>\ or ^JL

e.g. *E/j, J&*\ those that end in ^!_, e.g. ^ulll,

oUii; also the Proper names that correspond in form

with a verbal form whether Perfect or Imperfect, e.g.

^Zii (name of a tribe), J^>t, ^-jjj;also many others as

1U, ^J^ (name of a woman). ^>^\& .

Proper names on the other hand are TriptoteG o- S o G o i O G,

when they are 1) of the forms Joe, Jue, Joe, e.g. *x^,

"Zaid", 3!iU" e

Amr", -jj "Noah", jJ0 (but also il*

and so with other names of women); 2) originally

Participles or Adjectives, e.g. ^- (properly "beauti-

ful"). iAl(properly "happy"),o{jj (properly "desired"),

(properly "praised"); 3) certain single names as

6,0- .

etc.

276 Second Part.

3, All Diptotes, when they are made definite by the

Article or a Possessive suffix or a following Genitive

are treated as Triptotes (see. Lees. 6, 3), e.g.

ftl*37 ^ from the matters,

, from his matters,**

from the boy's matters.

4. The nouns, which end in in _ (arising from

iwun, iyun and uyun) e.g. cto (for _^!o) "caller", ydsO 6i

(for fcls), "judge", (for ^ ."wish", change:

iwun, iwin, iyun, iyin, uyun, uyin into In,

iwu, iyu, uyu, into o,

iwi, iyi, uyi, into i,

iwu, iyu, uyu, iwi, iyi, and.uyi into I (cf. Less. 6, 3,

Note 2 and Less. 28, 2) e.g.

"judge" Nom. and Gen. Sing.

,, Accus. Sing.

"two judges" Nom. Dual.

Gen. and Accus. Dual.

li ''judges" Nom. Plur.

Gen. and Accus, Plur.

With Article: ^liff "the judge" or "of the judge"

Nom. and Gen. Sing.

.Accus. Sing.

The Broken Plurals, which are Diptotes and are

derived from ver13 .--hose third radical is 5 or ^5, have

as endings m the Nom. and Gen. in, in the Aceus. iya,

e.g. from slU- "slave girl", Plur. Nom. and Gen. ,U>f

Forty-first Lesson. 277

Accus.(^f^s-;

from(^^s& "legal decision", Plur. Nom.

and Gen. j&, Accus. ^Lxi.

5. Nouns, which end in an (written J_!L or ^5- )

as Uac "stick" (for j>oc), ^vX^ "guidance" (for ^JN^),

(JtL*2s>"Mustafa" (for ^0*3*) are alike in all cases of

the Singular; so also are the Diptotes as (j^o "re-

membrance", LOO "world".

o

6. The nouncr

jt "son" drops' its alif, when it

conies between the name of the son and that of the

father. The Proper name preceding it loses its nun-

ation, e.g.

jj+s. ^j j^ "Zaid the son of 'Anir". But if the

^1 happens to begin a new line the alif is retained.

It is also retained if the word ^1 is used predicatively

(cf. Intro. 11, 4 b), e.g.o ., } a Go,

22+B ^jj sXfj"Zaid is the son of

c

Amr".

Exercise 77.

> - ^ - , > af- > * o * o> , s , ,

(see. Less. 7, 2) l3

^vX.a!

(jf^Jb -J/ ^U-JL,A-JLt jo^i

e Li ^o,

(

,

c5Ul (oJlXs tjai^ bf L ol

278 Second Part.

&U! Js+c Ll b J,

Exercise 78.

Strike him with the stick. Five is the half of

ten. The Caliph el-Mu'tasim was acquainted L.I?

and Imperf.) withC

AH, the son of el-Junaid el-Iskaft

and el-Muf

tasim said to the son of Hainmad, "Go to

the son of el-Junaid and tell him to prepare to be-a-

guest to me" and he came to him and said to him,"Prepare to be-a-guest of the Commander of the Faithful,for to be a guest of Caliphs is a great thing (is great).

It was said to a boy, "Does not thy teacher cloths

thee?" And he answered, "Verily, if my teacher

had a house filled with needles, and Jacob came andwith him the prophets as intercessors and the angelsas pledges, to borrow from him a needle with whichto sew the garment of his son Joseph, which was torn,he would not lend (Perf.) him it; then how should heclothe me?" _______

Forty-second Lesson.

The Use of the Cases.6 >o

(A word in the Nominative is called p^y>, in the

O>o^ 6jo- jo-Accusative wa^a, in the Genitive s? or

Forty-second Lesson. 279

1. The Nominative(jsj)

is used for:

a) The Subject in a Verbal sentence (Jcli) and that

of a Nominal sentence (sSoJLo). See Less. 11,6.

b) The Predicate of the Nominal sentence

See Less. 11, 6.

c) The word following the Particle of Address Ljl

(always used with the Article) and after G (in the Sing,

without nunation), when it is not made definite by a

following word. See Less. 48.

d) The Attribute of, or word in Apposition to

another word in the Nominative.a

Note. The Predicate of sentences beginning with ,-.t or the

kindred particles (see below 2 h) is put in the Nominative.G o -

2. The Accusative (v^xaj) is used for:

a) The Object ( 4^0), e.g.

"I struck Zaid".

"Thee we serve".

sJiijio"I struck him".

Note 1. In Arabic most verbs denoting *'to come" arew . -.'Go > O OS

transitive. The transitive verb is called ^.Xjuii J*ftJl, the

intransitive ^j^OT JoUII.

Note. 2. For the government of theAccus. by the VerbalNoun and the Participle see Less. 34, 6, 8.

b) The Absolute Object or Cognate Accusative

see Less. 34, 7.

Go,c Determinations of Time and Place O& see

Less. 45, 5, e.g. ^jf "to-day", {j; "to-morrow",

"in the morning", xL Jw "(during) a whole year".

280 Second Part.

"he looked right and left", t^ U VsU,

"he travelled by land and sea".

To this class belong many words in the Accus.

used as Prepositions, e.g. ^jtL> "behind", *i "above",

^^=' "under", etc.

d) Determinations of the Aim or Purpose, e.g.

2 Ul'Jl ^3 "I rose to honour him"- (cf. Less. 34, 6).

e) Determinations of Condition (3ls-) for which the

Participle and Verbal Noun are used generally, e.g.

\Ls\jsL>. "he cauae riding".

O o,

f) Specification (j^i) with the meaning "in regard

to, in", e.g.o - o * o >, o O c.

3J cr LJLc ^1 Jv.)

"Zaid is greater in regard

to knowledge thanc

Amr".

ill! w^3 "be good in regard to soul" i.e. "rejoice

heartily".

g) The Predicate (^>] of and its sisters (cf.

Less. 30, 12), e.g.

yj>.j JJj ^ "Zaid was a man".

h) The Subject after the following particles:

o \ "truly", oa "for", ^yCJ "but";

^1 "that", ^ "because", ^ "as if";

v^yJ "0 would that!", J*^ "perhaps"; e.g.

*jfe LXJ-' ."{ or tSu: *jl5 ...I "truly, Zaidl^ "J C'g 'V l^ iwJs

i)The noun after the ^ that denies absolutely

jJL=S ^^IlJ^' i.e. ^ for the denial of the class) cf.

Forty-second Lesson. 281

Less. 45, 3 p 3. The noun loses its nunation, e.g.

yu $ "there is no escape", JLi ^ "there is no doubt",

*^JiJI ^, (or xJLs? $) jo i "there is no escape from

the matter" i.e. "the matter is absolutely necessary".

j) The Noun after the Particle of Address b if it is

followed by a Genitive, e.g. Jj? jJI G "0 Abdallah",

U-^jlT ^J!"0 ruler of the Faithful 1"

k) The Noun after the Conjunction +, when it

i * %, G o^

means "with", e.g. l.t3 Oyj,"Zaid with his brother".

1)A word, which is an Attribute of, or in Appo-

sition to another word in the Accus.

Note 1. Many verbs take two objects in the Accus. e.g.

O, jOrf,

oUik "I thought Zaid (to be) a physician".

Note 2. The Accusative often stands in single expressionsespecially Exclamations ,

where a verb is to be supplied, e.g,* , * * G? O

&$*2 ^5>t "welcome!", where ^X> is understood, i.e. "yout O -

have come to friends and an agreeable place''; ^Lj-* "slowly",

where ^J^A\ "go" is understood.

2- ,

3. The Genitive > or <aa> is used iu the

following:

a)A Noun which is connected with another by

"

^

Annexation(wU3|),

see Less. 6, 4.

Note. Arabian grammarians say that the Xi^/tot, has the

force of one of the prepositions u, ^ or ^5, e.g. J^ *X^ =o-

> .i<i-iO? > ' '

jo^J 1,5^X1 1 (^UJ ! "the boy who (belongs) to Zaid";

,'

o 60, o,o

i*.^; "a garment of silk'; Vj*5 Z

"the prayer of sunset".

282 Second Port.

b) A Noun after a Preposition (^ ^j>} see Less. 44.

c) A Noun which is an Attribute of or in Appo-sition to another in the Genitive.

In connection with a) it should be noted that

some nouns combined with a Genitive in Arabic corre-

spond to English Adjectives, Adverbs etc. :

1) 3^ "whole", i.e. "all, every, the whole", e.g.

o. i . * {, i - ,0.0 i. ,

fjj JJ" "every day ; Js^f,, ^S "each; juuxlt Jj' "the

whole city"; yJJJl J^"a^ men" (also ^f LT^O;

^ JJ" "everyone who"; U ]s "aU that (Rel.)".

Similarly **=> and &$ "whole" are used for "all",

e.g. (jJJJ?> or ^iLT idbtf "all men".

Go-'2) ,jaju properly "a part", i.e. "one, some", e.g.

*(JL$ QajJ "one of the poets" i.e. "a certain poet" or

"some poets".Q O

3) JjLo "likeness" corresponds to the English "as,

like", e.g. jjj JJU "like Zaid", idi* "like him", or

"as he".

4) ^^ properly "an other" means "except", e.g.

jjjjf <j^*> "except science"

5) j*L properly "an other than" often corresponds

to the prefixes non-, un-, im- etc., e.g. L-ytIT ^i "a

non-Arab"; ^1* ^ "im-possible".

6)

"

#*-< ..both.Gen. Accus.

^-^JL^Fern. ^>^

E.g. gjjb-^rt& "both the men"; U^ir "they both"

(cf. Less. 7, 1).

Forty-second Lesson. 283

7) Ctj"a many of i.e. "many a" always followed

by an Indefinite Noun, e.g.

vJ^Jil OsSf* Jw>j' Vj

"manv a noble man have

I met".'

Emphasis.

4. A noun can be emphasised by:

a) Repetition (JJaSfT js-^LJjf "literal emphasis"), e.g.

'fj*[=> ''he came running (quickly)".

"I saw thee" (cf. Less. 43, 3).

b) The use of special words (^jjuil OvJ'UJt

"emphasis according to the sense"). Such words are:

jUb (Plur. ,JJ5) and ^ (Plur. ^13) "self1

, e.g.

x*ii j^j zL> "Zaid himself came". One can also

say x**sixj off ' ' " 8'

, 5 Oa -

The words JJ', 5-^*> and KsU are also used for

Emphasis (see above 3, 1).

The Permutative.

(ixln "the substitution")

5) The Permutative must follow immediately thejo ) , p.o

word for which it is substituted (*.; OvXi!)..

There are four kinds of substitution:

a) The substitution of the whole for the whole

(j^IT ^ JjO? ixl) i.e. where the Permutative is exactly

equivalent to the word for which it is substituted, e.g<

j sL> "Zaid, thy brother came";

284 gecoud Part.

"the people of

the city, the great and the small, came to me".

b) The part is substituted for the whole((jzauJ! JjJ

e.g.

xLS "kiss him the hand" i.e. "kiss his hand";

j v_ju Jt jw/i "he ate the loaf, half of it" i.e. "he

ate the half of the loaf".

c) A possession or quality is substituted for the

name (&*&&[! i3o i.e. Permutative of inclusion"), e.g.

J ye, * f) o ^'

, , og

joy vXjj ^*>-^! "Zaid, his garment pleased me" i.e.

"Zaid's garment pleased me"; &JL*s>Ijyjj

v^^^ssOwo "I

praised Zaid, his beauty" i.e. "I praised Zaid's beauty".

d) A word is used to correct the previous one

(JaiiS! ^Jo "the Permutative of error"), e.g. (j*o s-Jio -^j^

"I passed by a dog (no, I mean) a horse".

Exercise 79.

XJLJ

Jo "^ xi! c>>^U-> 'i-*J

Forty-second Lesson. 285

JliJi 3^-

3

.

J^ yil xj^ LX^ olyuaJl Ji

286 Second Part.

r5 ^L t ^

(used as an exclamation) fJaJ| jJfflj tJt V^> ^ 3y> ^

(be comforted!) ll^e ^ ill! wJ?

Exercise 80.

It is necessary to go away (there is no escapefrom going away). It is necessary that I give thee

what thou demandest. The captain was extremely

astonished at what (Co) had happened to me. The

sea was calm and the atmosphere clear and the weather

still. I travelled in the direction of (making for SJaa

Egypt and you travel in the direction of Syria. I

pray (3tl) God that he may bring you safe to your

country. We wept bitterly and that hour was a

very grievous hour. That man was intelligent, pious,of noble character, of noble soul. Verily calamities

do not cease following me, since I went out from the

city. She sighed in despair (the sigh of the despair-

ing) and her sighing was increasing my pain andsorrow (me as to pain and sorrow). I have no

power to withstand calamities. We have only death

before us (there is not before us except death).Throw us both into the sea, or preserve us both.

Since the main purpose (most important of purposes)of our high dynasty is the rooting out of the causes

of encroachment and of evil by sea and land, we are

legally and morally compelled to (that we) make waron all ships of the Corsairs.

Forty-third Lesson. 287

Forty-third Lesson.

Pronouns.o

3. The Personal Pronoun(jt+*o)

is either Independent

or Suffixed (cf. Less. 8, 1), and may be in the Nomi-native or the Accusative.

For the Independent Pronoun see Less. 3, 6.

Note. If the conjunctions ^,O "and", 6 "verily" are pre-

fixed to_^S> or ^ the sometimes loses its vowel, e.g. _^, ^s etc.

3. The Independent Pronoun in the Accusative is

as follows:

3. Masc.j him. U] them both

?ujthem.

3. Fern.lfl>j

her. UflT[ you both ^bj2. Masc. SCt thee. IfCt you."s r "a

2. Fern. ^JU ^Cj1. ^tj me.

Kjus -

4. The Independent Pronoun in the Accus. is used:

a) With a verb to emphasise the Pronoun, e.g.

j>l*jtj"vsHjj

"Thee we serve".

b) If two Pronouns are Direct Objects of a verb,> a - o

e.g. U J^LLft! "he gave it (to) me"; but it is also

- oS

possible to say xollacf. It is also used as the Object

after a Verbal Noun, e.g. C|^JLJott "my giving it

(to) him".

c) Independently as a Warning, without a verb, e.g.

^U "take carel", see Less. 48, 2.

288 Second Part.

5. For the Suffixed Pronoun see Lees. 8, 2, 3.

Note 1. The letter ^5 is often omitted in the cry v.^ for

,3. "my Lord I" (cf. Less. 48, 1 Note), and in the Pronoun J,, e.g.

>* >*

(for JsjSi "fear me".

Note 2. The Pronoun s often refers to a whole sentence and

a a - i

is then called a ^L*J! j*+te',it is translated "it" or omitted in

translation.

6. If the Personal Pronoun is to be emphasised it

is repeated in the Independent form, whether it has

already been contained in the verbal form or expressed

as a Suffix, e.g. fi| \&AJO "I struck", Gt ^jfo "hestruck me".

The Emphatic Pronoun "myself, himself" etc. is ex-

pressed by the use of U*AS (Plur. (j^aJt), ^xt (Plur.o S G ., ^

or oU> (Plur. ofy>) with the Pronominal suffixes

(cf. Less. 42, 4 b), e.g. x**aj or x*-^j Jw "Zaid

himself; so also^^-ijf ($?. "the matter itself, this

same matter".

7. The Reflexive Pronoun in the Accus. is also ex-o , o^ r-,

pressed by ^^^j, ^AC, oto (with their Plurals) and the

Pronominal suffixes, e.g. j^wii jJs "he killed himself".

If the Pronoun depends on a Preposition, it is

t o - > p - 5

enough to use the Pronominal suffix, e.g. LA J,- oJe>l

"1 took something for myself".

8. The Reciprocal Pronoun "one another" is expressedo, #.-*..-*'-

by the use of ^a*j "one, some", e.g. ui*j 'uL*i=ju 'Jj^Lw

"we have helped one another".G o-

After Prepositions the ^>aj need not be re-

peated, e.g.

Forty-third Lesson. 289

(

-r ^Ju*jJlIjj "the soldiers approached

one another".

9. For the Demonstrative Pronoun and the Inter-

rogative Pronoun see Less. 9;for the Relative Pronoun

see Less. 31.

Exercise SI.

&.. 5- ^ S ,>-*- - j OS o

Ug o'liuxll J^it Joa L* fH^i ^ Q^ L^1*

, , ,o

ju|j^ ^UJt U>Lj

UoLaS' Uu , lil ik> U

^^JiL o/ c^il J

L,

Arabic Grammar.

290 Second Part.

Exercise 82.

You have struck us. We ourselves have com-manded this. The beggar demanded an alms fromus and we gave it him. My giving it was (a) good.

You will offer yourselves to destruction. Youhave demanded the same matter as we have demanded.

The two parties were entangled with one another.

Those shepherds asked me if I was the person sought.I began to comfort myself and cheer my spirit

(raise myself) with vain hopes.- -

Truly, what hasbefallen me is by reason of my deceiving thee. Letus throw ourselves into the sea and die at once.

The captain commanded a sailor to separate us fromone another. Remember my freeing thee from thehands of the robbers.

Forty-fourth Lesson.

Particles.O o-

1. The Particles(^_iy>)

are divided into Prepositions,

Adverbs, Conjunctions and Interjections.

Prepositions.

2. The Preposition is called ~^\ Jy>-, the word go-O >'o ,

verned by a preposition is ^^*, and the prepositioni > O ^c, i. ,>

with its noun is ^yfd^ jL=M.3. Prepositions are: A. Inseparable, consisting of

one letter always attached to the following word; B.

Separate, which stand alone and are either true par-ticles or nouns in the Accus.

A. inseparable Prepositions.

1) uj "in, by. with" etc.

Verbs denoting "to adhere", "attach", "seize",

"begin", are construed with o e.g. /sic. "to hang on",

[jo "to begin with".

Forty-fourth Lesson. 291

"To believe in" is ^ ^\, e.g. *JjC vJUT "I believe

in God".

"To swear by" is vj ^J, e.g. ^|^ ^^^\ "I

swear by my head". Sometimes the verb is omitted.

After lot "See! Behold I" ^ is used (but the noun

alone in the Nom. may be used), e.g. jt jjji-j? &

Behold a man came (or Jo-j ^J).

In negative sentences, if the predicate is a noun,vj is often prefixed to it, e.g.

u^lfc y ylJ he is not a rider (or

j?U they are not aware (or

Many intransitive verbs of motion become transi-

tive, when they are followed by ^ and the object to

which the motion refers, e.g. $>** Jt he came with

a thing, i.e. he brought it. (This vj is called AJjuJcft *U)^ Of S

Note. The expression oaf ^L means "at the price of my

father thou art to be redeemed", i.e. "thou art so dear to me,that I would redeem thee at the price of my father". (This is

called JujJxi ! *L, the ba of redemption.)

2) and 3) o and'$ "by" hi an oath, e.g. dS: and

&& "by God", (o occurs only in this expression.) If

however a verb is used in the oath, o must be used.

4) J "for, to, because of".

& is used to express the Dative and denotes posses-

sion (= "have", see Less. 8, 5).

As a Conjunction (with the Subjunctive of the verb)it denotes "in order that, so that".

19*

292 Second Part.

It denotes the English "of, when it follows an in-

o, G ,

determinate noun, e.g. JojJ v^ a DO ^ f (belongingG

* '

to) Zaid"; J, ^oLo a friend of me i.e. one of myfriends.

It is used especially for the editor of a book, e.g.

^*2tt *W" u^*^ The Stories of the Prophets

of (i.e.written by) Tha'labl.

,3 also denotes "for the benefit of" (opposite of

jot) and so denotes a creditor (j^ the debtor), e.g.

f^> v_J j tikllc vi, thou owest me a thousand dirhams.

It is also used to denote the Purpose and the

Cause, e.g.

>

Js I rose to help him.

. for this reason, therefore.

iJJJI

Note 1. 3 o'j' "to say to" often means, especially in the

Passive, "to call, name", e.g. a) (&&>) J^ be was (is) called.

Note 2. ^ is changed to i3 before Pronominal suffixes

(except with the 1st pers.), e.g. *I, l^ etc. It is also changed

to 3 after the particle of address U e.g. v^sSJJ L "0 wonder",

^

JojjL "O Zaid!" (i.e. -come and help Zaid!).

5) 3 "as, like" is usually counted among the

prepositions, although it is really a noun meaning

"similarity", e.g. joj?"like Zaid".

It is not used with Pronominal suffixes.

Forty-fourth Lesson. 293

B. Separate Prepositions.

1) lj "to, unto, until".

Is nearly related in meaning to ^ and serves to

express motion towards a place, e.g.

iJjjCtl j,f sLa- he came to the city.

In relation to time it expresses continuance up to

a certain point of time, e.g.

tLph\ Si *loofcST Q, from beginning to end.

Notice specially ^M ^5 (abbreviated gjf ,see Intro

16) "and so forth", "et caetera".

With sufiixes: xJjt "to him", "Jl "to me", etc.

2) j^- "up to, as far as".

Is not used with suffixes.

It is sometimes used to mean "even" and then

exercises no influence on the case of the following

word, -e.g. L^ J&> iX^J? vilf? "I ate the fish,

even its head".

3) jc "over, on, against".

With suffixes: *llc "on him"; J^ "on me" etc.

Used of place. ($*& j* on the way.

he sat at table.

a city on a river.

Notice specially:

t^jb j* IJaj'to look (with pleasure) at a thing.

^ &'^S>[ }

o > to examine into a thing.

294 Second Part.

iudc (or -J^i) 'i he fainted (lit. it was made

dark upon him).ojo*, >,,

fXJlc j.XvJ!Peace be on you! (the greeting of

Moslems to one another, the answer being ..^LJl ^Xlitj).

&Iic ajff x^ God's mercy be upon him.

jJL^&IL. Jj| jjj God give him blessing and

peace (see Intro. 16).

Used in a hostile sense:

ftlL-j:>

he went out (to war) against him.

So with verbs denoting anger:

tiUlc OVA^CC I was angry with thee.

Used with Adjectives:a-- 6- O o , , i

/J* (J^w) v_^suo dU-3 that is too hard (easy) for me.

"To incite to" ,j^ cx>; "to induce to" jst j^, e.g.

^ tie Jdr I have induced him to (do) something.

J^ is also used to indicate that a burden, dutyor debt lies on one, e.g.

, ^ \} 0*

Jkc (jto^sa duty incumbent on a man.

vc v^?. it is the duty of such and such a one.

o io^ you owe me this (see A, 4).

^ . cT-

Jvc Jv*u5 a preference over.

Common expressions with j* are:

jfi gU? according to ...

o t J^ on the supposition that.

Forty-fourth Lesson 295

so far as possible.

bring him here to me.

lit: - on the head and tlie e^e)

willingly, with pleasure.

I conjure thee by God.

4) ^ "from, instead of".

With suffixes: il^ "from him", ^1^ "from me";

lie "from us", etc.

Used of place = away from, and so is used withverbs denoting to flee, avoid, restrain oneself, forbid,

hinder, defend (with many of these verbs ^ can be

used), e.g.

(or ^ ^c .1* to prevent from ....

(or ^ ^ vwixs^ to avoid ....

s - J O"*^ o^ '**^ ^ ^e^end someone or some-

thing.

It is also used with verbs meaning to uncover,

reveal, open and ask, e.g.

*. J^ QC ^jt^iS to uncover something.0,05 o, o- -f-

*.^ .\ Ooi^ ^c. JLv to ask about someone or

something.

In the sense of the Latin de "concerning", e.g,

it is told concerning Solomon.

To indicate the source of information, e.g.

^iLsl Q* lf=> it is told on the authority of

ash-Shafi'l.

296 Second Part.

It is sometimes used of time, e.g. voy> QC-

"shortly, soon".

Notice specially:

11^ ST '^o} May God be pleased with him (see

Intro. 16).

^ ^Le apart from.

5) "in".

With suffixes: *o in him, ~& in me etc.

It expresses rest in place or time and answers the

questions "where?" and "when?", e.g. J |3jT & in the

house, iilljl JsJ> J, in this year.

Sometimes it expresses motion to a place, e.g.- )9* * ~~

^1 3, jj>5he fell into the cistern.

It also denotes "among", e.g. LLo ^ who among us.

It is used with verbs of speaking and thinking:

to speak about .....

to think over ....* -. ^

^ -& g J^obf to consider something.

Also after the verbs of desiring: ,3 v1

^; *

for something; ^ r J _h to yearn after.

"To multiply by" is ^ v-j-xa, e.g.

iiSlsv-Jytot multiply three by seven.

6) jJ, ^jJ, 5jJ "with" (Latin "apud").

With suffixes aJLxJ with him, J,jJ with me etc.;

with him, ^xl with me; is rarer than

Forty-fourth Lesson. '297

7) 5^8 (rarely ^) "with".

With suffixes xLs with him, ^ with me etc.

It denotes association in place or connection in

time, e.g.

^x lL he travelled with me.

I came to thee at sunrise.

It often means "to have something with one", e.g.

XeLw (j^I have a watch with me.

It also translates the English "besides", e.g.

Lo^ tSjl <u besides his being a stranger.

Notice specially:

tiUj ,* in spite of that.

o? ^A in spite of the fact that, although.

S) (lr"from".

With suffixes .w from him, Lx from us etc.

o ^

Used of place (often interchangeable with ^c):

cr T > he went out from the tent.

It is used with verbs denoting to go out, to free,

to fqrbid:

yL't ^ B1I J^cl I take refuge in God (to free

me) from evil.

Used of time:

crfrom morning to evening.

Sometimes used (like j^) to mean "since".

^, since two years i.e. two years ago.

Second Part.

It is also employed witn verbs and nouns denoting

nearness, as iL, ^ji e.g.

0^3 I approached the enemy.6

3 near us.

Notice specially:

xi/> l he sold to him.e> * o ..a,-.. ',

s^ Q^ (v^j') v^ to wonder at something;

so with other verbs of feeling:

^ ^ito rejoice at .....

o e'

} 1*

Q. J?;**** pleased at ......

The word "than" after a Comparative is expressed

ty Ir; e.g.~

O . OiO ^ J _. O JC

v.JlXJi Q, e ^1 swifter than the dog.

"A certain" is often expressed oy cr preceded by

a word indefinite in the Sing, and followed by the

same word definite in the Plur. e.g.

a certain merchant.

It is also used partitively (jjixoJJdl)followed by a

definite noun in the Plur. to indicate an indefinite

number or quantity, e.g.

~A o o j ^S <* -

o he has already shown you some

of his signs, and to indicate material, e.g.

^ wood.or j^It is very often used after U to explain (p^^

what is intended by the particle, e.g.

Forty-fourth Lesson. 299

ol/ U what is with me in the way

of wealth i.e. the wealth, which I have.*01 ' J>0

U what you have done to

us in the way of kindness i.e. the kindness, which

you have done us.

9) jJJ, 5J> "since" (for ^3 ^,).

Is not used with suffixes.

It is sometimes followed by the Nominative, e.g.

.20.0 o, . ? > \> - *>- -\

JUO) JU/> <SU1. U , ,"^

(I have not seen

01 , <,i . ,*. .f you since Sunday.

_ (Jb.) JOLx dUj^ Uj

Nouns used as Prepositions.

4. Of the Prepositions, which are really nouns in theOo .

Accusative (oJ>), the following are the most common:

1) fU "before, opposite" (of place):

jLuf before, opposite the castle.

*U before the judge.

2) jou "after" of time or rank (opposite of jjjs):

oixR jJu after the birth (of Christ).

3) ^A "between".

When two words are dependent on ^, then if

both are substantives the ^^o need not be repeated, but

if one (or both) is a pronoun it is always repeated, e.g.

between Zaid andc

Ainr.

^j between thee and thy brother.

between me and thee.

800 Second Part.

^ U and^jll

UAS are often used with the same

meaning as ^.^ U and ^.o

sometimes mean "both and" or

"partly partly":

^eJ^ yfj& ^.o U (SL>. both poor and rich came to us.

4} ;i# i

M l'f5) jLftJj

I

6) v^Js? "under, below" of place or rank (opposite

to y).

-s2* ci^1 under a tree.

'

below the king (in rank).

7) sto^- "opposite":

jfjJ? siJo> opposite the house.

8) 3^> "round about".

idjsXtl i^5> round about the city.

9) JjU- "behind":

(jtfb v_IL> behind my back.

10) ^o "on this side of, under, without":

JJJJ .y^oon this side of the river.

%jvc j^ dU>Jo ^+,3 may the cheek of the enemy

be under thy feet.

With the meaning "without" QJjo or o^i ^* J

** * "

may be used instead of 3o;

o (or ^^0 ^ org3Jo) o^o without that.

Forty-fourth Lesson. 301

Note. For the meaning of tiU.^ and JjO see Less. 48, 2,

11) ,kie "with, at":

Used of place:

jJji ^Jl>- I sat with (beside) him.

Used of time:

jw^iJ! fj&> ^ic d-> he came at sunrise.

It is often used with the meaning "to have".

iu (or ^ or J,) ^OOLC I have wealth.

Note. ttXi^ ^kXic means "according to my opinion it is so".

12) (jto^c (or ^ Itojc) ''instead of, in place of":

tiU5 otolr: tJ^P oj^i I took this in place of that.

13) iy "on, over, above": of place and rank

(opposite of o^?):

a^wixJl -*js on the tree.

viVllt ijs above the king (in rank).

14) JJ3 "before" of time (opposite of JsjJ):

oi*Il ^ before the birth (of Christ).

15) Jjo "before" of place (more often *UI):

jbJ! J.5JObefore the house.

16)^ "towards":

o-iJl j^? towards the West.

Note, j^ is used as a substantive in all Cases with a

following Genitive in the sense of "like" or "about".o, jo- Oj-

j^ ^ Jc?.,a man like Zaid.

302 Second Part.

J^. AJlo >s=o o. -A I passed by about a hundred men.

17) s]jj "behind, on the far side of:

behind them.

behind (on the far side of) the mountains.

5. Two prepositions often occur together. In this

case, if the second was originally a noun, it must be

put in the Genitive, e.g.

JJU.J ^ from between them i.e. from the midst of them.

L** crfr m ver i.e. above.

from under i.e. underneath.

from with.

from on i.e. down from.cr

^ or oj)Jo without.

ij^before.

cr, after.

Exercise 83.

xUJ *JOUc ^ yolj Uj" oJo^ ^50! Jlsj ^i

^Las A) ifiiLLw L^JC?.^' i^SU jijJ! *J /Jo'

Forty-fourth Lesson. 03

xJLc

ilf

,3

_

UG JlJ ^? iS

XxS L

304 Second Part.

U A] oc^w* Jo

Exercise 84.

I have (in) this day experienced (jtiUs) indescrib-

able joy (what is not described in the way of joy).

I shall speak to thee about this matter(^U;).

I was

very disturbed on examining your letter which came

(o^ Part. Act.) to his Excellency our lord and father

(the excellency of our lord the father), may God protect

him!, and although I almost turned away (in spite of

my being I turned away) from the mind of his Excel-

lency what disturbed him, yet I was not able to con-

tent my thoughts with the least (of whatis) possible,

and for this reason I find myself disturbed (of the

mind), hoping that you will honour me (the being ho-

noured Verbal Noun of^Jjuj by giving me in-

formation (sJbl); and we pray for you the continnu-

ance of health and wellbeing. What I have learnt

Forty-fifth Lesson. 305

of thy indisposition hps grieved me, and I have prayedGod that He will clothe thee with the garment of re-

covery, for He can do all things (He over every thingis powerful). Perhaps our lord will bring thee whatwill rejoice thee. The sheikh was extremely astonish-

ed at our answer.

Forty-fifth Lesson.

Adverbs.

1. Adverbs are either 1) Particles, Inseparable or

Separate, or 2) Nouns used only in the Nom. or Accus.

Inseparable Particles.

2. The Adverbs, which are Inseparable Particles are:

a) 1 a particle used to indicate a question (= J^p

see Less. 2, 5) (called the -Ljfcu-^T <-Jy>);but only when

no Interrogative pronoun occurs in the sentence, e.g.:

|jJ (or viiii j^) Jjbi! hast thou done this?

but \Sj> JJ ^ who has done this?

pfI in a double question; see

^t.

b) tja particle used to give a Future meaning

to the Imperfect (see Less. 13, 4). It is a shortened

form of Jl "at the end".

(xLxil O^MW) xbtdLw I shall do it.

c) 5 a particle used for Emphasis, "certainly, truly",

often omitted in translation, e.g.:

Arabic Grammar. 20

Second Part.

j truly. I have done it.

Especially with the Modus Energicus (see Less. 15):

ejJLutoS I shall certainly strike thee.

Also in an Oath:

dj*ju by thy life.

3 is often used before the Predicate of a Nominal

sentence, which begins with ^ (see below 3e).

It is often used to introduce the apodosis of a

sentence beginning with ^J (see Less. 47, 5).

Separate Adverbial particles.

3. The most important separate particles are:

a) yj[and KM (related to 1,31, see Less. 46, 2b)

"in that case, then'1

, e.g.:

let us go then.

b) y\ (for 1 and 3) "not" in an Interrogative

sentence :

US <b$t shall I not do it?

So pi for 1 and.jj.

o) jt"or" in a double question:

f ,

^ *t xUsii shall I do it or not?

d) U (for f and U) "not" in an Interrogative

sentence:

ajdtii U! hast thou not done it?

e) Jj? "truly, certainly" (see Less. 17, 5).

.j|introduces Nominal sentences, the subject

following in the Accus,the Predicate often strengthened

by A(see above 2 c) following in the Nom., e.g.:

Forty-fifth Lesson. 307

, <L 5fc

verily, Zaid is intelligent.^ ol I

It may be used with Pronominal suffixes, the

pronoun then being a subject, e.g. *J{ verily he, J,t

and^ilf verily I, ill and Ujrt verily we.

f) Ujt (for .t and U) is always at the beginningof a sentence and limits the word or clause at the

end of it by its meaning "only", e.g.:

sfjtittolSJ^llT Ult the alms are for the poor only.

g) y "i.e., that is" (= ,yj).

h) ^l "where?"

^.Tf ^. "whence?"

^Tt l[ "whither?"

ULi "wherever".

i) Jo "but rather, no on the contrary, but".

j) jj "yes certainly" as answer to negative sentences.

k) ^ "there"

I) JKJ> before the Perfect expresses the completion

or certainty of the action and can sometimes be trans-

lated "already", but is often to be left untranslated.

With the Imperfect it means "sometimes".

m) _bJii "only" always placed after the word it

modifies.

n) Jai "never", follows a verb in the Perfect with

a negative, e.g.:

Jai iOJ^u I have never seen him.

20*

808 Second Part.

0) "$S "not at all, by no means".

p) *$ "not, no".

1) As particle of Denial (J&! y) before the Imperf.

Indie, with Present or Future meaning:

LSf i I do it not (or I shall not do it).

2) As particle of Prohibition(Jtt ^) followed by

the Jussive with the meaning of the" Imperative:

do it not.

3) As particle of Complete Denial(j- ty

(see Less. 42, 2i) "there is not (no)" It is followed

by a noun in the Accus. without nunation:

yu y there is no escape (at all).

q) .J "not" is used before the Jussive, which then

has the meaning of the Past:

b j he did not.

r) UJ followed by the Jussive means "not yet".

s) ^J "not" (see Less. 14, 3 Note) is followed bythe Subjunctive, which then has the meaning of aFuture:

iL2? ^ I shall not do it.

t) U "not" is followed by either Perfect or Imperfect

Note. For Q as particle of Denial see Less. 46, 2c) Note.

u) J^o "when" also used as a Conjunction.

v) p*i (rarely f*l) "yes" derived from ^ "(what

you say) is agreeable".

Forty-fifth Lesson. 809

w) Jj> Particle of Interrogation (see Less. 2, 5).

jjdta J^ haet thou done it.

In an indirect question it denotes "whether", e.g.:

^y^^IsAJ? ^& ,3^*3-1tell me whether thou hast

expected me.

$& (for jJ> and ^) "not" in an Interrogative sentence.

x) Up "here", or in a strengthened form uib>

(sometimes written U$P).

y) <iJlI$> and iiJU? "there"

Nouns used as Adverbs.

4. Many nouns, the Accusative of which are usedas Prepositions, are used as Adverbs and are thenIndeclinable ending always in u, e.g.:

o' U "not yet".^^ cr "whence".

or jJs^ "before". ^ ^ "whither".

'

"above"."wherever".

1 "below". ^ in the exPression^ *

"nothing else, only this".

5. Most nouns used as Adverbs are employed in

the Accusative (see Less. 42, 2, c, e), e.g.:

little". ~*l3 "inside".

U ^LJLs "seldom" ^,^ "outside".

"much, very". IJRX "together".

"often". ik^ "altogether".- f "for ever" (with-

Tverv ^ !

neg. "never").

310 Second Part.

i.L^j "by day".

'- ^ "one day, once". ^L^ "on the right hand".

" ol' <(1

'

"on the left hand".

-'((sign of Future

Lxc "to-morrow".

uto "always".^ "how"'

*'.<". .., . ,,,, .-- ("often", (later^LJ "by night . 4, { .pe^pV-).

L*jL ^ (for U ^^ i "there is nothing like")

"especially".G

yrj> (from the nountl^> "time") in j&*&- "then,

at that time", so also O^i^ "at that time".

XXrJt "altogether".

at one time at another time.

jo, "alone" is used with suffixes, e.g.

I alone, aJos^ he alone, etc.

Note. For some Verbs which are usually translated into

English by Adverbs as ^^-^ etc., see Less. 30.

jj: and jjJ "perhaps" are often used with suffixes,

e.g. !J perhaps he, JkJ (rarely ^^al) perhaps I.

oJ "would that" with suffixes &;oJ would that he,

xX-J (rarely ^^1 whould that I.

Forty-fifth Lesson. 311

Exercise 85.

&* cr 34-

USli L ? V 1^ t>

LolL

Lit jc^J!

olLl? U

312 Second Part.

t Q^Diitt ,utttJf ^)0o oju i*3i v^OLfii i^XJo %^s-f Oo

liiLi LLM fJ^[s JJ^ f ^^^^ L5->^*l5 ^-^j^1

^f y\ viJUl ul UiLil^o ^? jx 'uij^f o^,

iii

Truly, he can both speak and write the Arabic

language (he knows the Arabic language speaking and

writing). Permit me to see from time to time that

trusty slave, nay rather the true friend Sa'ld. Youmust have patience my friend. Jainila said: Artthou trusting in that O Sa'id? and he said Yes.

I hope that (Perhaps that) the journey will be pleasantto you, for the land of Egypt is a cheerful land especiallyin the winter season. I beseech thee by th headof thy father, that thou deliver me from this trouble

and command thy men to carry me from this placewhither you wish. He gave us permission to dwell,wherever we might wish. One party of us travelled

northwards and a party of us travelled southwards.

How can that be? The prince said: Is she the

princess Salma? He said: Yes prince. Then

the prince turned pale (the paleness came upon SLc

the face of the prince). The best is that we return

to where we were. Bonaparte (o^Li^j) journeyedfrom Egypt secretly to his country in the latter daysof the year 1799 A. D., then the Mamlukes and the

people of Egypt prepared together to fight the French,and they were not able only to drive them out of it.

Forty-sixth Lesson. 313

They two journeyed together to the pkce where he had

prepared for them what was necessary. Some ofthe inhabitants of the village came to us and beganto ask us "Whence?" and "Whither?" I alightedthen from the back of my horse. I said to her:

What do you think? Shall we show enmity and resist

them, or not? And she said: No, we shall not resist

them. And I said: What shall we do (is the deed)?Shall I hand over to them my weapons and myself,that they may take me captive, and perhaps kill me?

Forty-sixth Lesson.

Conjunctions.

1. The Conjunctions are either Inseparable of

Separate.

The Inseparable are:

. a) and b) s and ^J "and" (called in Arabic v_Lc <_L=>

"particle of union".

5 joins two independent words or sentences, while

v_j, which usually joins sentences only, indicates a

development in the narrative and may often be trans-

lated "and so" "and then". It is also generally used

to join two sentences when there is a change of subject.

With a following verb in the Subjunctive o means

"so that".as

For o with the Predicate of Nominal sentences with Usee 2 f.

Por'O in the Apodosis of Conditional sentences see Less. 47, 5.

^13with a following Nominal sentence or a Suffix

means "for".

314 Second Part.

^ between two sentences, of which the second is

a Nominal sentence often means "while". Such aGs G, o >

sentence introduced by 3 is called a iJJL> ^Ju> "sen-

tence of condition", e.g.:

viJb > Jsj; JS)

(Zaid stood up, while he wept

o, .,, GO- -, /(Zaid stood up weeping).

also with change of Subject:, GO,, GO, - -

Zaid went away and 'Ainr

remained (whilefAmr

remained).

The ^ is usually dropped, when a Verbal sentence

follows :

, . o , Go,(^^*iij jo: zL> Zaid came, while he laughed

(laughing).

The waw of Condition $^\ is sometimes used

before a Nominal sentence which has no Participle or

Imperfect :

Go, ,^Go,yi sL> Zaid came, and in his hand

a sword (with a sword in his hand).

For_j

as Preposition with Accue. = with" see Less. 42, 2 e.

For_5

with the Genitive see Less. 44, 3 A, 3.

c) j "so that" (for the Prep, j see Less. 44, 3 A, 4)

with following Subjunctive:^ .,0-0 - > o *

(3U! v-Jdj-J J,sL> he came to me so that he might

demand the wealth (to demand the wealth),oE & ,

With the^ same meaning are used ^.^ jjj;and

negatively: !^!

,^LlXJ "so that not".

Forty-sixth Lesson. 315

3 with the Jussive (nearly always in the 3rdPerson)

expresses a demand:

,_^Lj let him write I

With the particle sJ the loses its vowel: wJ&Jb(see Less. 14, 3).

2. The usual Separable Conjunctions are:

a) ot "when, since, after, because" with following

r Verbal sentence.

b) 16! "when, if" originally used of time, but often

of condition (see Less. 47); in indirect questions ="whether".

31 and lot also mean "behold!", in which case the

former is always followed by a Verbal sentence, the

latter by a Nominal sentence in which the Subject is

either in the Nominative or takes ^ (see Less. 44, 3 A, 1):

o . > ~ o , .

'

} behold, a man cameljo (^) ^ jo!

j

means "whenever" (see Less. 47).

c) y[ "if, whether" introduces Conditional sentences

or indirect Questions (see Less. 47).

o ? 5means"and if, even if, although". C7

^J= "verily if '.

Note. There is also a particle of Denialy[, e.g.:

& oE , o > os1

o

juo*c|lycl

LAX vi>uL ...t I have not seen anything of

her, that I despise.

d) 5] (for ^tand i) has the following meanings:

1) "if not", 5C "and if not" i.e. "otherwise".

2) "except, only" preceded by a negative. (This ^is called a zJi^\ J!> i.e. "particle of exception"), e.g.:

316 Second Part.

2? ^1 *K $ there is no god except God (Allah).

e) lt\ (for ^1and C) only in:

^ H )'

\ "either or".

ufc- ui

|

f) Ui "as for" with a following Nominative, the

Predicate being always strengthened with a o, e.g.:

C, ^ *9 - - *>- OS-o > * *> SS

.\*l& j^s- _^s g^-55 J^ 1*1 as f<>r Mt. Hennon,

it is a lofty mountain.

(jj^kJf j ajL^* vsJbJ! U as for the dog, I met

him on the road. (According to Arabian grammarians

vlsij? is the Subject, all the rest is Predicate.)

g) f "that" with following Verbal sentence, the

verb being rarely in the Perf., nearly always in the

Imperf. Subjunctive (cf. Less. ,17, 6 a).

^= "as though"; ^ "because".

With Negative: 31 (for ^T and ^) "that not"; 5ii

"so that not".

h) ^5"that" with a Nominal sentence, a later verb

being in the Indicative.

With suffixes: 21 "that he", ^f orj.1

"that I",

'JJ! or Qf "that- we" etc.

In 1]? the suffix is often JULi? '^Jo (cf. Less. 43, 5,

Note 2).

In compounds:

?.

"just as if", "it is as if".

Forty-sixth Lesson. 817

^ "because".

Q* ^, ^1A "except that, yet",

i) 3! "or"; jf U "either or" (see above e).

With the Subjunctive ^ means "unless that,until that".

j) Ulo (more rarely iJLo) "while",

k) JLs"then, thereupon" often followed by ^.

1) (&s> "until" (= o? ^1); with a Nominal sentence

often~J J.

m) ^ orJ^jG

"in order that" with foliowhig

Subjunctive.

With Negative *f and il*J "hi order that not".

n) Jj\Jand ^& "but", the former being followed by a

verb or noun in the Nominative, the latter only by nouns

in the Accusative or Pronominal suffixes: *I*J "but he",

^yld or^JXJ

"but I", llki or lk! "but we".

o) LJ "when, after" with following Perfect to be

translated usually by the Pluperfect.

p) _jJ"if" in Conditional sentences referring to a

mere supposition (see Less. 47).

^f JJ often with the meaning "would that!" before

nouns and pronominal suffixes:

^ = ''although".

With Negative: UJJ; $Jj; py'"if not",

q) U "so long as" (kj*jJJT U "the U of continuance"),

is often used in compound Conjunctions:

318 Second Part.

U jJu "after".

Ulu and UAJ> "while".

U ,jJi "before" (always with the Imperf.).

It is often used also to generalise, e.g.:

U3II"whenever". U

^yl*'"whenever".

UJ[ )"if ever". Lilf "as often as".

In these cases it is followed by the Perf. or the

Juss. in the sense of the Present.

r) jo "when", Lo -*x "whenever".

s) JCL* or t\x> "since".

Exercise 87.

LJLs &I

o cr

,c -,,o! A-JLc

*J

j^, J3

'ui!! A] to l^JLij

JJJ JeL

Forty-sixth Lesson. 319

UJI j, Lattt ^Lj joiii !jj>

11 4* iLir oliUf J^c 1 liiit bi . !

iJoLt

JsiJl

*5 to"

J il ^y9 *I

Ub

,

320 Second Part.

j o ^ - *. ~ . ~ o jo.SU sXjLA2t Igti^j ^f *JUi Ojiils ii\J3 ,3

j,

.Jot e

*i)uJ! L^JU

I.(UI ^toLaJl

aJ 6ls ^ '*&? "^ Us

JO JU? ^J

uudt

LJj

l ^Jlots

Exercise 88.

As for Jamlla, she went out of the hall into the

inner court, and behold by the side of the door of the

hall a large door. No one sees him without being

Forty-seventh Lesson. 321

attracted to him (except, an'd he is attached by his

love). As for Sa'ld, he was amazed at the prince,because he had not seen during his life a man like

him. And when the prince had determined to jour-

ney to Egypt, he called his two sons to accompanyhim. And while they were so engaged (were in that),there was a knock at the door (the door was knocked)and behold the servant. I have not seen any good

in my coining that (o) I should return. And the

two, and those who were with them continued travel-

ling, until they came to the pool of the Ezbekiya, andbehold a park, which a canal encircled. And it was,when he rode his steed, as though he and the saddle

were one piece. While I was examining one of the

books, I lighted upon the following sentence. After

all had left, I went to my chamber. I had notfinished my speech, when (until) I heard the sound of

the firing of a gun, and I prepared to defend myselfas soon as I should see the first person of them, be-

cause it seemed to me that there was no deliverance

possible (that there was not of anything which was

possible to us in the way of deliverance) except that.

I do not permit that, so long as thou hast not said

to me what thy name is. Before I finished myspeech, I saw my friend. Inform ine when thou hastreturned hither. Then I commanded Hasan to bringme large stones that we might build for us a fortress

safe from the weapons of the enemies. Joy came

upon me until from the excess of what rejoiced me, it

made me weep. __Forty-seventh Lesson.

Conditional Sentences.

Conditional sentences consist of a Protasis or sen-o & .

tence containing the condition (Jb-i) and an Apodosiso - ,

or main sentence (?ff>> or (jl^s-= "answer").

Arabic Grammar. 21

822 Second Part.

2. The Protasis is introduced by the Conjunction

(J/Jjf v_3j5>) o [or fcM if the condition is regarded as

possible or likely; by if it is purely hypothetical or

impossible.

3. In both parts of the Conditional sentence the

perfect or the Jussive may be used in the sense of the

English Present or Future.

There are thus four possible cases:

a) The perfect is used in both parts :

, - , i o , , O o , , , , o

SJM vi>^o Jo^ v_*03 o if Zaid goes I shall gowith him.

b) The Jussive is used in the Protasis, the Perfect

in the Apodosis:

c) The Perfect is used in the Protasis, the Jussivein the Apodosis:

d) The Jussive is used in both parts :

Note. After!3[

in a Conditional sense the Jussive is

"*i

scarcely ever used. With _jJ the Perfect (rarely Imperf. Indie.)

is used in both parts.

4. If the verb in a Conditional sentence is to ex-

press the meaning of the Past, it must be put in the

Perfect and be preceded by '^jf\

^JiyLf ^JS ^ jjJjf js^ excuse (me), if I have

committed a crime.

The Perfect is used after Jj in the sense of the

English Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive or Poten-

tial. When it has the meaning of the Pluperfect *]?

may be placed before it:

Forty-seventh Lesson. 823

*Li _P if thy Lord had

wished, He would have made men one people. (Ko-ran 11, 120.)

5. If the Protasis begins with o ,then the Apodo-

bis must be introduced by <*J.

a) If it is a Nominal sentence:

*1 y5' tfjji 4\*\ ulif he wishes that, then the

matter is his (i.e. to do as he likes).

b) If it is a Verbal sentence expressing a Wish,Command or Prohibition (the verb being in the Impe-rative or Jussive):

*J JJb IJJ^ vl^l^ ^j if you see Zaid, tell him.

c) If it is a Verbal sentence which begins with

one of the particles \J^, (^^ oo, Lo (not), or^J;

iS * *? * '* *& if he steals ' one

of his brothers has already stolen before him (Koran12, 77).

Instead of vis the particles ot or t3t "behold" some-

times occur.

If the Protasis begins with_^J,

the Apodosis may

be introduced by 3:

^ U1^JTIx^T LXJ j^fe. y 3|J| ^J if he

had wished to be treacherous, he would have taken

the purse in its entirety.

6. Sometimes the Apodosis is omitted and mustbe supplied from the context:

it 3 ^i e Ui>Jif you go back

on your word, (good); otherwise I command that youshall be killed.

324 Second Part.

7. "If not" is expressed by , p^ i^3 or

If a Nominal sentence follows ^J, one can use

_^Jis also used with the meaning "if only" to ex-

press a wish.

8. A sentence introduced by any of the followingwords is treated as a Protasis:

"he who, if '-j

o-( anyone". '^^ "wherever"

**j "which; if any

1 '

U** "whatever"

^)

'- v no , ^ "when .^ "whoever". /.. |"when-

-f "what, if any-

^(U^

Iever".

U1 thing" ^fj

"where".

^'everyone who". ^ whereverp..

ULf "whenever".

where". if "however".

when it has a general sense. In both parts of such

sentences the Perfect or the Jussive is used in the sense

of the English Present or Future:

3li 3L> (j*^ anyone seeks, he attains (will attain).

Note. Sometimes an Imperative is used in a Conditional

sense as a Protasis:

IXLo rv^J (JL&(ji**

live contented (if tbou livest con-

tented), thou wilt be a king.

Exercise 89.

'^ 3& J^ '^J ]CJ*

Forty-seventh Lesson. 825

. . .

cr

. J J

O *U U =

ill-

826 Second Part.

o]"

cr

lib Js <Jt 3 (good) j Lfc,li

^^ cr

i]

Exercise 90.

If the matter is so, I will honour thee greatly andmake thee chief over all my men. If a man passes

by you, tell me, and God will requite you with good.I said to (in) myself: If God makes easy for me a

way to escape, it is well ; and if not, the matter is his

and He will do what He pleases. When the lightof the morning had dawned, my spirit was refreshed,

although I had despaired of deliverance. If I hadknown that I should happen to meet thee in this place,I would have experded all my energy in receiving thee.

If thou fulfillest my need, I shall be indebted to thee

for such a pleasure, that the kings of the earth couldnot pay the weight of a grain of it; and if you re-

ject my request, then thrust me into this sea. If I

demand thee (fern.) from thy father now, there is no

Forty-eighth Lesson. 327

doubt that he will send me back disappointed. When(the) age thwarts us, then there is nothing for us butto take refuge in (the) fair patience and to rely onGod. When she shows rebellion, he shows stub-

bornness.

Forty-eighth Lesson.> , OEO.O, > i .o >

(o-^b cr^ u

Interjections,

1. The Vocative is expressed by the particles b

Fern, l^ui (but the Masc. is often used for the

Fem.)_or ijjt b.

-i.e. ,i,Z ,

i$j| and l^j| b are followed by the noun in the

Nominative with the Article:

Jo-jGjI l>\ b scholar! (see. Less. 16, 4 and

Less. 42, 1 c).

b is followed by the noun in the Nominative

without Article (and without Nunation in the Sing.) if

the perspnaddressed is .present and tne~ noun is not

determined^ by any following words, e.g.

jjj b' boy! j^t^ b Mohammed!

but S$ b O boys!

If the person addressed is absent or the noun is

determined by some word or words after it, then 'thjT

noun is put in the Accusative, e.g. :

b O careless! (not addressed to any one par-

ticular person).

328 Second Part.

jJ^I ujJLa G thou, who climbest the mountain!

If

! jJI C Abdallah!

Note 1. [> is sometimes written without alif, when the

following word begins with alif, e.g. :

->b my brother!. ^y> welcome!

Notice specially:

ciot [>. my father! s-et li O mother!

^ 'rf O my Lord! (see. Less. 43, 4 Note 1).

Note 2. The noun that follows 'rf often takes the Vocative

ending s!-^- (see below on !^).

Note 3. For L followed by i see Less. 44, 3 A 4 Note).

2. Some of the commonest Interjections are:

1,1, 1, T, T, 1, \$ Ah!

t^Oh! The following noun often has the ending

\ oder *\ in pause, e.g.

JuJ\\2

or sLiLl1^O sorrow!

lL*c> grief!

^ Alas! also with suffixes: iLj Alas for theel

O o- Go- O o-

Notice also the Substantives ^u. *x> and AJ

used (also with suffixes) as Interjections, e.g. :

Woe tothee. jjj JL' Woe to Zaid.

The form ^LI with the Vocative ending may also

be used.

IP See there!

tJli See there he is!

Forty-eighth Lesson. 329

LP Come! with the Preposition o: Come, let us go!

ol^lp Far from it I

Jf, vJI Fie!

-o and ^o ;so Bravo!o' c c*

(Fern, of the Elative vlujLIubest") Hail!

or ^1 j^ Hail to thee! \i&

j also !^> (Zx^and in the Plural J^jt "Hither!"

olP (properly the Imper. IV. of \ "to come")

"give, bring here!" also used in the Fern.

^Jjj and(jCJuo

"Beware!" (from Perf.Jj.j

see

Less. 44, 4).

4U andJjlit

"Beware!" (see Less. 42, 2).

3. Certain nouns are used in the Accusative a$Interjections (cf. Less. 42, 2 l,~Note).

Welcome!

Strange!

Slowly!

Welcome!

^ Welcome to thee!

-((lit. "Hearing and obeying".) At your^( service i

iJ Us Alas for thee!

4. Many religious expressions are used interjec-

tionally,- e.g.:

aUt or JSr LJ or very Commonly ^1 God!

S iffi. 5B?^' By God !

Second Part.

Jit or

Thanks to God!

If God will!

In the name of God the

Compassionate, the Merci-

ful!

God forbid! (lit. "I take

refuge in God").There is no might and no

power, save in God the

Mighty ! (Expression of

astonishment and alarm.)

What God will ! (Astonish-

if iiilt fI ask Pardon of God! (Used

| to decline a compliment.)Praises constantly appended to the name of God:

Praised be He!

Exercise 91.

UL> (Proverb)

viJLai

'ul Lo L

Forty-eighth Lesson. 381

U ^ fl K>J> o

,5 Us) ^J

idU Ul U oL?

Jif ^J ef L

(3 -d- Jo

LI jT j^Ji u

UJ(c via/ U oJ ^eaJ Li jJu

332 Second Part.

Exercise 92.

Hither, Arabs, and follow(Jll)

in the track of

this bold man. Come, let us take a walk in the

garden ! Ah, my God, what is this strange chancewhich has united ine with my friend in this ragingsea ? Woe, truly misfortunes come upon me andstrike me; Ah, why dost thou threaten us, O sea?

O would that I had been slain among the Arabs!Praised be the Exalted, the Mighty who has protectedus from dangers and guarded us from troubles and

brought us back to Beirut safe from harm (Plur.).

Ah, O my precious, who has brought thee to this

place? Alas for his (to him from) disturbing dream !

Forty-ninth Lesson

tT^ ^Arabic Verse.

o^

1. Prose is called in Arabic j& ("scattering"),Oo - O o-

Poetry is pu ("ordering"). Rhymed Prose is ^s^.

2. Arabic Poetry (J^ has both Rhyme (ilils) and

Metre (o^ or ^) the latter being quantitative.

An Open syllable is short, a closed syllable long

(see Intro. 13, 1).

Forty-ninth Lesson. 333

Note. The Pronominal suffix v and the second syllable in

Lit may be either long or short.

3. Every Verse or Line (o^ Plur. olL?) consists

O o - O - o

of two Half-verses (J&* or

At the end of the Verse i.e. in Pause(>_aij)

the

Nunation is dropped and sometimes the vowel is omitted

altogether.

In long poems the firet half-verse must end in the

rhyme of the poem.Sometimes in poems in Rajaz metre (see below 5, b)

there is no common rhyme, but the first half of each

verse rhymes with the second.

4. The number of Feet in use is eight. They are

indicated by means of the letters o ? 6 '(as in the

forms of the verb):

b)

c)

d)

e) b

f) %*** -^ - -

g)

h)

These Feet are subject to certain changes, e.g.:

a) L,3jj - - becomes 4jje - - ~

b)

Second Part.

~ _ becomes

g)

M, (rare)

If Catalexis (rejection of the last syllable) occurs

at the .end of a verse, then w _ _ is changed to w _;_ _ to etc. These are also subject to the

changes given above.

A verse is formed by repetition of the same foot

or by a combination of several feet.

5. The sixteen Arabic Metres are:

Forty-ninth Lesson. 335

a) J"'"

usually with Catalexis _^*s in the second, sometimes

also in the first half-verse:

"How many an evil hast thou warded off, andhow many a dominion hast thou protected so that it

became firm."

b) j>^t (especially in didactic poems; such a poem

being calledsj

"Said Muhammad ibn Malik: I praise my Lord

God, the best Ruler."

(Beginning of the Alftya of Ibn Malik.)

In this metre Catalexis of the last foot (change^ ^. w _ to ^ -L

)is very common. If there is no

rhyme common to the whole poem, the first half-verse

also has the Catalexis, e.g.:

336 Second Part.

"Says he, who hopes in his forgiving Lord, Yaliyaibn Mu'ti Ibn 'Abd-unnur". (From Addurra al-Alftya

by Yahya IbncAbd al-Mu'ti az-Zawawi).

*** cr

"Poor is the greedy man, rich the contented."

d) J^ I (usually with Catalexis in both half-verses) :

^S 'UojJt

"Thrust away the world, for it is of its customsto humble the exalted and to exalt him who is low."

e) \j)\ (almost always with Catalexis):

e.g.:

Forty-ninth Lesson. 337

"When thou surpasses! men of whom thou art, it

is as if musk were a part of the blood of the gazelle."

f) j-oixft (also with Catalexis of the second half-

verse):

e.g.:

o-o. o - G

0-*Jjj pi

V^S

"My heart tells me that thou art my destroyer;

my soul is thy ransom, whether thou knowest it or

knowest it not."(Umar Ibn al-Fari4.)

g)

At the end of the first half-verse the^

usually changed to ^ic.^.

Catalexis may occur at the end of the second

half-verse.

JJ Us

"Stay (both of you), let us weep over the memoryof a beloved one and a place at the edge of the sand-

hill between ad-Dakhfll and Hauraal."(Imru'ulqais.)

Arabic Grammar. 22

388 Second Part.

h) 4j"*fi (sometimes with Catalexis of the second

half-verse):

e.g.: ^j t

"The soul said to ine: death has come to thee, andthou abidest in the house of rebellion; provide thyselfwith piety; and I said: cease, provision is not taken

to the house of the Generous." (Aba Nuwas.)

i) Jb ^t (often with Catalexis at the end of the

second half-verse):

e.g.:

"Night and the horses and the desert know me,also the sword and the guest and paper and the pen."

(al-Mutanabbl.)

Forty-ninth Lesson. 839

a>

e.g.:. -a i E &

"Imagine not that tbou in the future wilt he mpoetry as we; for the hen has feathers but it does

not fly." (Ibn ad-Dahhan.)

k)

As a rule the oS|^*a/> becomes oiUax, and the

at the end of each half-verse becomes

X-^JU? ^

"The furthest distance of the fair maid is the

miserliness (of her affection), which consists of a distance

such as no camel can undertake to travel."

(al-Mutanabbl.)

340 Second Part.

"And when passion pervades the heart of a lover

then every eye has a proof of it."(al-Mutanabbl.)

m)

"

.

u JJic ^Si

"The youth has intelligence wherewith to live, in

so far as his foot guides his leg."

The other three metres;k=JI, ^ioo^I

and

are not used by the older poets.

Exercise 93.

Examples of the more usual Metres.> , - jt/t

O.

1 Se Leas. 30, 5.

Forty-ninth Lesson. 341

_.** 1. O, -a

cr ^l

AJSJX

L# used parenthetically "stranRe!"

Uaed as a triptote by poetic license.

342 Second Part.

il

* l U

r^ir 345

u u

See Lees. 7, 2.

Forty-ninth Lesson.

(Riddle.)

(Solution:

.s?

fix U

f

Exercise 94.

iuL ^ o

1 A collection of four letters.

See Less. 44, 3 A, 1. Note.

344 Second Part.

lb*t

ol

urff oi c.;jyT i

345

Supplement,

Selections.

From the Koran.

Sura 1.

l!|

X. ft

Sara 112.

-O. 0* >,

.XL,J

ft j^Ji jftl ft Jc^! &\

O . Z J> J

Sura 113.

^ U ^ ^ ft

131

846 Supplement.

Sura 114.

,5

Fables.

(from

oo

kr 1>J! 1 jCJLc S! ;3U I^JlSi

JliJl

_ _> U

U <dlju joti tilJo xli

:

Supplement. 347

to xllij UlaS idlftJi sA# U**J

j U, to' 3 3jJj|

i U It>i *JJi' V '*\ *J ^'Je sti' U?

J > i- - -oft - .-&A>b J^JJl sLxAJt Joai "j J^^l

to LU.U vJjo; * to

348 Supplement.

OK u $%

Utj ^3l Ojl I b jJ'JS.vxi oU>

Ss ia)d> e^j U-o v^J% jl^ tiUUijJ

iuii ^ JILJI wJjJl JjJ to I&Jf IvXP (iCl^

'

UiJl,

| l^J to UP > U J oJUe /JJ jS

(yUUI j JJii

(From xj' iJLJf).

See Leas. 30, 5.

Supplement. 349

(jiaiu

lii dUo

^I^ ^ftxiuto ,jU d)J

U xx.lJs.Jl

350 Supplement.

cr%Jo

Us

f Jo ^ *J

s U LJ 6U

oU > Jo^S ^15 jSx iJI, ^UC>jjU

to

li JJuJJ J-J5 Lu^Lc, i All^ ^jJ! ) to i

Supplement. 351

LJLs

o^Jt Q

^5? J^> g^l J^to iUS L^J

v^L, J^i J] ^ ww ,^JL>Jo o^xf

oUIl

(From uA*lMl vJukLS by Madame Rosa Sahib.)

^^* & ^ otf3 ^o^.Ji ,5 U5 *

*Jj^^jo Lo LC^J O l iul

X* t^lS ^UDj! LtiJlil

LLi J^sJL

J^JL. v^i^Ji u-Ji^ xtf 1^1

352 Supplement.

U jls xotill

iols

s J U.C)lkJiJ!

c>! J udL-, ^5JJI K

'JiJLLx !A5>! oJL-,1 lo lif

u jfc ^ xS J

li

gjJkJJ J> i

cr e -Hs cr e o cr

t *J J^l *J I^US Ot

p>?-jJl ^Jy-<:^w>

^

ttbo, iL

Supplement. 353

oJi U

UiJUax iJsj>| v^i*j Ic lil UaufiJl to ^jXJl LfLo^J ^

Description of Kairo.

(From Jx2x KxiSy^ ^^ax^ by Q!JOJ

y^l ^ lju y^ gvJbs?. Oyu gJL> g/>L5J|

J.J jj/UiJl ^,|yi

Jou

O

Arabic Grammar.

354 Supplement.

1 See Tntro. 17.

Oux ^ j^ Jo

ji Ue;U

I L

Ojtf ^jLi W/ j^Jt VjLi ^ JOI

u x

cr

Supplement. 355

U ;

v3>s?.

LgJ

'

Ju x it isjiJ{ Jii

cr

lax>o

U J sjJLJt

io-i-

U3I u^^wo ASj L^o-i 3 'L

356 Supplement.

eUJ J^j. lo xJlt ^oK U.

oic ,jcJ! LgxuJLS 8j0LfiJf

,3 &*5-SJl

LLJUJ|/L,

Ui'L

JOLc Jjih***git u^>LxJ! J 4* sLo JJis

i iiiuoLs*.A-w^jJwa

usBj5>'lftjS

^Lu JOLc ^-

Jv*j JUJI

$5 L^LyOo^^^ 'L^/^J !y!c^ ^!

4^ 5 ^[p- U^au

Supplement. 357

From the Romance

uX idLJJi

jJl jLa UC *Ju

UJ!

j,l JyjJl ^Las oUc^S! liJUc

Uo! UJ^I swca9 L

,5

UL,

858 Supplement.

iudS iLytoU! iwUJj liUJUIt f JO Jo

<JUjl5

gjo ^ *JL4^- -j goo Jo, ^La

Ouu3 Xs^jctt dJLj Q, BL^St

-Ato J UL

jytfl t ^Jlbi UJL. x^ Otf3 o!>

lJ^JI Ot Ltt c^a^^ o^!

^ jJLT LinL^-l U LJU^J &\ 8J^> JJJ ,5

JJJI r^ ,5 i^jU! o, U^rS

e. V-Jj^aJ! iuyuo ^x jA**it liJJsJ>3 l^Jis

i3Uwe iuUXit ^ liJoo J;> J^t i

li^ ^ ri^J! J,t x3 lilxxi-t 1X

UJLso ,JNJ> .ot.Liv:^; Uj-y-Ji Jc^

X* aJu^lS Uc

8jJb

J. ^-

Supplement. 359

j xJu~3 j, fcyCaJfLJUcl o/3 UT so^Jl \^i- Uxj

UJ J*> t *

,5 ^J d)JJ ^ ^=s oUT 005 ^Ui

tO^.AJIJ

xo jjrX^Jl J,! Cyo^t> S

SOo. l^o U^^ls ULa13^^ 8p

U

Jtf xi^ xV

cr ^ M'^ '4^ c>

J| coJis oU 'wu^uj, UCc il LJ^3 Juu Lpls x

J^-J! J^,! ^ o

CT 4

i^^.Ju- L^jL, LgaLq ^i J.I

360 Supplement.

Jo aul^

v>J> liJv> bUJ! ULo UJb

J^ ^ oyllL. Mj'ub

J,! JU ULT, A) oto.fi lots xx-o J,l

j JwiUs O^u iOxj^XJt ^ w v-^JSi5

*3u*J!

JJis Jo a^Ljj vii^'uos ^3 (J* *5 ^iSJ

J ^ Li*c*y>!

o .ijXiu ^rbf JC

-

U

L^JLc ^(

Supplement. 361

'JJ ,*i ^JMWO JS

,iXJi

,5 .IsJl Up^as wlaj u, U*4i rb &u,

A^O L<XI ,j Xxlfclt ^sC LU*^ wXJJj ^5^; ^J X.J.S

o^Jt ^ LuJJij jd*\ u* Lo'uS

l Ui^.

iuJ5 wf U

_o!

x^5 JO,

Supplement.

JO

,i)Jj i

LULflj Ui J-aiJl jjfjUJL5

LXi! yj Ij^ U Jb" ^ i4^> J^-JI Lb

>rijJl vJj UcJj iJuias bXiJ ^L^ U

Qt

'u3u

p- U

Ols eU3 ^ Xa5 J L^iJ! vXp-I^S! *Wt Jyju Lxx4>> Uil3

UaLJj

!

Supplement. 363

Extracts from Journals,

1. From the Egyptian journal f\j&\.

LUI io

^ LLJt

yk Kiui! L^Jl^Xc XJLiU

iT jo u^^ LLJI ii^> ^ ^L xJi o'uCu\i!!

LoUi

LoUi

-^Jlill .iJb:

L<.*^g Lpy

Uo^ ,5

A? j ^iUaJ' JU^iAAJl ^^1 Jlji*

364 Supplement.

xjJsJLJ! C

3 LJle

8yil5>AJJL^I!

U

! slOo X^jJ^JI gib r J

Ut vX.

tf U l^xL^ ^^1 JwJ

* /> J

o l ^ LoLb U l^Jt

Cur LH) j^? L

X*aSU*U i^Jjili oUIali J^i' Ul P.

Supplement. 365

*1JI ijjJ

if

jo*

ft!

Attf >w-JU _^IJ &

JU j ^LJ^ x^vXi^

jJb

A-JL*Ji Bo'ju-J! ^10 ^ A-JLLJUJifel^Ji

o

Supplement.

UJJ

U xLs?

io'Lc J, jj'UaJlXs

L^,Lju-t

cr

Supplement 367

*jUJ!

oL3jAll jSU,

J^Utt^-

cr u cr cr

LpJJj L^KU U&13

cr

i ^ JJo J

U c*lj oLJLkJt iL

368 Supplement.

2. From the Syrian journal 3L^t O

tf Ui-o Co

0^*0 Ol^ xJLc U

U^JLsolS

t j .xixs. !^ JJ! JLJ!

Jo ^ Jo iC^cuJJ ^

OJ5;U ij^ ij ^o

U=>! xi!

Supplement. 369

iuo'iiii yJUJI j *JLc (jaJiJ! ^JiJt O l

*-Ji U^I! (iLJ! VJ'JLS. B!! Us JJ

vs^' ^ Ki> r.

x! AS,

.3 -bLSjJJj iU^I a, ^5 U

^ *Ji* xolkJUJ! iUUJlSj

Arabic Grammar.

870 Supplement.

yi it

&XAA oU

syu iJjLLj so^U5J,!jt

*aU0|j fetyitt

Supplement. 871

U x^S

u, JJJ

i

CTl sJoUJl ^ Js^>

L>t>t

xJJ ii>-^J^ Ip

^> oLa-f^-J V

^b ^1^ ^5^X5 J JNJ> ^5^

&.J5

jj

See Lesa. 34, 4.

372 Supplement.

^HjS'waJ

CT

Letters,

Invitations.

*!jsAlI ^^L-JI iCcLJiroUJ!

^ XcUaJli ii

J|jJb

Supplement. 373

Js

>iLol

!

^ iJoLc vc

>J Lo

L,

Private letters.

374 Supplement.

yCi Oi

&UJ|(TJ-^ xU^XJ! dU

,.000Lo!

fJ*ST ^'u^x Luis

w*rb|

rL^| jj>

Business letters.

3!>J!

Supplement. 875

xLjij *x* u, vj|^> f&4 UJOjj

SJ^UU! vJuoJ J^o US' Ifil3 fc

o>Lo

ULi iJu* UI^L-jS

!

Ut to!

! XOJ Pt

ci joj,t

yac.

, yu.Jt j sicljli or o^. u

cr -j< "^ e.cr

376 Supplement.

^y^U! goLJl L

,Xjl_xXj LxSy^io Lo! o>j*J *!jxs^l! u-o>-L, xOu v

^'I J03 lJ fc

U

U r^^ J^ o 5

Uu ut v3Lb!

L^J? j,^ IJ

U

Receipts, Leases etc.

^ L,

Supplement. 377

XJl tJ^ B^LJI olSjf ^ oyCi 8,^13 ii

Mv Ki~ xTt IT

r..

-XS^LS ^ o^Jls-

*I c^ tf ^Jya it jtll

If.,

Jl Jaiis

-tf. "$J*j!>

378 Supplement.

^Otf QU*i[s 'AsLaaA y+1 x

vil ail

'^J j&S* . . . &Lw . .

JdJl

JJLJt ^l,! ^ IAT *J' fe j^> vj wel^l

l KUi it KJuuxit o ^ XJUxUt

,**

ft] _^P (

Supplement. 379

,4)JU

Jl-^1

9 _->

iLo^UJl iU

380 Supplement.

*-J!

(iJJ iuU 8

1JJ> J^ Ui/

Jail

31-^!

381

Vocabularyof words (arranged according to roots) in the

Exercises and Selections in Part II.

NB. The vowels in brackets after a verb indicate of the

2nd radical in the Imperf. vn. = verbal noon. n. pr, = propername.

1 particle of interrogation.

. -E

tJot (with negative) never.

o-o o-

8jj plur. j>[needle.

> 10

f*S>jj| Ibrahim, Abraham.

9'

Joj camel (coll.).

60 S-o

JJ son KAJ daughter, girl

os 2 -s

v-)! (jj|) father -(jr^i fatherly.

j )&

f n. pr. of the court-

fool of Hamn Arrashld.-E

Jji (a) to refuse.

-s

Jt (i) to come with CJ to

bring o ! following.

--

yi II. to move V. to be

0, 0-^influenced ^i plur.jli'l

6---

ruins, antiquities iJji'U

notable matter.

^ IV. to let X. to hire

0-o 0^ ,

s.s*t and ;L>] reward, price,

o s

hire ^x>! hireling.

o ,s OE

Jo-1 period, death Jo-^

for (the sake of), thato e. o

J*>1 for the sake of.

fern. ^X>| one

ULJ sunday.

(u) to take, get (with

imperf.) to begin to HI.

to blame VIII. to take for

6 o E

oneself vn. *X>I takingO ,-Jc>U conception.

'=>] V. to be late f>\ fern.

plur. jS>\other

o z

and j*s>\ last, end

c to the last man.

382 Vocabulary.

S-o G

plur. s>=>l and

o <,"" s ->brother o>->t plar.

sister.

_

6 .02

wO I hare.

plar. lion.

O-Ejo*! captivity

o! II. to discipline V-JOi

o -s.

training ^^ trained,

S -

cultured ^0! of good

training.

O? H. and IV. to transmit,

carry out, accomplish.

all,

entirely ^-y! prisoner of

war.

(a) to be afflicted V.

9 ^to vex oneself

V

Alexandria.

j when, since (conj.) &J 3] o , os

'at that time. (^| plar. 9Uwt name, (see

behold!

then.

when, if- the Ismailia (a

quarter of Cairo).

o , o

stall..ol to permit (with UJ) - IV.- ,* 6

to announce X. to ask Jwot X. to root out J-

G &o

permission oo| permission origin_ Xo5 altogether.

- O0l ear.

& IV. to injure

damage.

^-,1 n. to date.

V OC ^jfr

plur. o^l^t earth, land.

.Vj, (a) to be sleepless vn.

arnants, albanians.

horizon.

(a58vn|0 sir

my master.

October.

, ..JJ'f II. to assure V. to be

assured.

-,E GOB ^t,

J* J (n) to eat vn. J*l J^Ufood.

G,ou^jA^I

clerus -

oc

Of the definite article.

Vocabulary.

fern. plur.

who, which.

AJ| (a) to become accustomed

to II. to edit - III. to

be familiar with Jj]G.~ G >i.

plur. Obit and O^Jt thousand

book.

I*-! pain.

O roZ 2 -oS

^U ! a German J.U I German- ,-2

Loll! Germany.

ij a god SI God, Allah.

O c ,

^X| to - untojl i| until.

>

l!or (in an alternative).

S - -s

l{mother

|U! before (prep.).

at

U>! as for.

emperor.

j*l (u) to command, (with accus.

of the person and i_J of the

OoE"

, ,%

thing) jA \ plur. y !^ 5

9 >

command; plur. .^x! matterG E

y>l Emir, Prince

jA^J Prince of the

S

faithful^_5jjyt imperial

G >i* - -

y>Lc an official.

)*! yesterday.

t II. to hope V. to con-

G ,E r, ^^.

aider JwJ plur. ^U T hope.

c

rf (a) to be safe IV. to

believe (in v-J) VIII. to rely

on Q^t safety iolot

O

reliability, deposit yyt

true, Emin (n. pr.)

believer Q*^ a reliable

person.

5 E

jtand Q! that.

,|if-^]ifnot,else-^|-i

only o ! ^] except that.

.] truly, verily LJJ only.

- -to*i<

JAnatolia,Asia Minor,

oE -oS>o! fern, cio! thon L4Jui

o>oc

yon (dual) ^t you (plur.).

. E GotrJ! in. to be friendly ^f

G E

amiability (j***-^amiable

G . o G"

...L*oj plur. fjJj manG^ , o

woman.

884 Vocabulary.

j*bo] English (coll.)-(j;j^J ^5* that iB

>

English (adj.).

V. to be slowSuj plur.

5 ' "" *

JU4 and^I3

{ vessel.

V. to equip oneself -o.o^

Ji^lequipment.

^ ^ ^*

H. to greet- jil plur.

Jlit family.population^orthy

- t welcome -ability, worthiness.

Europe.C -L

XSjl factory.

g8e

jl n. pr. Aug-usta.

0*S

I instrument, machine Oj)

- ^

fem. 4s ' first, beginning

? the day before

yesterday- Juthe first

...1 CM il) to come (of time^

a t and si^i ah !

<ju place of refuge.

c>! (Jot i) II. to strengthen.

where

fem- '^ 5 <with 88n -) what

UJ* with, through, in ^b

without o ! Ui since <conj.).

Ijlj pope.60 G,^rO plur. ,lj I well.

-

gjf para (a turkish com.).

^^ Paris-

/. G^to be bad

(jigmis-

fortune.

* (u) to decide.

il VII. to break out.

1 (a) to seek (with

j- O ^ G

^ plur. l^ and ^river (the Nile),

s

^. steam , c.L

sea,

Vocabulary. 385

. low (in price).

JJR avarice ^1

. avaricious.

= - 2 j

Jo V. to be scattered JoO 2 i -

escape ^ Jo ^ it must be.

fJo VUL to begin tJy^o

beginning, elementsQ

jtjOj elementar.

full moon.o o

<PJo an extraordinary thing.

Jjo substitute(^ Sjo

O o.'

instead of iujo suit of

clothes.

Jo body.

tJo to appear, seem good -Go . 5 . -

^Jo Bedouin (coll.) (j:*Jo

Bedouin (adj.) iLplj plur.

j|_jj desert.

OiXj (u) (J^2H) to strive.

J land ioj plur. t^^desert, plain . ^i! o outward,

'

external.

o -- 9 -

wl^j diploma i^j^ creator

~2 -

^5ji innocent.

Arabic Grammar.

OLflj'j oranges (coll.).

jj in. to leave'~j^\

yesterday.

Jo cold J,L cold (adj.)-

powder.

jj* (u) to come out.

5-kjJ to move about, be restless.

^J (u) to lighten IV. to

send forth lightning ,_

lightning.- - - 0,0^o in. to bless Ki'-j pond.

Berlin.

^xj n. pr. Barmecide.

G - o j

KS> J space of time.

o - o j

...LCwd garden.

J^} VII. to take pleasure in

O > o *

contented.

- -

g courage JJj brave.

io II. to bring good newso

X. to rejoice t:"*-* and

^Lio n. pr. UTT*-''-?human.

yaj IV. to see.

<**j (u) to stamp.

25

Vocabulary.

*zi some (3 to 10) &

plur. *jl*ccu wares.

*- *-t r

Jdxj hero Julioj idleness.

^.ybjIV. to conceal within

^jku belly.

viiou (a) to send.

JoLj (u) to be distant VIII.

G o>

to remove ^Xiu distance

G .. o.,

Jyj*J far, distant Joo

after (prep.) sJou after-

O c - O .

wards J Oots after (conj.).

j one, some, another (see

Less. 43, 8).

o -

jb suddenly,

hatred.

JJb mule (coll.).

LiJ vn. to be desired.

xXJb (Persian) thin cotton

material.

yb ox.

^yb (a) to remain. IV. to

retain 9Ub stay, life

Gs -

,<w and X-Jb remainder.

tyL early, in the morning'

o.. JS

Ju_jj? n. pr. Abu Bekr.

tJo (i) to weep (over Q*) vn.

o -

Ju but, rather.

5 ,

Jo V. to be wet through.

*-b nightingale.

plur. Q>>-*J-?land

native XjvXLJ \ the natives.

Jb (u) to reach II. to make

to reach vn.

^b delivery ^JLy>sum

of money.

^b? piebald.

j (u) to put to the test -

TTT, to be anxious about

lur

finger-tips.

m}Bfortune.

seaport.

G

piur.

and

and

G o

Bey.

j son

G ^^

plur. oUo daughter, girl.

Vocabulary. 387

(i) to build VIH. to

build for oneself 5**J plur.

G , C.E G ,'

j /md ^ build-

vag (

ground of.

: sLo on the

cheerful.

fine, brilliant.

j V. to take possession.

6 -os

plur. v-JljJ? door,

o Beyrout.

(go i) to sell - vn.

and F-t* jju plur. w^

(Turkish) Bey.

explanation, proof

J clear ^ between

bile.

tiU Lo woe to thee!

gateo (a) to follow, belong to

G --

u) to reveal - IV. to v - to Purette ~ H Plnr -

G ,o 6 - -

^L*J'I follower iuuli' plur.

issue, consequence

.o tobacco.

I O

,-0' straw.

-..- *

^Lf1

business L5j^6 -

"'

business (adj.) f>& plnr.

G 9 t

jlsp merchant.

- s.

-.-:

*& under (prep.) J,Lx^

lower.

tinner .- '

soft, delicate.

post.

G- ,

Kiu buffet, bar.

>j police.

_jjLo piano.

oL (c>cu a and i) to spend the

night

house.

plur. o

to become white

white

- tinning'

beer "

(u) to leave, give up -

3;

n. pr. TurkB.

388 Vocabulary.

j thermometer.

ninth.

j to become tired IV. to

G - - O -o

weary >_^*J' Plur- ^*^^

weariness

j misfortune.

" tired.

fig (coll.).

- o s

revenge ^ jl

to take revenge on.

firm, sure.

yy Pleiads (stars), candlestick

o -o,

fox.

J u) to repent.

Oji' mulberry (coll.).

^sti (,*)jJ'u) to long for.

during-

c,Lii|two -

second xoli' a second.

Vocabulary. 389

""

v-jji plur. u.>Lo garment.

j OX.

G s -

L*J>- giant, powerful.

o , , e ,

J^*>- plur. Ol*>- mountain.

G..C, ,

cheese.

> corpse.

w> (i) to be new, exert one-

self V. to be renewed

^j=>- grandfather- !X> very

G

new.

wall ^JwX> worthy.

strife,

oar.

jar.

V. to dare,

- n. to tempt, try.

&> *

plur. (*tj> bud.

wound.

plur. journal.

e -> V. to drink in draughts.

OjS* excavating.

G.o ,

v5ij~7*- journal, announcement.

(i) to run, flow, happenIV. to carry out vn.

Go - G -- _

current (month).i - OC

p- plur. 5fj>S part.

j_p- plur. jjUs" island (also

n. pr. of a palace near Cairo)

-^ijii Algeria

-jtp-

butcher.

respectable.

reward, payment.

V. to acquire information

G ,

spy.

(u) I. and VI. to dare

boldness,

body,

n. pr. Ja'far.

to make; (with follow-

ing imperf.) to begin to.

s -K

Geography.

(i) to dry.

hard, rough.

> (i) to be exalted IV. to

G

show honour- J^i> exalted.

390 Vocabulary.

X. to have a thing

brought.

v>d> (i) to lash II. to bind

Go G , ,

(a book} JJb- plur. O>Ls-

G ->o ,

j_^$*s>- crowd, public.

g G S G-o..,

Q> and &is>- demon ***=

garden mad.

G

company -^L> plur.

mosque

sembly.

union, as-

camel

beauty XJu.-> n. pr.

sentence, sum total

wholesale.

> to be ready II. to equip,

9s or

G . .o ,

prepare

high school.

a) to be ignorant

very ignorant.

: firmament.

IV. to answer,

Vocabulary. 391

corrrespond6, oS

answer.

plur.

o!_^> steed &>>>- excellence

o - , >~ o c

J^>- (elative

excellent.

u) to act wrongfully

towards (j*) HI. to be

neighbour to j^-t" tyranny

jls- -plur. Q'^^T*- neigh-G ,

bour j!>:?>' neighbourhood.

(i) IV. to love vn.

*"*S - * O ^

and x^ love vy*J>O - OS

plur. < JL.js-1 friend, beloved

i. - E

(in the poets) >^>t more

loved ioj^ beloved (fern.).

t ink.

Abyssinian.

piur. Jlls- pregnant.s -

'

jj> until, so that.

-

o> (u) to incite.

jL> (j>>- u) to be allowed ^s> (u) to make the pilgrimageVI. to exceed. 2 - 2 -

- - vn. <s^> _L>- pilgrimcb*. (^>s* u) to be hungry

o^p jJ hunger jjL=

hungry.

iiL>- (v5^> u) to ramble about.

Plur. /\& jewel.

?- i) to come vn.

n. pr. al-Hajjaj,

governor for the CaliphcAbd

al-Malik.

(u) to conceal.

j^ stone j^" lap s^^room.

G , * O ,

Jc^ plur. Q^^" partridge.

it. 2 -

vXs> (n) to limit *Xs- plur.

P^r. LJ>^.C> pocket.

Gizeh (near Cairo).

*" > J

plur. iji^> army.

century.

boundaryo

to J>jJsJ- iron.

up

II. to narrate to V.

to relate VI. to converse'' * i - S

plur.

892 Vocabulary.

narrative, conversation-* , G, , burning.

plur. v_Jjy> letter (of the

alphabet), particle.

^*^>- beautiful, also n. pr.

beauty.

Vocabulary.

00 , !..

j*a5 anguish L*os>- i\i to

make oneself comfortable.

(u) to happen IV. to

O > >

get (money) &j*x>- acquire-

ment (ie) J^oL5>

result products.

-iteS" (u) to appear, come

II. to make ready III. to

converse with IV. to bring

presence

presence (also used as a title)

present, ready,

railway station.

(i) to smash.

z=" happiness.W rf

(u) to surround.

jj| a name of the Caliph

Omar.

(a) to keep, guard vn.

Mohafaza

(province of Egypt).

solemnity, festival.

V, to be verified - X.

g.to deserve, be due ($>

plur. ,*^- right, troth

Ka-Ji=> truth -real.

O

wisdom *yi>- plur.

(,IX4X>- Persian) ruler,

O

governor, judge ~x>

government, court

physician, wise -

court.

(i) to relate IH. to

imitate AjLs> narrative,

story.

J> (u) to loosen, settle, inhabit

2 ,-

VH. to be loosed

entrance (of a period of time)

^bLs> a thing allowed

plur. 0^2^ place-

quarter (of a town)

belonging to a place.

(i) to swear X. to

make to swear.

shaving,

dark black.

O , oc

Plar -

sweet

gift

I dream.

J_jJb> present,

sweetmeats.

394 Vocabulary.

death ^J? fever

j o> si

typhoid fev^r.

s^" (a) to praise vn. JC"> -o O = - j

O^S~t n. pr. vX*^9

n. pr.

n. pr.

to become red \ red

J*T (i) to carry, induce to

Q>) - vn. ] -

bearer, pregnant

porter.

^J? (i) to protect.

fr rf

OyjL> wine shop.D

X^l>- wheat.

Us- (u) to bend.

J^ (T^>) VIU. to need

,

'

O , < G , ,

(^j)-t x>Ls- plnr. ob-L=>

and ^J!_j^>- need, matter.

axis.

SjL> possession.

o o-

court-yard.

) IV. to surround -

wall.

u> (<>5>) III. to tempt -

VHI. to be cunning X.

to be impossible i3-=-

power, year ^^5> (prep.)

o

round about 0^> plur.

O -oS

Ol^5>! condition, state

O , - i -

AJLs> condition ^Ls> (adv.)

immediately UJls- as soon

as .> present5 o -

cunning JJ_*^ exchange

artful

it is Unavoidable.

rys- (i) I. and VHL to contain.

xx5>- where, since.

j> (-c>) H. to confuse V.1J+ O ..

to be- confused s-1^<5- ,

perplexity o^Lo quarter

of a city.

time.

U. to let live, greet

IV. to make to live X. to

O - - O I -

be ashamed o

life^ys- quarter (of city),

3 -

settlement, tribe - iyp*

serpent \*s- animal.

Vocabulary. 395

S- -

Us* (a) to conceal Vm. to*Jtj3- cupboard

'hide oneself.

gazine, shop.

e~> rascal.

,*3- m. to get news IV. to

inform VHL to test

O, ., <3 , o 2

jC> plur. jUi>i news.

Jo, OS,j^r> bread jL=> baker.

(i) to strike, trample on.

(i) to seal, close -^seal - ^-o. seal-ring.

^> (i. u) to serve X. to

0,0take into service. xAXi-

o

service[oLs>

servant

o^^'L=> maidservant.

loss.

9 , ,

>^*isi> WOOd.

2 '

(ji> (n) to concern

special

specially. special.

VIH. to shorten -

compendium.g

plur. ...Ux3J> eunuch.

i- n. to dye.

to become green

green

S vegetables.

^jJo> (Persian) Khedive, prince B'

writing.

ruin

(, te go ou' - IV. to

bring out vn. -3j3-G ^

"

> tribute - -, ,L> outside.

dumb.

VIII. to pierce, cut

oo-

through vn. >.

HI. to risk (OJ-

<>.

-'

danger jH3- plur.

heart, condition.

VIII. to snatch for

oneself.

896 Vocabulary.

light (in weight),

(a) to be hidden (from

c) IV. to hide.

V. to use a toothpick

J^> and ,>*> friend, also

n. pr.

> canal.

H. and IV. to free

V. to free oneself.

sincere worshiphonest.

III. to have intercourse

with VIII. to be mingled.

III. to disagree with,

contradict V. to remainbehind VIII. to go up and

down iiU> succession

successor, Caliph -

successor -- v_il>

other than - KaJLi^ breach

of law odx^ different

(u) to create.

^> (u) to be empty VIII.

to be alone.

*i wine.

fifth

O e, ,

fern. (j**i*> five

fifty

Thursday.

he who holds back

Satan.

III. to quarrel with

VHL to choke (intrans.).

(Persian) sir (used of

Christians).

(a) to fear II.

to frighten O^j> and

XilJtf fear.

Li- (t-,>> u) to betray, deceive.

CfcxJ* disappointment.

,L> (jx3-)VIIL to choose

Jo -

r^> good, better.

OS,thread pU> tailor.

r. to

J^> plur. i3_^> horse (coll.).

.3- (/**>) II. to pitch a tent,

to break (of night)

plur. ,U> tent.

AJ!O plur. v-Jt^ beast of burden.

[. to arrange jLOJ flight.

Vocabulary. 397

SjcO invitation plo induce-j.O (

blood

Vocabulary.

uJ plur. jAJta Dinar (a gold o(jjO plur.

coin).

3 (u) to approach uij, 02

world ^ol lowest.

time, fate.

O in. to crush

dark-coloured.

plur. y> misfortune.

O(.i-jO)

sickness

Jb David.

io(^jO) (u) to revolve ,!o

plur. jjO house plur. uO

00-

land -JO monastery

5jjO turn sjfo plur. -Jl^O

circle --jfj^o period.

o ,

jjJwo director, editor

xjjjjwo Mudiriya (Egyptian

province).

<-> kingdom XjJLxit JsJjJ!

the Turkish Empire.

io(jjO u) to last

plou

so long as 'u*jto always.

,^O on this side of, before,

without (also

beware!

Divan.o,

SO plur. iL

JO cock.

JO and

judgment.c

wolf.

Diwan,

medicine.

O religion

the day of

, , o , ,

oO (a) to slay s?

slaughter.

Ji-3 languid.

(a) to keep, save.

(i) to flow, shed (tears).

j^O (u) to mention, remind

OoV. to remember 3^ and

'i/

9 '

^y'o remembrance jtX>O, O.

-

remembrance S^stAi'certificate, ticket.

S ,

^o (j/3) aroused also

n. pr.

ti)Ji3 fem. tiUJ' plur. i^^J^I

that, those.

Oo, O , ,

sin, fault wuJ tail.

Vocabulary. 399

3 (a) to go vn. v_.

w6 gold.

30 fern. otJ master, possessoro ,

(with gen.) olo plur.

ol<3 person ^J o|i3

one day.

- ?

stall.

^53 C*f3^ u) to taste

to make to taste

IV.

taste.

(j*\j head,beginning,promontory<3 ^

chief, captain.

to see, think goodIV. to show VI. to

appear and A sight

to.

aspect.

2 .. **>

^Jj lordU^_, perhaps.

G u G ,e>S

*NJ, plur. Jjjf gain.

Ja?P (u, i) to bind.

O...OE G,o

ijOj! fern.j-Jji

four

- -oEo-o j o -

glx^,^! |_jj WednesdayG . 00} G-oB

ji . fourth 5CJ, plur. ffU.I

a fourth JJSl

Oi->n. pr. of a month ^y9

GS-J G

square j-?^ J-ys a squaremile.

j (j^j)II. to train up.

j (i) to lament.

^^?-p (a, i, u) to weigh morethan.

->-; (i) to return, withdraw

'III. to look through IV.G ) >

to give back - ^_^; return.

VIII. to tremble.

plur. its*

ft

^ (u) to beg, hope

request.

comfort

v-^s-j spacious

welcome!

j and

CA^> Af

G ^

plur. i5'u>j stage (of a

journey) '^j and

journey.,o. > i. *

T; compassion--^>>H

the all-compassionate i.e. God.

permission, permit

tender.

400 Vocabulary.

4j (u) to give back, answer,

refuse.

E>,

S0j IV. to make bad 9^0,bad.

+O, rains.

J^j III. correspond with

o_ .,

IV. to send Ju*^ plur.

> "5 } *

Jo^ message i3>*^ Plur-

O .> J

Jw-^, apostle.

, ,

^j-wj halter.

l*^j (u) to anchor.

1 -

ijij (u) to sprinkle.r. o }

Os^ majority (of a child)

"3 J 5 c

Jy^ upright (X^^Si=

Harun ar-Rashid

one who leads aright.

9'ui, rope.

lead i bullet.

N^Jn. to set with precious

stones.

oj IV. to suck (of a child).

-^ (a) to be content IV.

to make contented, satisfyVI. to come to terms with.

^i>, II. refresh.

o^j I., and IV. to thunder.

(a) to pasture III. $o

pay attention to clj

shepherd A.^ subjects

(of a kingdom) Cr?r*

pasturage.

"*, (a) to wish (for ,t)-

G^O)

'i^f-jwish,

c' loaf.

in spite of.

j (a) to lift up, take away

VIII. to raise oneselfK*^,

a raising _*i>J; Turkish

title ^31 ; exalter, leader.

fSpjIII. to accompany xis^

o * ^j

company ( $companion.

jj (i) to be tender, soft.

V^ III. to observe x*J^'neck.

Jo, (u) to sleep, lie down"5 , ,

ol^, sleep.

jJ, II. to patch &jiij a note

(short letter).

j*5 , (u) to write.

(a) to ride vn. ^_^j9 ft a ,

f*i]j plur. ^Q^, passenger9 '-o-

ship.

Vocabulary. 401

* > it is understood among

oLx wish, will.

; (3j) II- to terrify> o ..

; , terror.

centre.

(u) to run.

VI. to be heaped up.

whole, totality.

plur. -Lo^ lance.

sand.

-o_j pomegranate (coll.).

AJ (i) to throw

projectile.

9 ~>i plur. {y-*^;

monk.o

pledge jt&j pledged.

^5 1 u) to be

Rome,

r., (a) I. and VIII. to be' 9- -

sufficiently wateredJSilg)

narrative, piece (in theatre).- q-

j, Mejidi = 22 piasters

cultivated

Joj^S!the Ezbekiyg .a square

in Cairo).

30 paras.

Plur.

land.

plur . customer.

9 a-

C'J fe3-'u) to ? awa7 or

-s.j\ plantation ct,; sower,

astray II. and IV. to permitt*'*/

o , , ,

to rest VIII. and X. to planter *

rest ic

9

jj plur.

rest, comfort

^wind ^^|i

. about to (do something)

*^>j \, plur,* o .

'

odour ^j^j spiritual.

>\j (Oj^,)IV. to wish -

Arabic Gi

t blue

L>

vexatious.

field,

name of a

itJ: earthquake.

- , 9 - 0$ 9 - .

MJ plur. Q^f time o^jtime.

26

402

Go,

Vocabulary.

5>-, modesty, asceticism.

o, G ., oE

j plur. jl-^jiflower

> obx> J -9

Jt^ll 5tx>Li! the Azhar

mosque in Cairo.

n. to marry ;

husband - &: vdfe.

Oh (O.:) V. to take as provisionG ,

Oh provisions.

,5; (, 5 : u) to visit ,U visit

,* lie.

j (3jy a, u) to cease - IV.

to make to cease.

i

Plur- vW-~' cause.

,,

L$j Saturday.

J '~j*+^*-* September.

*JU*X~ praised be He (i.e. God).Go - --^ wild beast **^ fe -

Go- G ,

^ seven 1^ seventh

plur. jAjLwjweek.

(i, u) to precede (jf**-

precedence UuL* earlier.

i) to increase VIII.

,

: n. pr.

Plur-

G, ~, G =

(for aJyyw) plur. oui

.

lady x*-w fem.

, A

sixty '

to increase

G,-SOb increase

andG

,

'

,L>w-s ,

excesscurtain.

plur.

'O^- G , , G, s ,- Jo

tjbidder -- 0>

t^x. yoLi!* prayer carpet

auction.

Tj (jjj i) to remove.

!^ (^j) II. to adorn.

>--n n. pr. of a woman.

o ,

a) to ask (after ^c), beg

S ,

tj question, request-

beggar.

II. to enter (in a register).

6 })

plur. >^ prison.

hot.

dam, stoppage.

'J, sixth.

Vocabula 453

_-~ (Persian) head, chief. foot (of a hill).

(u) to rejoice- and

, IIL to trayel _

\r joy - ^ plur. J !r,

secret -- ^ couch -

*.*** glad.

o^^o' to dress.

p* (a) to go to pasture in

the morning II. to causeto go etc.

.-fw street.

_dining-table -

plur.^ ambassador.

low, under (part.).

^plur. ..j*. ship.

- - -

Jaa** (u) to fall IV. to maketo fall - VI. to fall one afteranother.

(Turkish) Your Excellency

happy, also n. pr.-

j O

n. pr. fern. Js^ll

fore-arm.o o o - o sji^v plur. ,Lx*vl current price,

rate.

(a) to exert oneself

plur. L^a exertion.

IV ' to intoxicate '

to dwe11 ' be

II. to quieten

o- ,

i^jC*- dwelling, rest

o

to dwell ,.jdx> dwelling

.lXw inhabitant,

404 Vocabulary.

> * * O i

plur. (j\.SlXv

(u) to plunder, rob

quiet

knife.

method.

O , o S

plur. x2=ULv! weapon.

(u, a) to flay,

plur. {-j*y^L* Sultan

imperial.

L* (a) to be sound II. to

band over, greet (with Joe)

VIII. to take over p^Uo, , +

peace, greeting &X~O , o

good condition p^**! Islim

safe, also n. pr.- n. pr.

i n. pr. fern. ^U-JLn. pr. Solomon.

^L (u) to forget n. to

comfort.2 .

A-*" poison.

^- (a) to permit HI. to

make a generous present to.

table-doth.

r* (a) I. and VIH. to hear

IV. to cause to hear vn.

Utf*

oo, o ,,

j^wand gUw AJ

at your service.

Oo , O

Q<* butter ^rt* fat (adj.).

,. 'GOU* II. to name ^| plur.

- o

9U*I name, noun iLfw

heaven.

p}ur .

O 1"

tooth, age -

point of

lance- A-M*I Sunnai.e.Moslem

tradition.

i-* plur. Q_^** and oljJL^

2

year- ^^ yearly.

^p- n. to make easy

easy.

u) ^ be bftd>

j~* misfortune.

square.

to become black

black >Xy~ plur.

master HJycw, lady

authority.

Vocabulary. 405

}j~< wall (of city) a^*- Sura l& and *Ul Syria, Damascus(of Koran). g .

,

*s , ^*Ui Syrian.or

x^j^*/ Syria.

*f- *-

^Li condition ^Uiconcerning.

lash,

hour.

O^* particle indicating futurity

distance.

u) to drive (cattle),

O , <3 ^o

lead ^^ plur- ^l^*"'o s ,

market ,)* driver.

-

(.& youth.

(a) to be satisfied.

be entangled _

window.

*^i IV. to resemble ii

doubt.

plur. different.

III. to make equivalent

rest, remainder.

o , j

plur. v_5kXAv sword.

cigar.

i) to flow.

(n) to strengthen, bind -VIII. to strengthen oneself

Ga o

ajui violence ^X>-X

'a s

plnr. *5JcilJ violent, strong.

, o' o .

i evil jJ sparks yyibad.

406 Vocabulary.

,J-i (a) to drink, smoke vn.

<5 O ) 9 ,

v-yi u;!yi drink, wine

V_JJM*Xand

\~)^J*A drink

-vj|yi plur. oUyi stocking.

j-iVI. (literally to be wide

of the breast) to rejoice.

-Xi (u) to wander about.

:yi plur. -bjj^i condition.

& plur. ^ jl^A street

2 o.

i legal.

Oyi II. to honour V. to

be honoured O-& honouro

v_ftjj^i noble, exalted.

^50, So,

^yieast -

jj.-i eastern

l_3.rsunrise.

^& Vin. to subscribe to (with

companion.

^5j& VIII. to buy 9tyipurchase.

5r .

' *'>-j_y-Si plur. ^bt^M coast.

v_^oti; plur. i.J^xxi tribe, people.

fc IV. to make known jui

hair -oui barley ^cLapoet.

, distract

ur.from(}_business, work.

compassion.

i(i) to heal,

u) to cleave, be unpleasant9 - <>- _ f

brother *J

misfortune, hardship

i&? reddish.

o

plur.

miserable.

(iUi (u) to doubt tiXxi doubt.

X& (u) to thank _Xil thanks.

>J o 6 , o

plur. jL&ftl form, vowel-

l&i (u) to complain '(of ^}.s -

Jwil (pass.) to dry.

^ (u) to smel] .

00-sun.

(u) to embrace, surround

Vin. to contain (with c^c)<3o- <5--

uWi union ^U-i north

Vocabulary. 407

2 -. o,left side &+J& A*X the shiitee.

andjfrft plur.

month

renowned.

L*i VIII. to desire, wish.

A (j>i) in. and X. to ask

advice IV. to indicate,

advice advice.

CJ^A)VIII. to yearn

- O , oS

plur. ^t longing.

name of a month.

i(i) to roast.

i (z-.f*" a) to wish ^if"* oS V- - >

plur. l-yit thing ^H_^a little.

*& old man, sheykhj < -

rat. Hermon.

M satan, devil.

northern.

grey.

i> (a) to witness HI. to

see, take into consideration* * *

G, , O

SoL^i evidence JsJ>U

G } t o'o ,

plur. Oj^A witness

honey.

tui VIH. to be renowned

plur.

salon.

character.

IV. to be or do in the

G ^ .,

morning j*-W- morning

^Mjto beautiful.

Co

j*j^ patience.G s G

x^5correctness, health

VIII. to keep companyG

with one another u^>LoG ,oS O o-

plur. oL^I and v*"^5

master,

possessor, friend.

\j& desert.

^ rock, peak.

concerning.

(u, i) to go out from

^ G > >

> plur. ^a breast.

to ^e Bincere ~ JI -

to confirm VI. to unite

sincerity ~"

sincerity, friendshipo <~<

voLo sincere --(JfjJs^s

op

plur. ils^Xxat friend.

408 Vocabulary.

HI. and VI. to collide.

j*aIV. to persist in.

r,**o II. to declare expressly

V. = passive ^y obvious.

- - - O - O -

-ryo (u) to cry out *J

J

and 4-tj-o cry.

-blyo path.

v-Jj-o (i) to spend, use V. to

dispose of VII. to remove

Mutasarrif (a

turkieh official)-

governmental district (in

Turkey).

difficult X

difficulty.O- O

yua youth, smallness #small.

ULo IV. to hearken.

page (of a book).

to become yellow, pale

*of yellow, pale.

n. to clap the hands.

\&*o (u) to be pure, clear.

g

iUo deed (in law).

(i) to crucify

name of a street in Cairo.

(u) to be sound II.

and IV. to repair, reformc. , G

-tlo adjustment f^* - > , *

plur. -^o honest<r^**

O - - O

Saladin &

interest.

U> H. to pray l&o (or

o i ,

'>**>) prayer.

.

n. to determine.

OOLo strong, powerful.

^o^> chest, box.

^jo (a) to make, prepare0,0 ^

VIII. to prepare ****

work KtUA plur. jjuart.

Oo 0,oE ?>'uj>0 plur. oLw^l and O^Xo

class, genus.

X. to approve XJJUA* plur.

>'

V*jLo misfortune

accident.

O - o

plur. o!_^iot voice.

Vocabulary.

2

409

soda.

IV. to listen to.

V. to imagine -

picture, copy

picture.*

,

-

La (Turkish) gLaa (gold) piastre.

u) to protect.

_Lo (^yo i) to cry out.

,,

-C

jLo (JS-MO i) I., V. and VIH.O O -

to hunt. Oo.x> hunt.

Sidon.

> (j^ i) to become, happen- (with imperf.) to begin to.

(i, u) to correct - JajU,

officer - ice-

hyena.

unrest.

afternoon -

plur. environs.

Jv& opposite.

i -

./to (u) to injure VIII. to

compel*

jf plar. j5yto

injury t>\j& damage2 , >

(Sj)}? necessary.

^to (i) to strike, coin VIII.

o o .

to be troubled ^-Jytoblow.

J^ (i) to fart

^

'

lyto IV. to kindle.r~

jW (3/0) beast of prey.

'

weakness

weak _ ^, plar

double,

Jua (i) to err, wander from

path.-^ tQ gather

_ m ^assemble.

^ interior ^^^contents.

j-Uo (^>to u) to shine IV.

to light.

f ,

IV. to lose.

^ ftdd _

410 Vocabulary.

vLto (/ y) V. to feel oppressed plur. ji^b path,

need.

^*JP physician.

GO. 0,0,^s*Jp cooking ^Jax kitchen.

'

5-*b (a) to print vn. *--b

XJEAXXT nature ** ;jx

printing office.

f*b m. to agree with VII.

to cover oneself, be shut

1P.* tVi in accordance with.

o ,

J^Lx^lb journal.

Go,,-y5\b milling.

Lilyb Tripoli.

jb (a) to throw down or out

^Jyb prostrate.

, ' , Go,

Ojb (u) to chase away O-b

parcel.

(jijbj deaf.

O-b side, place.

v_b (u) to knock at IV. to

cast down the eyesO ), Go,

plur. > and b way -

fashion.

IV. to feed plur.

(a) to pierce Jix

thrust of a lance.

b IV. to extinguish.

.

&b uniform.

v-^lb (u) to require, seek vn.

G - - o.o G ,<, .

wOUb and xJLb 'O_*Hi/a

demand.

^lb (u) to mount, rise, go out

to (with j*) - VIH. to

examine (with J>*) X. to

G.o .

get information about **JLb

o .

countenance Jlb star (at

birth).

f (i) to be repudiated (of a

woman) II. to repudiateIV. to set free, shooto >

bw absolute.

Ub] to quieten oneself.

, GO ,

^b (a) to desire -*-b

greedinese.

o II. to purify, clean.

Vocabulary. 411

*'.-

"s f s

plur. uM^tjI? peacock. JJ& II. to give shade to JciG j

shade Jslax shady.

do AJiLb

IV. to obey X.

to be able to do (with accus.)

iLcLb obedience Lxf*

ilcLb* at your service

obedient.

u) to go round.

)IV. to be able to

power,

u) to be long II.

and IV. to lengthen \^oo

length J*J>b long.

JjtL table.

5^ VII. to contain (with Jsc)

Jo fold Xcb enclosed.

^o i) to be good, calm

G w ,

oneself vv^3 good

,j^b hail!

1>(jxb i) to fly IV. to

G - Go,

cause to fly Jub and j*bG , os

plur. jlxb! bird.

jib gazelle.

5 * --.i

juijb plur. tb^y witty person,

agreeable, comfortable.

Ua IV. to become dark

Go 3 G , ^

(xk oppression *^aG -

,

darkness *JLb oppressor

j9& oppressed

yb (u) to think, believe, esteem

S .. G ,^

O^3 plnr. Q_^k thought.

^*? (a) to seem, appear IV.

to manifest, show X. to

G , ,

get the upper hand j_j^*JGo,

appearance j^a back

Go> G- -

y$s and Sj-^1 midday

G ,

r^u? external.

^c (a) pass, to be anxious about

SeUc woollen cloak.

LkC in vain.

*** (u) to worship -

G , i-

plur. ^** slave iJ!

n. pr. kXow temple.

e. VIII. to esteem, be ex-

G.o-

perienced 8;-*^tears

sjUc expression.

412 Vocabulary.

n. pr. u*the Abbasids.

8 -ojOsman Turks.

L raging (of the sea).

I. and V. to be astonish-

ed at (with Q,) IV. to

G ,

please v^ astonishment

L^ orfv. wonderfully

wonderful *-*^^

plur. v_AjL wonderful matter.

$ (i) to be unable to do (with

^e) :_j^ plur. j^ old

woman.

^ II. to do quickly X. to

hurry J^ and iJL haste

o s- ^

paid beforehand

adv. quickly.

w ,

iXc (u) to coi\nt, number IV.

to prepare X. to prepare6 , -

oneself O^Xc and BXeG

number JoJui numerous.

III. to be equivalent to,

correspond to 0*Xc justice

O G 11- o t

oolfc just

temperate.

*Xe (a) to cease to exist, be

deprived IV. to deprive6 - -

of (with 2 accas.) r*^*want.

^vXc plur. TivXc) enemy

^fc l^c beside.

Go,v^tXc sweet (water)

G < -

sweetness v-jl^Xx: anxiety.

jtAc (i) to excuse V. to be

Go >

effaced jAc excuse.

3 . ,

i J-t arabs (coll.), bedouins

S S -oE

JjLc joi*. pr. (3^^ an arab,

a bedouin.G >.

bride, young woman,

throne.

(i) to offer, give over,

communicate, happen to

V. to interfere in - VIII. to

G 0-

oppose (J&f- breadth

6 -

broad.

Oc (i) to know II. to inform

VI. to be recognisedVIII. to confess, grant (with

Or

o,

k_j) *j^w knowledge

good, pleasure.

arak -

Vocabulary. 413

$>/> battle.

t(i) to be powerful Sjc

<3

power jjjc dear, valuable,

jc (i) to determine on (with

(jkc) ^Vj^ dinner party.

II. to comfort. .* -

plur. v_Abljc tender feeling.

n. to make difficult Ubc IV. to give VI. to give

Lac (jH*e) stick OLrebellion.

(a ^a u) to bite

IV. to support.

to be thirsty.

o.o - o,&&LC turn, side street -

difficult.

troops

soldier.

honey,

perhaps.

O , OS

plur. oUxc! herb.

xc III. to be in companyG * ~ * O o -

with ayiXc fern, yixc ten

- > O

-o3jAe. twenty.

AC V. to eat in the evening,

evening meal-time.

plur. -fi

f

sparrow.

chief city

, o, OJOE

and ^xajtX^I t n. pr. of Caliphs.

to one anotherSUacj gift

Joe II. to show honour to

GO <a , <j

l*h,r plur. .L^tc bone t^^r

excellent, extraordinary

greater part

chastity, trueness.

c (u) to pardon (with Q*)J o O , ,

_^ac pardon *-^Lc goodhealth.-- O o .

ic (i) to summon vXftc

O , oj O , j

contract Joic plur.

knot.

J*ftc plur.

plur.

intellect

intellectual.

Acre

-.".and JoO perhaps.

414 Vocabulary.

III. to treat (a patient).

o .. ..

to feed oJLc fodder

manger.

Jlc II. to hang up IV. to

kindle - V. to hold fast to

(with ij), hang together, be

dependent.

lc (a) to know II. to teach

IV. to inform V. to

Go O ) >

learn *JLc plur. f^f- science'

O ., ^ ,

doctrine xa^tc.

<s

mark *Jlc wise, learned

O S , O , J

^Lc very learned Jbwteacher.

*Jic plur. ...^Jle world.

Q!C IV. to advertise, inform.

SLe (u) to be high, loud V.

to. come near ^Lc high- os S

,Jkfc! highest, summit (J>c

high, loud, AH (n. pr.)S ~ > >

(jr^JLc. exalted o-'1*^ (God)

is exalted o^Lauc plur. t5L*x

highest aim.

, -

^^c on ...! (Jc on condition

that.

II to make general or uni-

o _

versal ^c uncle (on the

father's side) **J| \^J^o *> .>

cousin, wifepj+c public,

universality (_^ ' x*lc'

S ,

common people jLt and

S ,>

public, general

t generally.

VIII. to rely on.

e. (i) to live long -+. life,

3 * > Go * >

age J*A Omar ^x+ediminutive of the preceding

C> o ^ O

3j+c Amr j*lc flouriehing.

f^** deep.

-4-c (a) to do, have effect

IV. to hasten- VI. to transact

business with one another

J+c plur.

district

action, deed,r> S J

plur. 3U*

workman- J^*x* manufactury.

rc from, instead of.

o O -

.A with oLLc obstinacy

obstinate.

Vocabulary. 415

neok.

>

oi_jic title, address (of a letter).

^f. (i) to concern, refer to

VIII. to care for Stic paino- ..

iulic anxiety.

iXfc (a) to impose a condition,

know III. to make covenantO o -

V. to care for -Xg*contract, epoch.

OLc (JjSi u) to return, become- IV to make to return,

repeat VIII. to be accu-O ..

fitomed <Jc return

jk>tc plur.

plur.

custom

aloe wood,

stick.

i3Lc(o_j_c. u) to take refuge

(with v-i).

jlfc (j^e. u) to need, wish,

penknife.

II. to put faith in

family.

lc G>e u) to swim |Lc year.

i) to blame,

plur. ->**? feast

Christmas.

shame, disgrace.

i) to live V. to

G a ,

earn a living ij*1^ an(i

30 <5'

iLci^c Ufe A-jLc (pet

name (ji^c.) Ayesha (n. pr.

of woman) J&LjM wages,

plur. jjijLxx provisions.

cry, howl.

Lc. ((^c i) II. to determine

(.jxi plnr. Q*^i and Q^*^

eye, spring *-*-^ specimen,

proof cj-^ sick.

vc after.

si. to deceive III. to for-

y to breakfast -

breakfast ^ following

to-morrow.QLc ^j*) III and IV. to helpdfty

_X. to ask for help

-

^ V - and VIIL to nom>i8h

oneself.helper.

416 Vocabulary.

v->. (u) to set (of the sun)

<3 * "*

^>jC- sunset \-jCwest

g'o, O-o,- western

*-?j foreign

land v^j^ P^1""' *v^

strange, extraordinaryo *> +

ujyw Maghreb, western land

'O o _ O ^ - *

plur. Wjl** moor.

to sift.

i L and II. to twitter

o ,,

plur. .c piastre.

aim.

o,jAJ^ plur. O,i room.

IV. to drown.

c Gaza.

jjiabundant.

,, <5,o

iji plur. o^ji gazelle.

i raid

moraL

/*** (i) to be dark.

J^*c (i) to wash.

*. . ,

-ixc to cover iuJU,.-Ac

he fainted.

c- fresh.

c (a) to be or become angry

'. to make angry

T!'oPl- O1* covering.

':: ,r

jac X. to ask pardon.

?:>".'.*JLac. carelessness.

O

..(i) to conquer xJLc

O

victory vJuc usual.

e-(a) to make a mistake,

be deceived.

.-**

aU IV. to speak harshly.

---IV. to bolt (a door).

O,oplur. QUlLi youth.

dear.

2, 0o,j*i anxiety rj*x* anxious.

t ^ ^Q) to cover, overwhehn.

he fainted

JLc VEH. to seize an oppor-

*

tunity ^ sheep (coll.)

<5 - -

iU-Ot booty.

X. to esteem unnecessary

S -

9Lsc song f*f. plur.

rich.

Vocabulary. 417

j? ULl? the first sura of the

s ^o

key.

n. to seek (with or

(o X. to call for help.

. u) to plunge.

i I. and V. to be

O *

absent, depart Ueeo,

'

absence v^^AC distant,

X'

hidden s_*oL& absent.

J*c. (jAft)II. to change V.

to be changed j-scother

O , (, O *

than, not .*,-j

s? '*'.

withoutj.jl j*e on the

condition that.

garden, field.

fU (^ i) to be cloudy.

6-,-

iuLc highest degree.

Jand, and so, then - ^

O5y heart.

a ,

V^AJ II. to crush.

o o .

*?J6 (a) to open ^O3 opening,o ,y

capture ^y3 capture

Arabic Grammar.

Koran .-

3 (u) to rage ^iUs act of

violence.

,0

Us sedition.

^ii- youth sb&(_^*9) girl.

j^s2dawn.

'sscrutiny.

O.oand ~^Ua^ splendid.

/*-^ honoured.(^Ts. 6 .

'*

(i) to flee ,tJ flight^s

tix' eijcape.

y to ]ook ^ ^^^_

'

comfort.

plur.

at (

joy.-

(a) to rejoice

'V?f JQy

_-

j VH. to be single, alone

Oo.

*3jia piece, parcel.

-:G -

*^ Plur - U*!/^ horse, mareG - j _

U^ Plar -

Wj>\ rider-

27

418 Vocabulary.

G - JO, - - -

obiA* (upholstered) furniture. J*a3 (i) to divide II. to

iwo3 opportunity.

Go, Gcj> plur. p2J> branch, tributary

(stream)., ,, o

c 3 to finish (with Q*) IV.

to empty out, (

G ,

d empty.

3 II. to separate, isolateU

1II. to leave V. and VIII.

Go,to separate fif difference

,S.3 fear . *t3 separation

isolate, cut out J^oi plur.

section, season

j detail.

silver.

3 IV. to make excellent

Go, G j>

J-02J plur. Ojxoa excellence,

grace ^ ^Uas besides

Gi,, ''"">J**i=aj kindness

excellent.

*>23 (u) to cleave B-Ias religious

party, division feeling.

ing of the hair. **^ n - Pr - of woman -

, -, Go

(u) to rub.

G *o

plur. o|3loven.

Frank, European (coll.)

~j5FjlFrankish, European.

, O G m O,,

plur. &J^-*o3 french.

franc,

roomy.

IV. to corrupt,

old Cairo.

*i (a) to make, do Jjp

plur. (3l*l deed, verb.

-.<if. -*.

j3i plur. cist viper.

Jis to lose VIII. to seek

G o,

something lost >Jis loss

G Jo*

OyiA* wanting, not on hand,

jb plur. *U poor, needy.

3Jtt only.

o

is jurisprudence.

3 (u) to let loose.

Vocabulary. 419

& V. and VLH. to think, ^ in U*s while.

Goconsider (with (5) ^Xs and

O-o e -c*'

aJo plnr. jl&I thought.

plur. fruit.

~

peasant.

philosopher.

/Jb dawn.

^ii a certain (person)-

a certain (adj.).

O^,*j mouth.

0,ocup.

^gi (a) to understand X. to

get information about.

oli (Oj u) to pass by, escape.

oli (Oji) IV. to benefit, inform

o- , j

ojJls plur. JoJ_jS profit.

Jli (j_jiu) to acquire (with u>)

o*<

(ajjlj) to save oneself.

X. to wake up -

x_ji above, on.

^9 beans.

(y) (only with genit. and

Bufiixes) mouth.

IV. to pour

i

' " G*'

QUOO flood ijajb interest

(on money),

e ,

j^-*i bad, ugly.

Oo-

-O grave.

(i) to seize (with j^),receive money VII. to

e o-

shrinkjjioji seiture,

o - o-

receiving of money Xxoohandle.

jLIiO captain.

-o (a) to receive, take up

II. to kiss HI. to correspondto, go to meet IV. to

.advance to (with ^c.) VI.

to meet one another X.

to receive v3^*^ receptionO-o So&JU5 south J^JJ southern

i. <,<*,><,*&

(J^j^i J^r'LJ-'f upper Egypt

o, -

iJUxi tribe (of Arabs)

J^ before (prep.) ^LoG -

before (adv.) JjlS coming

o -- o ,

(month etc.)- i^^&i*** future.

420 Vocabulary.

Jcs (u) to kill III. to fight

O o , O .,

JJ3 killing- Jwy3 killed.

s (particle of strengthening

with the perf.) already

(with imperf.) sometimes.

vn.sslji ol>* reading,

Koran.j-

J_JJ (u) to be near VIII.

o o

to approach ^j* neigh-

bourhood

jOo (i) to be able II. to

determine j*Xs value * '~

o , ,E

o ., o G - plur. ilo! and ^Jilsl relative

amount 5oli' able

near

O

shortly V*

to do (with (Jo:).

Xs (a) to arrive U. to offer,

present V. to come forward,G j >

advance, precede |jOo

arrival *^Xi foot *0b

coming, next (month etc.)

plur. l*X5 ancient

r!JO in front of.

to row "

JJ (i) to persevere, be refreshed

(of the eye) IV. to confess

(with *-)~ Xl to lead to

*G ^ ^

confess J* determination-'-T

'*-** consolation

8,6 dry land, continent

2,-

yw residence.

!Js (a) to read IV. to make

to read, send (greeting)

skiflf - oJU close

to LuJij about.

ape.

ijS plur. ijijji (= -J^) piastre.

and loan.

ji (a) to knock (at a door).

VIn to marry _

century -Sl^S spouse.

^ , a ,

J plur. ^5$ village.

rate (of payment).

Constantinople.

(j) to divide, share

G - o

> plur. jLot part-

o'

division.

Vocabulary. 421

-*s III. to endure.

s ..

j>aJ> (u) to narrate to (with J^iUoS narrative, story

scissors.

(i) to aim at, make for,

ioJs (a) to cut, cut through

intend .Xoi and 3

purpose, aim.

> ~

ai IE. to neglect

shortness j& piur.

castle.

ai X. to investigate.

i '

as VII. to rush.

si=i (a) to crunch, nibble.

(i) to decide, be judge,

spend, complete VII. to

pass away VIII. to deaire,

geek _ s-LvsS decision, accom-

plishment, settlement, Kada

(Turkish district) iUxci

aflfair (J^S judge.

as cat (coll.).

ai IV. to make to drop

l^lfi ^II the land of

Egypt.

15-bjLi to waylay II.

to cut to pieces VII. to

be cut off Xjtioi piece

? , fj^

.

-Jai flock, herd -i^b"

the muqattam hill (near

Cairo).

Joti (u) tj sit down S

])!ur. J^.t_^s rule.

^-*ibottom (of the sea etc.).

T-o, O <

^ai plur. jlaidesert.

Jwfii (i) to shut xbls caravan.

U5 VIII. to follow - U5 back

of head, neck.

Jki (i) to be less than (with

O - -i, ^5

^) ULs rarely iJli

smallness i)^* small, few

- -'

S ,

_ U ^Uts seldom JJw

poor.fi O

wJli'VU. to revolve v^*o ,,

l>lur. ^J^ heart

cordial.

Sii II. to imitate.

AjiLi fortress, citadel.

422 Vocabulary.

b (a) to be disturbed IV.

G,.to disturb / iis unrest.

ilfii speech ul&* article

(in a journal etc.).

l5(jyj u) to rise, occupy one-

Vocabulary. 423

S III. and V. to endure

- o ^os G i,

Jy/ plur. oLj'! and O^*/

liver, heart, interior.

1 .

J (u) to be or become large

or great X. to esteemGO

great or important ^*Js - s -

'

pride _-u/ plur.jL/ great.

/ (u) to fall on the face.

(u) to write III. to

write to, correspond with

VIII. to subscribe iuLxi'

,

-

writing oLu plur. <M

book, letter - office

0_o.iUxXx librarv, bookshop

letter.

i' fu) to be or become nuraer-

Go, O.o.

ous J*3 and .i^ abundance

. GO,very ^r*^ rich-

. to vex -

(i) to lie.

grief.

cardinal.

trouble.

IV. to honour (with <e)V. to do one a kindnessGO. o .

P3 vineyard - *j J" generous.'

/ (a) to hate.-*-

(jf slumber.

, , ,

j^ (i) to break jJt beast

Of prey.O - , G ,

idleness &j~S veryidle.

(i) to uncover, examine

\_A<J uncovering.Os-

X& collection, all.

^ IIL to reward ~-^ a like '

P t0 '

"'>,,.gjtf

in. to fight hand to hend.

-- 6- _^ (i) to satisfy- xjUr

satisfaction.

S> - 5J

J^ every, all, whole UL^whenever.

Jl^ plur. V d g-

n to 8peak to _ ni to

converse with V. to speak* -;*^L3 speech, controversy

thr ne -

n. pr. Clot Bey.

424

how much? how many?

bill of exchange.

quantity, amount.

reddish brown.

n. pr.

U^ perfection, n. pr.

perfect.

Vocabulary.

(3 (prep.) for, to (conj.) so

that, in order to !i3J or

therefore AJ, II

January.

(i) to sweep.

^ a) almost to do.

G o

u) to be vn. ^^IX* plur. i^Arft place

s in his place.

cognac.

o .- ,

wallet, purse (j*r{^

pretty.

Gs o

how? 's*fAjS manner,contents.

i) to measure J^3measure.

O particle of emphasis Jot

perhaps rJU even if.

and t3U why? ^ so that

E

^ because.

not, no, there is not.

n. pr. Lavigerie.

y pearl (coll.).

3 III. to suit, be adapted to.

)*AJ (a) to put on (clothes)

Go O ,

vn. (j*^ (j*^ clothes,

G -o,*

G Jo-

trousers u-j^* ad ^j*^JL

clothes, clothing.'* G

jx] plur. ^LJ milk.

jLixjLebanon.

^AJII. to answer in the

affirmative.

J (a) to persevere in icpJG , >

plur. ~^> depth (of the sea).

^J VIII. to take flight.

J IV. to oppress (with j^c).

,*c^J (a) to lick.

HI. to remark

glance -xtii^J moment.

Vocabulary. 425

(a) to follow, concern

.. ,

*Ji5-bS plur. / S>-I>S appur-V^*tenance.

. G , , 6,0plur. (yi*J

meat i

a piece of meat.

plur. LkJ! melody.

beard "

cursed.

a ,

a

;

Ju IV. to make (sensuously)

oa f

pleasant ikXl pleasure

JuJJ pleasant.

y (a) to be necessary- ^

necessary - i:^ plur.*;Uneed.

^LJ plur. plS tongue, Ian-

guage.S

\ ,

"*

1 v ,

(j.aJ plur. t>>j*i5 robber.

''to treat in a friendly

way yo friendliness

lJ friendly, pleasant.

(i) to slap.

(a) I. and VI. play III.

G ,,

to jest with V_^JL) plur.

G .of

U>LJ5 play.

-.

Mb! k*5) language.S , s ,

v_jJ fold LaJ included.

y>caJ VIII. to turn to.

(a) I. and IH. to meet -IV. to throw V. to receive- VI. and VHI. to meet -X. to fall on the back

9Lu meeting.

andCT^

and

bnt

(with imPerf- in Bense of

P*rfO not -

when ' nce -

fto collect IV. to haunt,

infest (with VJ).

^t VIII. to beseech (with

W to flash ~ TV - to cause

to shine, deal with.

flacae -

vJkf!V. to sigh.

o-'

_^> if (of a pure supposition)

<**

J even if.

426

f (r_jJ u) to blame.

-, . .

'??

j-S plur. >>> colour.

would that!

not to be.

Vocabulary.

S

^* 3G,) mejidi (money

worth22 piastres and 30 paras)..^

sff gratis, free of charge.

-

s? (u) to blot out, efface.

(u) to stretch) lengthen -IV. to help, reinforce V.

v^S(^jj i) to be fitting, worthy. to stretch oneself, rest - VTII.

plur. vJU night (coll.).

J house of correction.

lemonade.

II. to soften.

Lc and \Jle what? Lo what,

that.

U not.

o , o ,

AJU (or xLc) hundred.

to praiseo

noble

to be stretched, prolonged

sJ^o respite, space of time

i>Ou plur. Of*-* material

sextended.

praise.

s*

* (u) to pass by IV. to

make bitter passing

^ when?

i* V. to appear (before a

court) Vm. to obey 5'

o-- -

JJ^ resemblance, fable

Oo e ,*

J*i* plur. ol*t like, as f'

,,r6 S

jLi pattern Oli4J' statue.

|k^* (u) to be renowned II.

glory

by, courseZjA

time

*** *>

iJ- once -^ bitter.

plm.

o woman -

e "^ l)lur "

&J*meadow.

-

Jwwyo n. pr. Mercier.

(a) to be or become sick

'0,. 6, OE

LP-* plur. t>oL*i sickness

o

sick.

Vocabulary. 427

Morocco.

> to murmur.

*.% (a) to enter (in a catalogue

os

etc.) <*y*-t ! the messiah,

2' ,

Christ - a Christian,

Christian (adj.).

J**A (i) to seize IV. to hold

o o .

back ii)c**x seizure

poor.

n. to wish good evening

IV. to be or remain in

the evening 2L*^ evening,

monsieur.

JL* (i) to go, walk V. to

walk about *&** S&^

xU plur. (J*\^A cattle.

,0 2 O

_y*ou Egypt, Cairo L2/a*

Egyptian, Cairene.

^J#*A (i) to go away, be lost

2 >

course (of time)

past, last.

(u) I. and IV. to rain

i plur. jLbil rain.

=

with, in spite of oalthough.

IV. to be

(u) to tarry, stay.

IV. to enable, be possible-- V. to be enabled to (with

possible.

JUXx machine

& (a) to fill.

> O a-

i^JU salted -.^ta sailor

x>^L navigation.

5,0u (i) to possess II. to

e o

give possession of ii\X

G o j O ^ o

and (iUx plur. i)bLl posses-

o -

sion, property *iU* plur.

angel *iUu and

er _ yjfc kingdom

mamluke, white

slave.

CT who? he who.

428 Vocabulary.

of, from, than.

o >

favour Qj~-* death

* o.

obligation, thanks.

snce.

*.ix (a) to prevent VIII. to

refuse.

Memphis.

v-iui* Manuf (a city in Egypt).

3s -

JL* V. to wish *** fate,

death.

blood.

. to be slow,

profession, trade.

oU (o^x u) to die IV. to

f' "'

andkill oy> ando , e

oL^ death -*-

o , G , b

dead.

^* pliJ"- r1 '^ ' wave.

J^j-U the Muski (a street in

Cairo).

> fs >

(colloquially (_/&*) plur.

razor -/*jx Moses,

mode, fashion.

Ju (Oy) piur. Ol^x! wealth,

capital LJt_ys (or J-[^x) a

kind of poetry.o

9 to (s^o) plur. sLy water.

s, ..

table.

i) to incline, bend

6

plur.inclination

mile.

u II. and IV. to announce to

(with accue. of person and

\*J of thing) Lo news.

o barking.

3 plur. tXj-i article (in a

journal etc.).

-o (a, i, u) to spring up (of'

water).

o VIII. to pay attention,

G- --

notice iitf'Lo wakefulness

G <

&AXJ awake, clever.

-^ joiner.

^* IV. to complete.

^ plur. v3l^Ft offspring, son.

^ plur. |>^ star

or

astrologer f^-liclear.

Vocabulary.

tip (u) to escape sLp escape,

deliverance.

Q * j-o, ^r

5 hedeath

died.

G ->

^j*L^' copper

smith.So,^& bees (coll.).

copper-

) plur. r\ji district

/? V 0-*C

^ towards, about.

VIII. to choose.

n. pr.

(u) to bewail.

o

JjJsJw* pockethandkerchief.

rA3 (a) to repent

- iUtJu

repentance - fjOo confidant.

tJJ IK. to call, summon.

J

Jvj vow

o o ^ o - os

v3tXJ plur. i3!cXJ! vile, simpletonG

f ,

abject.

i narcissus-like.

-,,

<5 fi (i) to descend, dismount**

vn.^ - ^ guest-

Jji- dwelling.

$ _

iow*o relation.'

-

a - a - 02-'^

rf^^ phir. *^U*o| and tfJL*o

textile fabric, tissue.

O - o >

iLUo copy.

, os-o

o (plur. of5y>|)

women.

t0 forget ~ IV - to

cause to forget.

L&J IV. to found LJy*

origin.

J (u) to announce - IV.

to quote, recite.

wiJ VIII. to spread.

llvely>

^ ^u) to take

G ,

O^* order- badge of an order.

o ,

lot happiness.

(a) to advise well

plur. ^.NJUOJo

advice ^job adviser.

Nazarene = Christian.

480 Vocabulary.

. to divide into halves

to be divided into

halves - vjuaj half -

middle.

being JSTJ plur. ^ju benefit

o--'

G j'

j**j yes *&lj tender.

cjLso blower,

fore-lock.. OJu (a) to be out of print.

leather mat. <3JLi II. to fulfil (a wish etc.).

G

I X. to hear a case (of a JL**->flight -

Go, G>oS G

examining U*^ Plur - U*^' and LTl^G

soul, self u~*aJ precious,ne. , rf- 'o

j-ajVIH. to use ii useful

ii (u) to see - VDI. to expect*<

ex ]sionG-, G-o- S?

jJcuand -tu glance, look

_-bli inspector jlaix ap-

pearance.

i cleanness, purity

clean, pure.

judge

Jo veil.

Go-' G >,

OJLJ plur. oyij cash, ready

money.

3JU IV. to deliver

G - ,o-

sculpture.

lowest tender.

u H. to put in order V.

and VIII. to be put in orderG

-Ltu order, law.

G,o, G <

x^J plur. 9^*J sheep.

^<oiij plur.

G- o,

Li point.

.,

ili penetrating, deadly (poison)'

G-o- o j

marsh.

I IV. to be kind to (with^ transport.

ji) f!l>to be good **> Vni. to take revenge on

G--'

G.o,**j cattle (coll.) K^o well- (with cr)-

Vocabulary. 431

VIII. to choose.

XXj witticism.

Jtx\ OpCix unhappy.

^ IV. to deny.

Go- Gj plur. (j*>*-J ichneumon.

lw Austria jjrjlw Austrian.

w^fj plundering.Go- G,os O -o

_-$j plur. _-gj|and

ji-gJt river

(a) to rise X. to

etir up to.

liL^j IV. to weaken.

L^l VIU. to be finished.

Gj

^X^J sailor.

G ,,

climate.

. o -

plur. j l_jj| light j ii plur.

_jj plur. pi_jJf kind, sort.

li (3_jJ a) to attain III. to

hand over to (with two accus.)V. to take for oneself

attainment.

a) to sleep

yoke.G

J>-o Nile.

I

"*-S

* I

LP behold! IJjCP thus.

olPcome!

OJ5;LP n. pr.

G j,

V>*P blowing (of wind).

Sj^JTthe flight ofMohammed

from Mecca to Medina (622A.D.).

l? plur. Lr>!^ unrest,

disturbance.

ill. to assail, "assault.

II. to threaten.

-.

murmur (of water).

GO .

(i) to destroy vn.pJ^>

p^XP (plur.) clothes.

(\) to guide IV. to

bestow, present

guidance, Avay of salvation.

fern. plur. *^0 this.

V.J.P (u) to flee.

G - - G , oj

j-P plur. jLPt pyramid.g

^jP part of the night.

thinness.

432 Vocabulary.

(i) to send rain.

& particle of interrogation.

^ X. to appear first (new oU>

moon), begin.

engineer.

ne .

ILL to moderate

4U2 IV. to destroy utterly

G - ..

*&$> destruction.

a- - s>-

(Jl3>and

t^>- ^Jb"come hither!

UJ> they two.

O i

p& they (masc.).

(*? (i) to be important, intend

(with <*J), be anxious about

(with J,|)Vni. to take

great pains *3> plur.

care - x> care - plur.

4 _ ''o ,o.

fL&> important -r_^^

anxious.

s_i5> (a) to be pleasant (of food

etc.) EL. congratulate

.

U-U^ good wish !

here and

n. pr. of a woman.

(price).

9 see!

u) to be or become

easy IV. to offend, affront.

passion

weather.

IL to prepare.

) to fear.

i) to stir up.

to be Passionatelylove -

, .

5> up! - Lo Lj> up, let

us go!

and, by (with genit. in oath)

misfortune , evil conse-

encet

sXjj peg.

Vocabulary. 433

trust

certificate.

(3J% wild beast.

o be necessary,

incumbent on (with ,J^)

IV. to cause X. to deserve

^L^.j affirmation

o

Wb^t) incumbent on (with

(Jc) v^si-^j in accor-

dance with.

.) to Snd -G -

existence ob?j finding

e > o ^

existent, on hand.

j*>5 small.

>5 plur. ^5! pain-

cheek.

^ II. to turn to V. to

make for VIH. to turn

x>3 plur. >>5 face, fashion

side, district -

-^>-_5 respected.

alone (with suffixes)

e o

^Xs>U one ^X^>-5 alone,,

"-

aingle.

Arabic Grammar.

_ ,

-friend8bip

to lay down> leave

(only in imperf. and imper.)_ n. to bid farewell to (withaccus.) IV. to storeO --

lo^ departure.

*

to water) to arrive IV.

o - ,

to bring olotjjj revenues

9

;3 paper.

- *>

,3 plur. ^3 vezir, minister.

i. II. to share, allot.

.?*..

) balance -x-ot

budget

dirty.

e- -

middle Aixwl^ means

> ,e,S - o .

fern. o middle.

434

5-~U wide, roomy .wuv

width, comfort.

J-l. V. to get the means for

(with ^) - XL-, means.

Vocabulary.

bring into the world, edit

place.

w^-*-; to whisper, suggest'

fl , c,

(j\f~ suggester (satan;.

(N^JUSJ) to describe

attribute.

to arrive

I have received II. to bringIII. to enter into relation

with IV. to make to arrive,

lead V. to reach VIII.

to unite, reach (with 1()-

o , ,

0^0^ arrival, reception, re-

o * ,

ceipt J*s receipt

union.

II. to make a will, recom-

mend IV. to charge

A-y<3 charge (of parents to

children etc.) will.

) -

V. to wash oneself (in

religious ablutions).

c-

^to IV. to explain -N^C!^

obvious, clear.

X2 ^*xcj) to set. place, lay,

>} to tread on.

^fib* indigenous

native land.

Jt (Oou) I. to promise (with

accus. of person, CJ of thing)

IV. to threaten, promise

SUU.A appointed time.

60, 0,c,

jt and5jC ruggedness.

Jacj III. to be exhorted,

to

i!_abundant.

JjjII. to help (of God) III.

to be suitable, correspond to,

agree to (with Jj&) VIII.

to agree, happen (jf-^j^success? (from God).

5 n. to fulfil (with vj) -

V. (pass.) to die '&> fulfil-

ment (of a promise), payment

(of a debt) sls plur. oLs^S

death -j. perfect, complete.

Vocabulary,

to be eclipsed (of

4S5

the moon).

o o, e -oc

plnr. olij! time

at that time.

quaint one with (with ^c) -1

IV. to refrain from (witho , e ,^

^) vJ^ij experience of

(with jl)-

vjttj plur.

6 o"~

olij! pious foundation or

benefaction.

- -

5 VIII. to fear - ^jSS piety.

.

fj (0 to support oneself

iXLi cushion.

- -

J^ H. to represent - V. and

V1H. to trust, rely on6. O -

SJl^ representation-

representative.

.

Ja (oJb) to bear, beget

plur. Sty boy, son jJl3

parent, father - oJJl^ mother

e. - 9 ,--w^3 birth - Xj^* birthday

to

(jJb)to fall, happen _

IV. to

let^fall

-^situ-

ated *3l_5. plnr. ^J^

-ju. v; ,

event, battle - M *S$3'

6 ,

state of aflfairs pUbjname of a dog.

to stand still, ac- _

pjar

(<) to ^ near H. to

make governor, flee X. to

magter (with j^ of g thing)

province of a wali

(governor)-6\$ wali, governor

S -

35 master ^5y master

-^*5

bett611. more suitable.

* ^"" **

i "J* mentioned.

^ 2

(WA*J) to present ,

wahhabite.- G

,

plur. pprejudice.

.

imagination,

A5 , u vice-consul.

alas!

o ,

(partic]e of rttoeaa).

,,-4J) to despair

despair.

436 Vocabulary.

G .,

Jo plur.

Jaffa.

dry (land etc.).

oc

J^il hand, help

j before him, in his

presence.

*0 II. to make easy V. to

be made easy, possible-

e

easy, small.

Jacob.

oib IV. to waken V. to be

awakened X. to wake up.

^yti (a) to be certain V. to

convince oneseli.

(j^-f right hand.

jji-L January.

G ,

>. ripe.

>-ft*yj Joseph.

e.o- 9*E

r j plur. rlj| day

day of judgement

to-day l*_j5 Ujj from

day to day U^j once

J.J.Joi3 one day.

o*-j June.

Vocabulary. 487

English-Arabic Vocabulary for the Exercises in Part II.

Able to be able to

with j^

about

accompany /&j HI.

acquaint to be acquainted

with (jof (a)

after JouOo-

age jO2 -

AH ,J^c

alight 3J3

S> e

G-- 2 --

Arab^JyK. (c61L), Arabic 3^

(J-j)

ask l~ (a)

astonish to be astonished

V^? V.

s .

atmosphere _j->

attached to be attached

H. (pass.)

allow to be allowed

alms &5.Xo

o .- o>

amazed .ixPJwU (with

ambassador

amen

plur. i\J~<

Backo ,

balance ...tv

bath ,.U>

be ^ (u)

befall OLoI

before^U!

begin Jci-! (u)

beggar ^^>

} 3U,

Beirut oangel e^L (i)t5U) plur.

"answer V'>?" ~~ to answer Desee(

- - Evj-o.1 best

Vocabulary.

better o

between ^o

bind JyJ

bitter j*

black Oj-w!

bold ^y-6 ,

book uUi' plur. ^book-shop xJ

borrow

6 .. t G ,o

boy fbU. plur. oUlc

plar. Q*-**3

Gc, >

bread jj^>

bring J^o,- - o

bring back *=_;5

bringing

G - ,

broom * L

brother

buy L

Caito y-w

G^ ,

calamity iU**a* plur

call Leo

calm OvJ>

O ,01

canalii*^j

ft ^ o

cannon o~\x

,e,,

captain ...'ujuJi

o s

captive j^*t

carry (>4J- (i)

6 - , G .

cause ~~~ plur. u^U

9, ,

caliph aJl;>

ceaseo!j (u, a)

certain a certain

chain XJuJL..

chamber*^y=-

chance *iA*a

character^SLG .

cheerful -^s .

chief

circumstance JLs*- plur.

city xU

clear

clever

Vocabulary. 439

coreair (adj.)

country ^60-

S -o,

crowd jl>OjJ

o- -

custom olc plur.

cut ji (a)

O , . r,

Danger -La> plur. j

dawn

destruction i)

determine j

die o'u> (u)

O ,

different

diligence

disappointed wJL>

- - - O 01

disturb Jjui - disturbing ~^j^

do J*3 (a)

4

dog v

door

Each j!

earthOS

except

easy to make easy J^^ o g

Egypt^ - Egyptian ^5-

f -

encircle

encroachment Jou2, -

enemy ^.Xc plur.

energy

enmity otJui

entangle to be entangled

existing things--*

expend i3t\j - expenses

experience> s -o

Ezbekiya '^Joj

60,Face x>

fair WW>e ,

faith Urf

faithful

farewell to say farewell to

escape f vn.jt^s there is ^"^

6a j

'

.

no escape ^o ^- s

especially UA** ^1 Fatima x,

father

Vocabulary. 441

442 Vocabulary.

o i fj

health *LS ink jp- - 2

hear * (a) inner

heart v^ Plur - V^* intelligent

W*h ^ intend

'

,* - s -

hither U?J.J

intercessorj*a-i plur.

..OC 6;

honour *.^! honourable +*=,

''."

-

Jacob v-^S*^

hope Jwflt plor. 3wt Joseph ^A*^J

horse J^=> (coll.) (j*J journey ye- - * * >

hour iu

O o, 60,house ^ji* o^J ,

.'.

< Key

Important most importantS kill JJ3>> o.

kingimprove

increase olj (i) kiss J

o

incumbent ^=>\ knock

indebted I shall be indebted know

to thee j^c i^J ,./s - - * -

Land .-y^j ^^4 by land

indisposition

inducement pto language *.

" &.st

large ^sJinform jx>)

^E & ~_

inhabitant plnr. jL5>t last y>t

Vocabulary. 443

lasting -Jt-

latter days

matter

meet,

learn iLtf - learnedJU plar.mem0ry

Vocabulary.

need i

G,

needlej>\ (coll.)

G , G

noble

northwards

November J

Offer (jto-c (i)

G ,i,

official jjA*

once at once

one X>-!j fern.<

G o-

another \J&*j

open gJCs

order ^jLiyo

otherj3-l

fern.

Pain p!

paleness

o ^

park

part of(j-

e

party (JfJ

M

pass by r

pasturage

patience j^o patient

pay kS (a)

6 oz

people J^?f

perfection

oS

perhaps Q !

permit w (a)

perpetuate

person

philosopher O pi.

piece

pious itf*-*

pleasant to be pleasant

^f ()o

please sUi (a) pleasure J^.4>>

pledge Q^^S plur.

G-o

pool

porter j

possessing

possessor, . o

possible to be possible o&*\

pour down (i)

Vocabulary

o, - o

power &Jlb powerful jj-Xi

- - - o o-

praise ^\A-praise (subst.) J^T

o - -

prayer S^Lo

preacher Jo='.

precious ;^p

445

s -E cs--

prepare ^Xet (intr.) U$j

preserve ^gM&i--

pride JA

prince ^*-A\ princess a-y

o E - i.

prisoner ^-v*? plur. *t -w/ 1

S - - oE

prophet -o plur.

protect lias-

punish w.

purpose plur.

reason, for this reason !J^J

by reason of

rebellion QU/ar

receive

received U

recovery

refresh to be refreshed

refuge to take refuge j^AoXc]

reject (jaij- - * >

.-(u)rejoice

- - S

remember*

request jt_

(u)

requite (^^>- with 2. accus.

2--residence TJW

446

root out Jwoli6

ruler

Saddle

eafe

sailor

same JJ^AJ with genit.

say JS (u)

Goscholar >XkJL) plur.

e ,,o -

school io^^wo plur.

60 O

science Jlc plur. -j

Vocabulary.

G

servant -JlS

secretly !j~

6 ^

security *x^L*

see ^5^ (a)

seek ^JL>

seem_- (a)

send J-w;isend back

G,o ,

sentence *i*>

separate Joe!

sew -3- (i)

Go,eheiVh ^i

shepherd c\j plur. Su

G ,o, ,

ship \~*fj* plur.

show -jli?!

G

'side

sigh ,..! sighing

? *>

since AJL

sit down y*Jb

skingJLl (a)

slay JJ36 e,- G

slave A^ plur. Jy

smite

soldier ^**st plur.

Go , t

son plur. .

Boon

sorrow Q ~>G o-

BOUl \j*JGo .

(u) sound

southwards J^A*? ~ ~

speak JXi'

Vocabulary. 447

speech

spirit

,,

standard '/JLt plur. *

steed

stick Lace

still

stone j^~ plur. ;uG

strange vo^c.

strike

strong

stubbornness

O o

success

G ,

Soltan

sweep> C Z g

Syria ptiJl Syrian

6 s

Tailor

take

teacher

tell 36 (u) with vi

ten see Less. 32.

than crsc

that (conj.) ^think ,-J

this !L\? fern. *.

2-"

thought i^fc plur. (.,_^J

threaten

throw^ (i)

thrust ^bthwart JuU

G o,

time v^Oj^o,c

to-day (yjjfl

together l*^*r*-

Go-' , ,

tomb ^X< plur. ^!>X<

to-morrov t>Xc

torn to be torn JJJ

track^!-oZ

transitorinesa *U*J|

travel ^sL* traveller

^*.'

tree ^si"

trouble iu^ -^Jj' plur.jI^/T

2 -

true Js

truly Q]

trust (J^G' s

trusty ;jyt

turn away Oy>two see Less. 32.

Unite ^>

448 Vocabulary.

Index I. 449

L Arabic Index(arranged alphabetically without regard to roots).

The numbers refer to the pages.

? 27. 55. 305. -Uitlj 54. 305.

44 f. 47. 49. 242. 245.

,-| II. 38. 47. 242. 257. 277. ...** , o

8jLsjH ^| MJ! 185.

J5T 111 241.1 38. 44. 49. 242. 245.

OeU 198l j llf 249.

.

-Uo t 122. .o- , o

J^UJI ^| 88. 233. 238.

J 315. 323.

~] 90.

291. 315. 322. 328.

ix^| 315. 't j] 244 ff. 257. 270. 271.

joXv 99. *L> *- 57flF. 246 ff.

95. 119f.(

j249.

Arabic Grammar.

450

jfjjllj

227.

'

\ 233.

usCx* +~[ 249.

*",*, o'o ^23.KW! 202 ff. SE

^ 9. 78.

53.

3j 315. 324.

197. .*.*iCCJJ 310.

41. 44 ff. 281. _

^JJ! 202ff.

oLc] 274 ff.

JL!? 2f.

99.

Jkil 7. 253.

95. 112 ff.

i? 7. 253.

^'u6|96. 118.

~* J54 '

-0^1 j o oS

^'95.io2 ff. ^UiJ-illeaff.- J ,JO^> > o Oc

Jel 57 ff. 246. 247. 257. 274. ^j^' J^i 62. 71 ff.

o s *> j oi j j e ,o

kj^AJt Job! 58. 257. 4^*^^ 89 -

i ^ O. J -*0

M^ I 96. 116ff. **^i j1^ 205 -

99.ryl! 89.

JJL] 193. y'l ^ s

lULdij 96.j,]

63. 293.

305.

S*

rt 46. 271.

" 316-

U] 316.

, .'

rU 299.

OcS

y! 62. 84ff,

^S 197.

? 78. 91. 316.

^ 815. 323.

^f 90. 280. 816.

yl 90. 279. 280. 306 f.

UJj 807.

j 95. Ill f.

Index I. 451

V *M- 329.

o,.. ,

291.

197.

or

J3J 2g4

- *>- - - *, >- -

JJJ! J^J! Jju 288.

452 Index I.

- o- -o--

^-.J299 f. Jl>' 193.

U* 317. Sul-j 181. 171.

317.

300.

99-

o 291.

LJ 800.

to s.

L 237. 280.

9'J 3.

G o,

sjlj310. cr*^ 7 -

O-Go- Go-'H 283.

ij- 283. /*3 307.

''. f8 *"-

- 188.

.-- S -

290.

2-

y^ 40 ff. 281 ff.

'

300-Sfj^.

321.

8.fciji.

6. 8.

tr:-

^> 29. 256.5. 108 f. F^ 6o ^

30. 256.

? ?.: cor .,^J^ Jt*> 30. 33 ff. 259 ff.

Jwysiaj 58 f. 247.

64. 90.

Jauu 95. 107 6s

'

G o ^

J*i> 99.

Index I. 458

64. 91. *JT+S 0*->- 5.

O B. * 4 J

***> 282. xLaX* v-^^ 3.

6 - - A*J5^/0 ^*5T** 5.

321.

8.

280. 293. s

'

o> 6 , ,

5.

^ 45. 49.

800. .V-v5y>- 300.

1. 290 ff. viJ^ 309. 824.

315 Uixs- 809. 824.

310.

305.

^3. 65. 90. 279. 280.

s> 281 ff.

322 f. Jufti- 340.

327 ff. jJi. 800<

313. ^ 59'

6 . f^/^197 '

, > , us,*300. 329.

%= 15 f. ^ , ,

i^^O 317.

5.

!o 53.

'

K no * ~5 - M -

o!3 28

5. ^)l3 53.

454 Index I.

<i)u3 53. SojL 321.

^ 194.* 383 '

.S 45. 46. 257. J*f332 '

- c, ,.

^lj 185 ff.

l>!' 204.46.

^/ >o 197. 198.

J>1 335. c.

oo. * 57 ff. 204. 246 ff.

,o. 40 ff. 279.* J o.

KJLo 203.

J-^ 336.

Os-

3lj195.

^^ 5 -

49. 287 ff.

73. 305. 323.

187. LSJ? ^4-a 288. 316.

6. 8. => -

J^ax^i jA^*to49.

. 330.

_

49.

332.

388.

329.

337.73. 305. 323.

282. vj 279. 299.

188.204 -

2 '

-ii 59. olc 196.

Index I. 455

* ,

332. ,31*5 99.

194 -

288. 288..

^ 282. ^ >* 121-

O^ J^ 317 ' 1^ > 121.

c 41. 274. - ,o. so

^JL. ^ J-* 121

78. 313. 323. o , o

r;^ J-i 279.

s 95. 101 f.

. 64. 86 f. 246. 279.

456 Index I.

94 ff. J^S 801.

121 ft 144.^65.307.323.

60 f

Joe 68. 122. 143. f-

Jb3 307.G o

> 121. 129 ff. Uii 196.

143. 167 if. 292.

v

*',

^ 19 -

J-9 234-

-- K* 282. 283.^U 57. 246. 253. 275. G .

Jw.K 337.

JJbe 193.

S^ 57. 246.254. 264. O^^WG *. ^ 68 f. 73 f. 81. 87. 197. 280.

4^* 243. 322.

57. 246. 254. 260. 2.51.

268. 265. 266. S 282. 283.

242."

308.

242. Oi3' 282.

242. U2 324.

307. ? 324 '

J" 55.

. ^ 0>^' 250.

341.296.'

Jil/ 310. 324.

^332. 'r-oo324.

Index I.

V Sl7 ^ 317. 822. 828. 824.

3 88. 90. 305 f. 323. O* JT 8l7 - 82*-

v3 41. 50. 76. 82. 237. 291f . 314. ^J 280. 310.

457

194. 197. 291.

81. 808. U (negation) 291. 308. 828.

310.5> 208 ' 817 ' 824 '

j^>**xrfU 817.

309.

'

280. 308. ^ ^ mr

1^ ^ 196 -

279.{jJou 62.

78. 314. 316. ?-- '

tJOLy> 64. 90. 279.

g,3 ( ^{) 78. 314. 816. *i* i5X~ 283.

So.rr^SlS. ,*u* 274.

X* 279.

^ 6.

J 82. 308. 317. !282'

^J 78. 808. 328. JiI 29. 256.

458 Index I.

f 339.

94. jJLcUx 99.

0,c.>

278. 290. OJk* 29. 256.

Os , O-oSJ^x 13 f. JbuU 241,

Index I.

49- J^ 27. 55. 305. 809.

324. & 329 '

832.

j**>9. 10 ff.

i 244 ff. 257. 271. U$>(<i)U$>, J)JUP) 309.

i 40 ff. 279 ff. Up 329.

f*" ooz '

3 78. 281. 291. 813 ff.

(^308>

^slj336.

f*5 194-

ob 815 -

JUi 283. 288. ^ y gH

y-I^l ^ 280. 308.

*** 310.

ltf^3 81. 306.

G-, 4j* 302.

^ft*JT

216. G ,

336

U> 328. " r'

11

329. oo,sjks 333.

y, 317.

iO o, 6 t,, 6 o,

100 53. VHS (g^5. ^-5' 328 -

5 --

336. li 50. 85. 279. 281. 327 f.

460 Index II.

II. English Index,

Abbreviations 16.

Abstracts 249.

Accent 15.

Accusative 279 ff.

Address, Particles of, 50, 85 f.

Adjectives 57 ff. 246 ff. 254, 258.

Adverbs 305 ff.

Age 220.

Alphabet If.

Article 23 f.

Cardinal numbers 210 ff.

Catalexis 334 ff.

Class names 249.

Cognate accusative 237 f.

Collectives 27.

Concrete nouns 249.

Conditional sentences 321 ff.

Conjnnctions 313 ff.

Dates 220.

Declension 40 ff. 274 ff.

Demonstratives, see Pronouns.Diminutives 242 f.

Diptotes 274 ff.

Distributive adjectives 228 t.

Dual 29.

Elative 58 f.

Emphasis 283.

Endearment 243.

Exception 315.

Feminine 25 ff. 251 ff.

Foreign words 254, 258 f.

Fractions 228.

Future 73, 305.

Genitive 41 ff.

Imperative 84 f.

Imperfect see Indicative, Sub-

junctive, Jussive.

Indeclinables 214, 226, 274, 309.Indicative 71 ff.

Instrument 241.Intensives 247.

Interjections 327 ff.

Interrogatives 27, 54.

Intransitive verbs 279.

Jussive 77, 80 ff.

Metres 335 ff.

Months 21-5 ff.

Moods 76 ff.

Negatives 308.

Nominal sentences 64 f.

Nominative 279.

Number 29 ff. 256 ff.

Numerals 210 ff.

Nunation 7 f.

Ordinals 225 ff.

Participles: Active 86 f. 238.

Pass. 90.

Particles 90 ff. 290 ff.

Passive 89 ff.

Pause 333.

Perfect 61 ff.

Permutative 283 ff.

Place and Time, nouns of, 240 f.

Pluperfect 68.

Plural: sound 30 f. broken 33 ff.

259 ff.

Poetry 332 ff.

Predicate 69.

Prepositions 41 ff. 290 ff.

Prohibition 81, 85.

Pronouns: Demonstrative 53 f.

Interrogative 54 f. Personal

31, 287 ff. Suffixed 49 f. 67 f.

Pronunciation 4.

Proper names 249, 250.

Index II. 461

Reflexives 288. Verbal nouns 87, 233 ff.

Relative adjectives 244 ff. 271. Verbal sentences 64.

Relative sentences 202 ff. Verbs 61 ff.

Rhymed prose 332. Derived forms 94 ff.

Doubled 122 ff.

Subjunctive 77 ff. Doubly weak 184 ff.

Syllables 14 f. Hamzated 129 ff.

Quadriliteral 193ff.

Unity, nouns of, 27, 253. Weak 148 ff.

Vowels 5 ff.

Printed by C. F. Winter, Darmstadt.

University of California

SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388

Return this material to the libraryfrom which it was borrowed.

000 020 667 2